The Linux Kernel API¶
List Management Functions¶
-
void INIT_LIST_HEAD(struct list_head *list)¶
Initialize a list_head structure
Parameters
struct list_head *listlist_head structure to be initialized.
Description
Initializes the list_head to point to itself. If it is a list header, the result is an empty list.
-
void list_add(struct list_head *new, struct list_head *head)¶
add a new entry
Parameters
struct list_head *newnew entry to be added
struct list_head *headlist head to add it after
Description
Insert a new entry after the specified head. This is good for implementing stacks.
-
void list_add_tail(struct list_head *new, struct list_head *head)¶
add a new entry
Parameters
struct list_head *newnew entry to be added
struct list_head *headlist head to add it before
Description
Insert a new entry before the specified head. This is useful for implementing queues.
-
void list_del(struct list_head *entry)¶
deletes entry from list.
Parameters
struct list_head *entrythe element to delete from the list.
Note
list_empty() on entry does not return true after this, the entry is
in an undefined state.
-
void list_replace(struct list_head *old, struct list_head *new)¶
replace old entry by new one
Parameters
struct list_head *oldthe element to be replaced
struct list_head *newthe new element to insert
Description
If old was empty, it will be overwritten.
-
void list_replace_init(struct list_head *old, struct list_head *new)¶
replace old entry by new one and initialize the old one
Parameters
struct list_head *oldthe element to be replaced
struct list_head *newthe new element to insert
Description
If old was empty, it will be overwritten.
-
void list_swap(struct list_head *entry1, struct list_head *entry2)¶
replace entry1 with entry2 and re-add entry1 at entry2’s position
Parameters
struct list_head *entry1the location to place entry2
struct list_head *entry2the location to place entry1
-
void list_del_init(struct list_head *entry)¶
deletes entry from list and reinitialize it.
Parameters
struct list_head *entrythe element to delete from the list.
-
void list_move(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head)¶
delete from one list and add as another’s head
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe entry to move
struct list_head *headthe head that will precede our entry
-
void list_move_tail(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head)¶
delete from one list and add as another’s tail
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe entry to move
struct list_head *headthe head that will follow our entry
-
void list_bulk_move_tail(struct list_head *head, struct list_head *first, struct list_head *last)¶
move a subsection of a list to its tail
Parameters
struct list_head *headthe head that will follow our entry
struct list_head *firstfirst entry to move
struct list_head *lastlast entry to move, can be the same as first
Description
Move all entries between first and including last before head. All three entries must belong to the same linked list.
-
int list_is_first(const struct list_head *list, const struct list_head *head)¶
tests whether list is the first entry in list head
Parameters
const struct list_head *listthe entry to test
const struct list_head *headthe head of the list
-
int list_is_last(const struct list_head *list, const struct list_head *head)¶
tests whether list is the last entry in list head
Parameters
const struct list_head *listthe entry to test
const struct list_head *headthe head of the list
-
int list_is_head(const struct list_head *list, const struct list_head *head)¶
tests whether list is the list head
Parameters
const struct list_head *listthe entry to test
const struct list_head *headthe head of the list
-
int list_empty(const struct list_head *head)¶
tests whether a list is empty
Parameters
const struct list_head *headthe list to test.
-
void list_del_init_careful(struct list_head *entry)¶
deletes entry from list and reinitialize it.
Parameters
struct list_head *entrythe element to delete from the list.
Description
This is the same as list_del_init(), except designed to be used
together with list_empty_careful() in a way to guarantee ordering
of other memory operations.
Any memory operations done before a list_del_init_careful() are
guaranteed to be visible after a list_empty_careful() test.
-
int list_empty_careful(const struct list_head *head)¶
tests whether a list is empty and not being modified
Parameters
const struct list_head *headthe list to test
Description
tests whether a list is empty _and_ checks that no other CPU might be in the process of modifying either member (next or prev)
NOTE
using list_empty_careful() without synchronization
can only be safe if the only activity that can happen
to the list entry is list_del_init(). Eg. it cannot be used
if another CPU could re-list_add() it.
-
void list_rotate_left(struct list_head *head)¶
rotate the list to the left
Parameters
struct list_head *headthe head of the list
-
void list_rotate_to_front(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head)¶
Rotate list to specific item.
Parameters
struct list_head *listThe desired new front of the list.
struct list_head *headThe head of the list.
Description
Rotates list so that list becomes the new front of the list.
-
int list_is_singular(const struct list_head *head)¶
tests whether a list has just one entry.
Parameters
const struct list_head *headthe list to test.
-
void list_cut_position(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head, struct list_head *entry)¶
cut a list into two
Parameters
struct list_head *lista new list to add all removed entries
struct list_head *heada list with entries
struct list_head *entryan entry within head, could be the head itself and if so we won’t cut the list
Description
This helper moves the initial part of head, up to and including entry, from head to list. You should pass on entry an element you know is on head. list should be an empty list or a list you do not care about losing its data.
-
void list_cut_before(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head, struct list_head *entry)¶
cut a list into two, before given entry
Parameters
struct list_head *lista new list to add all removed entries
struct list_head *heada list with entries
struct list_head *entryan entry within head, could be the head itself
Description
This helper moves the initial part of head, up to but excluding entry, from head to list. You should pass in entry an element you know is on head. list should be an empty list or a list you do not care about losing its data. If entry == head, all entries on head are moved to list.
-
void list_splice(const struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head)¶
join two lists, this is designed for stacks
Parameters
const struct list_head *listthe new list to add.
struct list_head *headthe place to add it in the first list.
-
void list_splice_tail(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head)¶
join two lists, each list being a queue
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe new list to add.
struct list_head *headthe place to add it in the first list.
-
void list_splice_init(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head)¶
join two lists and reinitialise the emptied list.
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe new list to add.
struct list_head *headthe place to add it in the first list.
Description
The list at list is reinitialised
-
void list_splice_tail_init(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head)¶
join two lists and reinitialise the emptied list
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe new list to add.
struct list_head *headthe place to add it in the first list.
Description
Each of the lists is a queue. The list at list is reinitialised
-
list_entry¶
list_entry (ptr, type, member)
get the struct for this entry
Parameters
ptrthe
struct list_headpointer.typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
-
list_first_entry¶
list_first_entry (ptr, type, member)
get the first element from a list
Parameters
ptrthe list head to take the element from.
typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Note, that list is expected to be not empty.
-
list_last_entry¶
list_last_entry (ptr, type, member)
get the last element from a list
Parameters
ptrthe list head to take the element from.
typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Note, that list is expected to be not empty.
-
list_first_entry_or_null¶
list_first_entry_or_null (ptr, type, member)
get the first element from a list
Parameters
ptrthe list head to take the element from.
typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Note that if the list is empty, it returns NULL.
-
list_next_entry¶
list_next_entry (pos, member)
get the next element in list
Parameters
posthe type * to cursor
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
-
list_next_entry_circular¶
list_next_entry_circular (pos, head, member)
get the next element in list
Parameters
posthe type * to cursor.
headthe list head to take the element from.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Wraparound if pos is the last element (return the first element). Note, that list is expected to be not empty.
-
list_prev_entry¶
list_prev_entry (pos, member)
get the prev element in list
Parameters
posthe type * to cursor
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
-
list_prev_entry_circular¶
list_prev_entry_circular (pos, head, member)
get the prev element in list
Parameters
posthe type * to cursor.
headthe list head to take the element from.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Wraparound if pos is the first element (return the last element). Note, that list is expected to be not empty.
-
list_for_each¶
list_for_each (pos, head)
iterate over a list
Parameters
posthe
struct list_headto use as a loop cursor.headthe head for your list.
-
list_for_each_reverse¶
list_for_each_reverse (pos, head)
iterate backwards over a list
Parameters
posthe
struct list_headto use as a loop cursor.headthe head for your list.
-
list_for_each_rcu¶
list_for_each_rcu (pos, head)
Iterate over a list in an RCU-safe fashion
Parameters
posthe
struct list_headto use as a loop cursor.headthe head for your list.
-
list_for_each_continue¶
list_for_each_continue (pos, head)
continue iteration over a list
Parameters
posthe
struct list_headto use as a loop cursor.headthe head for your list.
Description
Continue to iterate over a list, continuing after the current position.
-
list_for_each_prev¶
list_for_each_prev (pos, head)
iterate over a list backwards
Parameters
posthe
struct list_headto use as a loop cursor.headthe head for your list.
-
list_for_each_safe¶
list_for_each_safe (pos, n, head)
iterate over a list safe against removal of list entry
Parameters
posthe
struct list_headto use as a loop cursor.nanother
struct list_headto use as temporary storageheadthe head for your list.
-
list_for_each_prev_safe¶
list_for_each_prev_safe (pos, n, head)
iterate over a list backwards safe against removal of list entry
Parameters
posthe
struct list_headto use as a loop cursor.nanother
struct list_headto use as temporary storageheadthe head for your list.
-
size_t list_count_nodes(struct list_head *head)¶
count nodes in the list
Parameters
struct list_head *headthe head for your list.
-
list_entry_is_head¶
list_entry_is_head (pos, head, member)
test if the entry points to the head of the list
Parameters
posthe type * to cursor
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
-
list_for_each_entry¶
list_for_each_entry (pos, head, member)
iterate over list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
-
list_for_each_entry_reverse¶
list_for_each_entry_reverse (pos, head, member)
iterate backwards over list of given type.
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
-
list_prepare_entry¶
list_prepare_entry (pos, head, member)
prepare a pos entry for use in
list_for_each_entry_continue()
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a start point
headthe head of the list
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Prepares a pos entry for use as a start point in list_for_each_entry_continue().
-
list_for_each_entry_continue¶
list_for_each_entry_continue (pos, head, member)
continue iteration over list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Continue to iterate over list of given type, continuing after the current position.
-
list_for_each_entry_continue_reverse¶
list_for_each_entry_continue_reverse (pos, head, member)
iterate backwards from the given point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Start to iterate over list of given type backwards, continuing after the current position.
-
list_for_each_entry_from¶
list_for_each_entry_from (pos, head, member)
iterate over list of given type from the current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Iterate over list of given type, continuing from current position.
-
list_for_each_entry_from_reverse¶
list_for_each_entry_from_reverse (pos, head, member)
iterate backwards over list of given type from the current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Iterate backwards over list of given type, continuing from current position.
-
list_for_each_entry_safe¶
list_for_each_entry_safe (pos, n, head, member)
iterate over list of given type safe against removal of list entry
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
nanother type * to use as temporary storage
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
-
list_for_each_entry_safe_continue¶
list_for_each_entry_safe_continue (pos, n, head, member)
continue list iteration safe against removal
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
nanother type * to use as temporary storage
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Iterate over list of given type, continuing after current point, safe against removal of list entry.
-
list_for_each_entry_safe_from¶
list_for_each_entry_safe_from (pos, n, head, member)
iterate over list from current point safe against removal
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
nanother type * to use as temporary storage
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Iterate over list of given type from current point, safe against removal of list entry.
-
list_for_each_entry_safe_reverse¶
list_for_each_entry_safe_reverse (pos, n, head, member)
iterate backwards over list safe against removal
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
nanother type * to use as temporary storage
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Iterate backwards over list of given type, safe against removal of list entry.
-
list_safe_reset_next¶
list_safe_reset_next (pos, n, member)
reset a stale list_for_each_entry_safe loop
Parameters
posthe loop cursor used in the list_for_each_entry_safe loop
ntemporary storage used in list_for_each_entry_safe
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
list_safe_reset_next is not safe to use in general if the list may be modified concurrently (eg. the lock is dropped in the loop body). An exception to this is if the cursor element (pos) is pinned in the list, and list_safe_reset_next is called after re-taking the lock and before completing the current iteration of the loop body.
-
int hlist_unhashed(const struct hlist_node *h)¶
Has node been removed from list and reinitialized?
Parameters
const struct hlist_node *hNode to be checked
Description
Not that not all removal functions will leave a node in unhashed
state. For example, hlist_nulls_del_init_rcu() does leave the
node in unhashed state, but hlist_nulls_del() does not.
-
int hlist_unhashed_lockless(const struct hlist_node *h)¶
Version of hlist_unhashed for lockless use
Parameters
const struct hlist_node *hNode to be checked
Description
This variant of hlist_unhashed() must be used in lockless contexts
to avoid potential load-tearing. The READ_ONCE() is paired with the
various WRITE_ONCE() in hlist helpers that are defined below.
-
int hlist_empty(const struct hlist_head *h)¶
Is the specified hlist_head structure an empty hlist?
Parameters
const struct hlist_head *hStructure to check.
-
void hlist_del(struct hlist_node *n)¶
Delete the specified hlist_node from its list
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nNode to delete.
Description
Note that this function leaves the node in hashed state. Use
hlist_del_init() or similar instead to unhash n.
-
void hlist_del_init(struct hlist_node *n)¶
Delete the specified hlist_node from its list and initialize
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nNode to delete.
Description
Note that this function leaves the node in unhashed state.
-
void hlist_add_head(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_head *h)¶
add a new entry at the beginning of the hlist
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nnew entry to be added
struct hlist_head *hhlist head to add it after
Description
Insert a new entry after the specified head. This is good for implementing stacks.
-
void hlist_add_before(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_node *next)¶
add a new entry before the one specified
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nnew entry to be added
struct hlist_node *nexthlist node to add it before, which must be non-NULL
-
void hlist_add_behind(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_node *prev)¶
add a new entry after the one specified
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nnew entry to be added
struct hlist_node *prevhlist node to add it after, which must be non-NULL
-
void hlist_add_fake(struct hlist_node *n)¶
create a fake hlist consisting of a single headless node
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nNode to make a fake list out of
Description
This makes n appear to be its own predecessor on a headless hlist.
The point of this is to allow things like hlist_del() to work correctly
in cases where there is no list.
-
bool hlist_fake(struct hlist_node *h)¶
Is this node a fake hlist?
Parameters
struct hlist_node *hNode to check for being a self-referential fake hlist.
-
bool hlist_is_singular_node(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_head *h)¶
is node the only element of the specified hlist?
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nNode to check for singularity.
struct hlist_head *hHeader for potentially singular list.
Description
Check whether the node is the only node of the head without accessing head, thus avoiding unnecessary cache misses.
-
void hlist_move_list(struct hlist_head *old, struct hlist_head *new)¶
Move an hlist
Parameters
struct hlist_head *oldhlist_head for old list.
struct hlist_head *newhlist_head for new list.
Description
Move a list from one list head to another. Fixup the pprev reference of the first entry if it exists.
-
void hlist_splice_init(struct hlist_head *from, struct hlist_node *last, struct hlist_head *to)¶
move all entries from one list to another
Parameters
struct hlist_head *fromhlist_head from which entries will be moved
struct hlist_node *lastlast entry on the from list
struct hlist_head *tohlist_head to which entries will be moved
Description
to can be empty, from must contain at least last.
-
hlist_for_each_entry¶
hlist_for_each_entry (pos, head, member)
iterate over list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_continue¶
hlist_for_each_entry_continue (pos, member)
iterate over a hlist continuing after current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_from¶
hlist_for_each_entry_from (pos, member)
iterate over a hlist continuing from current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_safe¶
hlist_for_each_entry_safe (pos, n, head, member)
iterate over list of given type safe against removal of list entry
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
na
struct hlist_nodeto use as temporary storageheadthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
-
size_t hlist_count_nodes(struct hlist_head *head)¶
count nodes in the hlist
Parameters
struct hlist_head *headthe head for your hlist.
Basic C Library Functions¶
When writing drivers, you cannot in general use routines which are from the C Library. Some of the functions have been found generally useful and they are listed below. The behaviour of these functions may vary slightly from those defined by ANSI, and these deviations are noted in the text.
String Conversions¶
-
unsigned long long simple_strtoull(const char *cp, char **endp, unsigned int base)¶
convert a string to an unsigned long long
Parameters
const char *cpThe start of the string
char **endpA pointer to the end of the parsed string will be placed here
unsigned int baseThe number base to use
Description
This function has caveats. Please use kstrtoull instead.
-
unsigned long simple_strtoul(const char *cp, char **endp, unsigned int base)¶
convert a string to an unsigned long
Parameters
const char *cpThe start of the string
char **endpA pointer to the end of the parsed string will be placed here
unsigned int baseThe number base to use
Description
This function has caveats. Please use kstrtoul instead.
-
long simple_strtol(const char *cp, char **endp, unsigned int base)¶
convert a string to a signed long
Parameters
const char *cpThe start of the string
char **endpA pointer to the end of the parsed string will be placed here
unsigned int baseThe number base to use
Description
This function has caveats. Please use kstrtol instead.
-
long long simple_strtoll(const char *cp, char **endp, unsigned int base)¶
convert a string to a signed long long
Parameters
const char *cpThe start of the string
char **endpA pointer to the end of the parsed string will be placed here
unsigned int baseThe number base to use
Description
This function has caveats. Please use kstrtoll instead.
-
int vsnprintf(char *buf, size_t size, const char *fmt, va_list args)¶
Format a string and place it in a buffer
Parameters
char *bufThe buffer to place the result into
size_t sizeThe size of the buffer, including the trailing null space
const char *fmtThe format string to use
va_list argsArguments for the format string
Description
This function generally follows C99 vsnprintf, but has some extensions and a few limitations:
``n``is unsupported
``p*``is handled by pointer()
See pointer() or How to get printk format specifiers right for more extensive description.
Please update the documentation in both places when making changes
The return value is the number of characters which would
be generated for the given input, excluding the trailing
‘0’, as per ISO C99. If you want to have the exact
number of characters written into buf as return value
(not including the trailing ‘0’), use vscnprintf(). If the
return is greater than or equal to size, the resulting
string is truncated.
If you’re not already dealing with a va_list consider using snprintf().
-
int vscnprintf(char *buf, size_t size, const char *fmt, va_list args)¶
Format a string and place it in a buffer
Parameters
char *bufThe buffer to place the result into
size_t sizeThe size of the buffer, including the trailing null space
const char *fmtThe format string to use
va_list argsArguments for the format string
Description
The return value is the number of characters which have been written into the buf not including the trailing ‘0’. If size is == 0 the function returns 0.
If you’re not already dealing with a va_list consider using scnprintf().
See the vsnprintf() documentation for format string extensions over C99.
-
int snprintf(char *buf, size_t size, const char *fmt, ...)¶
Format a string and place it in a buffer
Parameters
char *bufThe buffer to place the result into
size_t sizeThe size of the buffer, including the trailing null space
const char *fmtThe format string to use
...Arguments for the format string
Description
The return value is the number of characters which would be generated for the given input, excluding the trailing null, as per ISO C99. If the return is greater than or equal to size, the resulting string is truncated.
See the vsnprintf() documentation for format string extensions over C99.
-
int scnprintf(char *buf, size_t size, const char *fmt, ...)¶
Format a string and place it in a buffer
Parameters
char *bufThe buffer to place the result into
size_t sizeThe size of the buffer, including the trailing null space
const char *fmtThe format string to use
...Arguments for the format string
Description
The return value is the number of characters written into buf not including the trailing ‘0’. If size is == 0 the function returns 0.
-
int vsprintf(char *buf, const char *fmt, va_list args)¶
Format a string and place it in a buffer
Parameters
char *bufThe buffer to place the result into
const char *fmtThe format string to use
va_list argsArguments for the format string
Description
The function returns the number of characters written
into buf. Use vsnprintf() or vscnprintf() in order to avoid
buffer overflows.
If you’re not already dealing with a va_list consider using sprintf().
See the vsnprintf() documentation for format string extensions over C99.
-
int sprintf(char *buf, const char *fmt, ...)¶
Format a string and place it in a buffer
Parameters
char *bufThe buffer to place the result into
const char *fmtThe format string to use
...Arguments for the format string
Description
The function returns the number of characters written
into buf. Use snprintf() or scnprintf() in order to avoid
buffer overflows.
See the vsnprintf() documentation for format string extensions over C99.
-
int vbin_printf(u32 *bin_buf, size_t size, const char *fmt, va_list args)¶
Parse a format string and place args’ binary value in a buffer
Parameters
u32 *bin_bufThe buffer to place args’ binary value
size_t sizeThe size of the buffer(by words(32bits), not characters)
const char *fmtThe format string to use
va_list argsArguments for the format string
Description
The format follows C99 vsnprintf, except n is ignored, and its argument
is skipped.
The return value is the number of words(32bits) which would be generated for the given input.
NOTE
If the return value is greater than size, the resulting bin_buf is NOT
valid for bstr_printf().
-
int bstr_printf(char *buf, size_t size, const char *fmt, const u32 *bin_buf)¶
Format a string from binary arguments and place it in a buffer
Parameters
char *bufThe buffer to place the result into
size_t sizeThe size of the buffer, including the trailing null space
const char *fmtThe format string to use
const u32 *bin_bufBinary arguments for the format string
Description
This function like C99 vsnprintf, but the difference is that vsnprintf gets arguments from stack, and bstr_printf gets arguments from bin_buf which is a binary buffer that generated by vbin_printf.
- The format follows C99 vsnprintf, but has some extensions:
see vsnprintf comment for details.
The return value is the number of characters which would
be generated for the given input, excluding the trailing
‘0’, as per ISO C99. If you want to have the exact
number of characters written into buf as return value
(not including the trailing ‘0’), use vscnprintf(). If the
return is greater than or equal to size, the resulting
string is truncated.
-
int bprintf(u32 *bin_buf, size_t size, const char *fmt, ...)¶
Parse a format string and place args’ binary value in a buffer
Parameters
u32 *bin_bufThe buffer to place args’ binary value
size_t sizeThe size of the buffer(by words(32bits), not characters)
const char *fmtThe format string to use
...Arguments for the format string
Description
The function returns the number of words(u32) written into bin_buf.
-
int vsscanf(const char *buf, const char *fmt, va_list args)¶
Unformat a buffer into a list of arguments
Parameters
const char *bufinput buffer
const char *fmtformat of buffer
va_list argsarguments
-
int sscanf(const char *buf, const char *fmt, ...)¶
Unformat a buffer into a list of arguments
Parameters
const char *bufinput buffer
const char *fmtformatting of buffer
...resulting arguments
-
int kstrtoul(const char *s, unsigned int base, unsigned long *res)¶
convert a string to an unsigned long
Parameters
const char *sThe start of the string. The string must be null-terminated, and may also include a single newline before its terminating null. The first character may also be a plus sign, but not a minus sign.
unsigned int baseThe number base to use. The maximum supported base is 16. If base is given as 0, then the base of the string is automatically detected with the conventional semantics - If it begins with 0x the number will be parsed as a hexadecimal (case insensitive), if it otherwise begins with 0, it will be parsed as an octal number. Otherwise it will be parsed as a decimal.
unsigned long *resWhere to write the result of the conversion on success.
Description
Returns 0 on success, -ERANGE on overflow and -EINVAL on parsing error.
Preferred over simple_strtoul(). Return code must be checked.
-
int kstrtol(const char *s, unsigned int base, long *res)¶
convert a string to a long
Parameters
const char *sThe start of the string. The string must be null-terminated, and may also include a single newline before its terminating null. The first character may also be a plus sign or a minus sign.
unsigned int baseThe number base to use. The maximum supported base is 16. If base is given as 0, then the base of the string is automatically detected with the conventional semantics - If it begins with 0x the number will be parsed as a hexadecimal (case insensitive), if it otherwise begins with 0, it will be parsed as an octal number. Otherwise it will be parsed as a decimal.
long *resWhere to write the result of the conversion on success.
Description
Returns 0 on success, -ERANGE on overflow and -EINVAL on parsing error.
Preferred over simple_strtol(). Return code must be checked.
-
int kstrtoull(const char *s, unsigned int base, unsigned long long *res)¶
convert a string to an unsigned long long
Parameters
const char *sThe start of the string. The string must be null-terminated, and may also include a single newline before its terminating null. The first character may also be a plus sign, but not a minus sign.
unsigned int baseThe number base to use. The maximum supported base is 16. If base is given as 0, then the base of the string is automatically detected with the conventional semantics - If it begins with 0x the number will be parsed as a hexadecimal (case insensitive), if it otherwise begins with 0, it will be parsed as an octal number. Otherwise it will be parsed as a decimal.
unsigned long long *resWhere to write the result of the conversion on success.
Description
Returns 0 on success, -ERANGE on overflow and -EINVAL on parsing error.
Preferred over simple_strtoull(). Return code must be checked.
-
int kstrtoll(const char *s, unsigned int base, long long *res)¶
convert a string to a long long
Parameters
const char *sThe start of the string. The string must be null-terminated, and may also include a single newline before its terminating null. The first character may also be a plus sign or a minus sign.
unsigned int baseThe number base to use. The maximum supported base is 16. If base is given as 0, then the base of the string is automatically detected with the conventional semantics - If it begins with 0x the number will be parsed as a hexadecimal (case insensitive), if it otherwise begins with 0, it will be parsed as an octal number. Otherwise it will be parsed as a decimal.
long long *resWhere to write the result of the conversion on success.
Description
Returns 0 on success, -ERANGE on overflow and -EINVAL on parsing error.
Preferred over simple_strtoll(). Return code must be checked.
-
int kstrtouint(const char *s, unsigned int base, unsigned int *res)¶
convert a string to an unsigned int
Parameters
const char *sThe start of the string. The string must be null-terminated, and may also include a single newline before its terminating null. The first character may also be a plus sign, but not a minus sign.
unsigned int baseThe number base to use. The maximum supported base is 16. If base is given as 0, then the base of the string is automatically detected with the conventional semantics - If it begins with 0x the number will be parsed as a hexadecimal (case insensitive), if it otherwise begins with 0, it will be parsed as an octal number. Otherwise it will be parsed as a decimal.
unsigned int *resWhere to write the result of the conversion on success.
Description
Returns 0 on success, -ERANGE on overflow and -EINVAL on parsing error.
Preferred over simple_strtoul(). Return code must be checked.
-
int kstrtoint(const char *s, unsigned int base, int *res)¶
convert a string to an int
Parameters
const char *sThe start of the string. The string must be null-terminated, and may also include a single newline before its terminating null. The first character may also be a plus sign or a minus sign.
unsigned int baseThe number base to use. The maximum supported base is 16. If base is given as 0, then the base of the string is automatically detected with the conventional semantics - If it begins with 0x the number will be parsed as a hexadecimal (case insensitive), if it otherwise begins with 0, it will be parsed as an octal number. Otherwise it will be parsed as a decimal.
int *resWhere to write the result of the conversion on success.
Description
Returns 0 on success, -ERANGE on overflow and -EINVAL on parsing error.
Preferred over simple_strtol(). Return code must be checked.
-
int kstrtobool(const char *s, bool *res)¶
convert common user inputs into boolean values
Parameters
const char *sinput string
bool *resresult
Description
This routine returns 0 iff the first character is one of ‘YyTt1NnFf0’, or [oO][NnFf] for “on” and “off”. Otherwise it will return -EINVAL. Value pointed to by res is updated upon finding a match.
-
int string_get_size(u64 size, u64 blk_size, const enum string_size_units units, char *buf, int len)¶
get the size in the specified units
Parameters
u64 sizeThe size to be converted in blocks
u64 blk_sizeSize of the block (use 1 for size in bytes)
const enum string_size_units unitsUnits to use (powers of 1000 or 1024), whether to include space separator
char *bufbuffer to format to
int lenlength of buffer
Description
This function returns a string formatted to 3 significant figures giving the size in the required units. buf should have room for at least 9 bytes and will always be zero terminated.
Return value: number of characters of output that would have been written (which may be greater than len, if output was truncated).
-
int parse_int_array_user(const char __user *from, size_t count, int **array)¶
Split string into a sequence of integers
Parameters
const char __user *fromThe user space buffer to read from
size_t countThe maximum number of bytes to read
int **arrayReturned pointer to sequence of integers
Description
On success array is allocated and initialized with a sequence of integers extracted from the from plus an additional element that begins the sequence and specifies the integers count.
Caller takes responsibility for freeing array when it is no longer needed.
-
int string_unescape(char *src, char *dst, size_t size, unsigned int flags)¶
unquote characters in the given string
Parameters
char *srcsource buffer (escaped)
char *dstdestination buffer (unescaped)
size_t sizesize of the destination buffer (0 to unlimit)
unsigned int flagscombination of the flags.
Description
The function unquotes characters in the given string.
Because the size of the output will be the same as or less than the size of the input, the transformation may be performed in place.
Caller must provide valid source and destination pointers. Be aware that destination buffer will always be NULL-terminated. Source string must be NULL-terminated as well. The supported flags are:
UNESCAPE_SPACE:
'\f' - form feed
'\n' - new line
'\r' - carriage return
'\t' - horizontal tab
'\v' - vertical tab
UNESCAPE_OCTAL:
'\NNN' - byte with octal value NNN (1 to 3 digits)
UNESCAPE_HEX:
'\xHH' - byte with hexadecimal value HH (1 to 2 digits)
UNESCAPE_SPECIAL:
'\"' - double quote
'\\' - backslash
'\a' - alert (BEL)
'\e' - escape
UNESCAPE_ANY:
all previous together
Return
The amount of the characters processed to the destination buffer excluding trailing ‘0’ is returned.
-
int string_escape_mem(const char *src, size_t isz, char *dst, size_t osz, unsigned int flags, const char *only)¶
quote characters in the given memory buffer
Parameters
const char *srcsource buffer (unescaped)
size_t iszsource buffer size
char *dstdestination buffer (escaped)
size_t oszdestination buffer size
unsigned int flagscombination of the flags
const char *onlyNULL-terminated string containing characters used to limit the selected escape class. If characters are included in only that would not normally be escaped by the classes selected in flags, they will be copied to dst unescaped.
Description
The process of escaping byte buffer includes several parts. They are applied in the following sequence.
The character is not matched to the one from only string and thus must go as-is to the output.
The character is matched to the printable and ASCII classes, if asked, and in case of match it passes through to the output.
The character is matched to the printable or ASCII class, if asked, and in case of match it passes through to the output.
The character is checked if it falls into the class given by flags.
ESCAPE_OCTALandESCAPE_HEXare going last since they cover any character. Note that they actually can’t go together, otherwiseESCAPE_HEXwill be ignored.
Caller must provide valid source and destination pointers. Be aware that destination buffer will not be NULL-terminated, thus caller have to append it if needs. The supported flags are:
%ESCAPE_SPACE: (special white space, not space itself)
'\f' - form feed
'\n' - new line
'\r' - carriage return
'\t' - horizontal tab
'\v' - vertical tab
%ESCAPE_SPECIAL:
'\"' - double quote
'\\' - backslash
'\a' - alert (BEL)
'\e' - escape
%ESCAPE_NULL:
'\0' - null
%ESCAPE_OCTAL:
'\NNN' - byte with octal value NNN (3 digits)
%ESCAPE_ANY:
all previous together
%ESCAPE_NP:
escape only non-printable characters, checked by isprint()
%ESCAPE_ANY_NP:
all previous together
%ESCAPE_HEX:
'\xHH' - byte with hexadecimal value HH (2 digits)
%ESCAPE_NA:
escape only non-ascii characters, checked by isascii()
%ESCAPE_NAP:
escape only non-printable or non-ascii characters
%ESCAPE_APPEND:
append characters from @only to be escaped by the given classes
ESCAPE_APPEND would help to pass additional characters to the escaped, when
one of ESCAPE_NP, ESCAPE_NA, or ESCAPE_NAP is provided.
One notable caveat, the ESCAPE_NAP, ESCAPE_NP and ESCAPE_NA have the
higher priority than the rest of the flags (ESCAPE_NAP is the highest).
It doesn’t make much sense to use either of them without ESCAPE_OCTAL
or ESCAPE_HEX, because they cover most of the other character classes.
ESCAPE_NAP can utilize ESCAPE_SPACE or ESCAPE_SPECIAL in addition to
the above.
Return
The total size of the escaped output that would be generated for the given input and flags. To check whether the output was truncated, compare the return value to osz. There is room left in dst for a ‘0’ terminator if and only if ret < osz.
-
char **kasprintf_strarray(gfp_t gfp, const char *prefix, size_t n)¶
allocate and fill array of sequential strings
Parameters
gfp_t gfpflags for the slab allocator
const char *prefixprefix to be used
size_t namount of lines to be allocated and filled
Description
Allocates and fills n strings using pattern “s-````zu”, where prefix
is provided by caller. The caller is responsible to free them with
kfree_strarray() after use.
Returns array of strings or NULL when memory can’t be allocated.
-
void kfree_strarray(char **array, size_t n)¶
free a number of dynamically allocated strings contained in an array and the array itself
Parameters
char **arrayDynamically allocated array of strings to free.
size_t nNumber of strings (starting from the beginning of the array) to free.
Description
Passing a non-NULL array and n == 0 as well as NULL array are valid use-cases. If array is NULL, the function does nothing.
-
char *skip_spaces(const char *str)¶
Removes leading whitespace from str.
Parameters
const char *strThe string to be stripped.
Description
Returns a pointer to the first non-whitespace character in str.
-
char *strim(char *s)¶
Removes leading and trailing whitespace from s.
Parameters
char *sThe string to be stripped.
Description
Note that the first trailing whitespace is replaced with a NUL-terminator
in the given string s. Returns a pointer to the first non-whitespace
character in s.
-
bool sysfs_streq(const char *s1, const char *s2)¶
return true if strings are equal, modulo trailing newline
Parameters
const char *s1one string
const char *s2another string
Description
This routine returns true iff two strings are equal, treating both NUL and newline-then-NUL as equivalent string terminations. It’s geared for use with sysfs input strings, which generally terminate with newlines but are compared against values without newlines.
-
int match_string(const char *const *array, size_t n, const char *string)¶
matches given string in an array
Parameters
const char * const *arrayarray of strings
size_t nnumber of strings in the array or -1 for NULL terminated arrays
const char *stringstring to match with
Description
This routine will look for a string in an array of strings up to the n-th element in the array or until the first NULL element.
Historically the value of -1 for n, was used to search in arrays that are NULL terminated. However, the function does not make a distinction when finishing the search: either n elements have been compared OR the first NULL element was found.
Return
index of a string in the array if matches, or -EINVAL otherwise.
-
int __sysfs_match_string(const char *const *array, size_t n, const char *str)¶
matches given string in an array
Parameters
const char * const *arrayarray of strings
size_t nnumber of strings in the array or -1 for NULL terminated arrays
const char *strstring to match with
Description
Returns index of str in the array or -EINVAL, just like match_string().
Uses sysfs_streq instead of strcmp for matching.
This routine will look for a string in an array of strings up to the n-th element in the array or until the first NULL element.
Historically the value of -1 for n, was used to search in arrays that are NULL terminated. However, the function does not make a distinction when finishing the search: either n elements have been compared OR the first NULL element was found.
-
char *strreplace(char *str, char old, char new)¶
Replace all occurrences of character in string.
Parameters
char *strThe string to operate on.
char oldThe character being replaced.
char newThe character old is replaced with.
Description
Replaces the each old character with a new one in the given string str.
Return
pointer to the string str itself.
-
void memcpy_and_pad(void *dest, size_t dest_len, const void *src, size_t count, int pad)¶
Copy one buffer to another with padding
Parameters
void *destWhere to copy to
size_t dest_lenThe destination buffer size
const void *srcWhere to copy from
size_t countThe number of bytes to copy
int padCharacter to use for padding if space is left in destination.
String Manipulation¶
-
unsafe_memcpy¶
unsafe_memcpy (dst, src, bytes, justification)
memcpy implementation with no FORTIFY bounds checking
Parameters
dstDestination memory address to write to
srcSource memory address to read from
bytesHow many bytes to write to dst from src
justificationFree-form text or comment describing why the use is needed
Description
This should be used for corner cases where the compiler cannot do the right thing, or during transitions between APIs, etc. It should be used very rarely, and includes a place for justification detailing where bounds checking has happened, and why existing solutions cannot be employed.
-
char *strncpy(char *const p, const char *q, __kernel_size_t size)¶
Copy a string to memory with non-guaranteed NUL padding
Parameters
char * const ppointer to destination of copy
const char *qpointer to NUL-terminated source string to copy
__kernel_size_t sizebytes to write at p
Description
If strlen(q) >= size, the copy of q will stop after size bytes, and p will NOT be NUL-terminated
If strlen(q) < size, following the copy of q, trailing NUL bytes will be written to p until size total bytes have been written.
Do not use this function. While FORTIFY_SOURCE tries to avoid
over-reads of q, it cannot defend against writing unterminated
results to p. Using strncpy() remains ambiguous and fragile.
Instead, please choose an alternative, so that the expectation
of p’s contents is unambiguous:
p needs to be: |
padded to size |
not padded |
|---|---|---|
NUL-terminated |
||
not NUL-terminated |
Note strscpy*()’s differing return values for detecting truncation, and strtomem*()’s expectation that the destination is marked with __nonstring when it is a character array.
-
__kernel_size_t strnlen(const char *const p, __kernel_size_t maxlen)¶
Return bounded count of characters in a NUL-terminated string
Parameters
const char * const ppointer to NUL-terminated string to count.
__kernel_size_t maxlenmaximum number of characters to count.
Description
Returns number of characters in p (NOT including the final NUL), or maxlen, if no NUL has been found up to there.
-
strlen¶
strlen (p)
Return count of characters in a NUL-terminated string
Parameters
ppointer to NUL-terminated string to count.
Description
Do not use this function unless the string length is known at
compile-time. When p is unterminated, this function may crash
or return unexpected counts that could lead to memory content
exposures. Prefer strnlen().
Returns number of characters in p (NOT including the final NUL).
-
size_t strlcat(char *const p, const char *const q, size_t avail)¶
Append a string to an existing string
Parameters
char * const ppointer to
NUL-terminatedstring to append toconst char * const qpointer to
NUL-terminatedstring to append fromsize_t availMaximum bytes available in p
Description
Appends NUL-terminated string q after the NUL-terminated
string at p, but will not write beyond avail bytes total,
potentially truncating the copy from q. p will stay
NUL-terminated only if a NUL already existed within
the avail bytes of p. If so, the resulting number of
bytes copied from q will be at most “avail - strlen(p) - 1”.
Do not use this function. While FORTIFY_SOURCE tries to avoid
read and write overflows, this is only possible when the sizes
of p and q are known to the compiler. Prefer building the
string with formatting, via scnprintf(), seq_buf, or similar.
Returns total bytes that _would_ have been contained by p
regardless of truncation, similar to snprintf(). If return
value is >= avail, the string has been truncated.
-
char *strcat(char *const p, const char *q)¶
Append a string to an existing string
Parameters
char * const ppointer to NUL-terminated string to append to
const char *qpointer to NUL-terminated source string to append from
Description
Do not use this function. While FORTIFY_SOURCE tries to avoid
read and write overflows, this is only possible when the
destination buffer size is known to the compiler. Prefer
building the string with formatting, via scnprintf() or similar.
At the very least, use strncat().
Returns p.
-
char *strncat(char *const p, const char *const q, __kernel_size_t count)¶
Append a string to an existing string
Parameters
char * const ppointer to NUL-terminated string to append to
const char * const qpointer to source string to append from
__kernel_size_t countMaximum bytes to read from q
Description
Appends at most count bytes from q (stopping at the first NUL byte) after the NUL-terminated string at p. p will be NUL-terminated.
Do not use this function. While FORTIFY_SOURCE tries to avoid
read and write overflows, this is only possible when the sizes
of p and q are known to the compiler. Prefer building the
string with formatting, via scnprintf() or similar.
Returns p.
-
char *strcpy(char *const p, const char *const q)¶
Copy a string into another string buffer
Parameters
char * const ppointer to destination of copy
const char * const qpointer to NUL-terminated source string to copy
Description
Do not use this function. While FORTIFY_SOURCE tries to avoid
overflows, this is only possible when the sizes of q and p are
known to the compiler. Prefer strscpy(), though note its different
return values for detecting truncation.
Returns p.
-
int strncasecmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t len)¶
Case insensitive, length-limited string comparison
Parameters
const char *s1One string
const char *s2The other string
size_t lenthe maximum number of characters to compare
-
char *stpcpy(char *__restrict__ dest, const char *__restrict__ src)¶
copy a string from src to dest returning a pointer to the new end of dest, including src’s
NUL-terminator. May overrun dest.
Parameters
char *__restrict__ destpointer to end of string being copied into. Must be large enough to receive copy.
const char *__restrict__ srcpointer to the beginning of string being copied from. Must not overlap dest.
Description
stpcpy differs from strcpy in a key way: the return value is a pointer
to the new NUL-terminating character in dest. (For strcpy, the return
value is a pointer to the start of dest). This interface is considered
unsafe as it doesn’t perform bounds checking of the inputs. As such it’s
not recommended for usage. Instead, its definition is provided in case
the compiler lowers other libcalls to stpcpy.
-
int strcmp(const char *cs, const char *ct)¶
Compare two strings
Parameters
const char *csOne string
const char *ctAnother string
-
int strncmp(const char *cs, const char *ct, size_t count)¶
Compare two length-limited strings
Parameters
const char *csOne string
const char *ctAnother string
size_t countThe maximum number of bytes to compare
-
char *strchr(const char *s, int c)¶
Find the first occurrence of a character in a string
Parameters
const char *sThe string to be searched
int cThe character to search for
Description
Note that the NUL-terminator is considered part of the string, and can
be searched for.
-
char *strchrnul(const char *s, int c)¶
Find and return a character in a string, or end of string
Parameters
const char *sThe string to be searched
int cThe character to search for
Description
Returns pointer to first occurrence of ‘c’ in s. If c is not found, then return a pointer to the null byte at the end of s.
-
char *strrchr(const char *s, int c)¶
Find the last occurrence of a character in a string
Parameters
const char *sThe string to be searched
int cThe character to search for
-
char *strnchr(const char *s, size_t count, int c)¶
Find a character in a length limited string
Parameters
const char *sThe string to be searched
size_t countThe number of characters to be searched
int cThe character to search for
Description
Note that the NUL-terminator is considered part of the string, and can
be searched for.
-
size_t strspn(const char *s, const char *accept)¶
Calculate the length of the initial substring of s which only contain letters in accept
Parameters
const char *sThe string to be searched
const char *acceptThe string to search for
-
size_t strcspn(const char *s, const char *reject)¶
Calculate the length of the initial substring of s which does not contain letters in reject
Parameters
const char *sThe string to be searched
const char *rejectThe string to avoid
-
char *strpbrk(const char *cs, const char *ct)¶
Find the first occurrence of a set of characters
Parameters
const char *csThe string to be searched
const char *ctThe characters to search for
-
char *strsep(char **s, const char *ct)¶
Split a string into tokens
Parameters
char **sThe string to be searched
const char *ctThe characters to search for
Description
strsep() updates s to point after the token, ready for the next call.
It returns empty tokens, too, behaving exactly like the libc function of that name. In fact, it was stolen from glibc2 and de-fancy-fied. Same semantics, slimmer shape. ;)
-
void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t count)¶
Fill a region of memory with the given value
Parameters
void *sPointer to the start of the area.
int cThe byte to fill the area with
size_t countThe size of the area.
Description
Do not use memset() to access IO space, use memset_io() instead.
-
void *memset16(uint16_t *s, uint16_t v, size_t count)¶
Fill a memory area with a uint16_t
Parameters
uint16_t *sPointer to the start of the area.
uint16_t vThe value to fill the area with
size_t countThe number of values to store
Description
Differs from memset() in that it fills with a uint16_t instead
of a byte. Remember that count is the number of uint16_ts to
store, not the number of bytes.
-
void *memset32(uint32_t *s, uint32_t v, size_t count)¶
Fill a memory area with a uint32_t
Parameters
uint32_t *sPointer to the start of the area.
uint32_t vThe value to fill the area with
size_t countThe number of values to store
Description
Differs from memset() in that it fills with a uint32_t instead
of a byte. Remember that count is the number of uint32_ts to
store, not the number of bytes.
-
void *memset64(uint64_t *s, uint64_t v, size_t count)¶
Fill a memory area with a uint64_t
Parameters
uint64_t *sPointer to the start of the area.
uint64_t vThe value to fill the area with
size_t countThe number of values to store
Description
Differs from memset() in that it fills with a uint64_t instead
of a byte. Remember that count is the number of uint64_ts to
store, not the number of bytes.
-
void *memcpy(void *dest, const void *src, size_t count)¶
Copy one area of memory to another
Parameters
void *destWhere to copy to
const void *srcWhere to copy from
size_t countThe size of the area.
Description
You should not use this function to access IO space, use memcpy_toio() or memcpy_fromio() instead.
-
void *memmove(void *dest, const void *src, size_t count)¶
Copy one area of memory to another
Parameters
void *destWhere to copy to
const void *srcWhere to copy from
size_t countThe size of the area.
Description
-
__visible int memcmp(const void *cs, const void *ct, size_t count)¶
Compare two areas of memory
Parameters
const void *csOne area of memory
const void *ctAnother area of memory
size_t countThe size of the area.
-
int bcmp(const void *a, const void *b, size_t len)¶
returns 0 if and only if the buffers have identical contents.
Parameters
const void *apointer to first buffer.
const void *bpointer to second buffer.
size_t lensize of buffers.
Description
The sign or magnitude of a non-zero return value has no particular
meaning, and architectures may implement their own more efficient bcmp(). So
while this particular implementation is a simple (tail) call to memcmp, do
not rely on anything but whether the return value is zero or non-zero.
-
void *memscan(void *addr, int c, size_t size)¶
Find a character in an area of memory.
Parameters
void *addrThe memory area
int cThe byte to search for
size_t sizeThe size of the area.
Description
returns the address of the first occurrence of c, or 1 byte past the area if c is not found
-
char *strstr(const char *s1, const char *s2)¶
Find the first substring in a
NULterminated string
Parameters
const char *s1The string to be searched
const char *s2The string to search for
-
char *strnstr(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t len)¶
Find the first substring in a length-limited string
Parameters
const char *s1The string to be searched
const char *s2The string to search for
size_t lenthe maximum number of characters to search
-
void *memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n)¶
Find a character in an area of memory.
Parameters
const void *sThe memory area
int cThe byte to search for
size_t nThe size of the area.
Description
returns the address of the first occurrence of c, or NULL
if c is not found
-
void *memchr_inv(const void *start, int c, size_t bytes)¶
Find an unmatching character in an area of memory.
Parameters
const void *startThe memory area
int cFind a character other than c
size_t bytesThe size of the area.
Description
returns the address of the first character other than c, or NULL
if the whole buffer contains just c.
-
void *memdup_array_user(const void __user *src, size_t n, size_t size)¶
duplicate array from user space
Parameters
const void __user *srcsource address in user space
size_t nnumber of array members to copy
size_t sizesize of one array member
Return
an ERR_PTR() on failure. Result is physically
contiguous, to be freed by kfree().
-
void *vmemdup_array_user(const void __user *src, size_t n, size_t size)¶
duplicate array from user space
Parameters
const void __user *srcsource address in user space
size_t nnumber of array members to copy
size_t sizesize of one array member
Return
an ERR_PTR() on failure. Result may be not
physically contiguous. Use kvfree() to free.
-
strscpy¶
strscpy (dst, src, ...)
Copy a C-string into a sized buffer
Parameters
dstWhere to copy the string to
srcWhere to copy the string from
...Size of destination buffer (optional)
Description
Copy the source string src, or as much of it as fits, into the destination dst buffer. The behavior is undefined if the string buffers overlap. The destination dst buffer is always NUL terminated, unless it’s zero-sized.
The size argument ... is only required when dst is not an array, or when the copy needs to be smaller than sizeof(dst).
Preferred to strncpy() since it always returns a valid string, and
doesn’t unnecessarily force the tail of the destination buffer to be
zero padded. If padding is desired please use strscpy_pad().
Returns the number of characters copied in dst (not including the
trailing NUL) or -E2BIG if size is 0 or the copy from src was
truncated.
-
strscpy_pad¶
strscpy_pad (dst, src, ...)
Copy a C-string into a sized buffer
Parameters
dstWhere to copy the string to
srcWhere to copy the string from
...Size of destination buffer
Description
Copy the string, or as much of it as fits, into the dest buffer. The
behavior is undefined if the string buffers overlap. The destination
buffer is always NUL terminated, unless it’s zero-sized.
If the source string is shorter than the destination buffer, the
remaining bytes in the buffer will be filled with NUL bytes.
For full explanation of why you may want to consider using the
‘strscpy’ functions please see the function docstring for strscpy().
Return
The number of characters copied (not including the trailing
NULs)-E2BIG if count is 0 or src was truncated.
-
sysfs_match_string¶
sysfs_match_string (_a, _s)
matches given string in an array
Parameters
_aarray of strings
_sstring to match with
Description
Helper for __sysfs_match_string(). Calculates the size of a automatically.
-
bool strstarts(const char *str, const char *prefix)¶
does str start with prefix?
Parameters
const char *strstring to examine
const char *prefixprefix to look for.
-
void memzero_explicit(void *s, size_t count)¶
Fill a region of memory (e.g. sensitive keying data) with 0s.
Parameters
void *sPointer to the start of the area.
size_t countThe size of the area.
Note
usually using memset() is just fine (!), but in cases
where clearing out _local_ data at the end of a scope is
necessary, memzero_explicit() should be used instead in
order to prevent the compiler from optimising away zeroing.
Description
memzero_explicit() doesn’t need an arch-specific version as
it just invokes the one of memset() implicitly.
-
const char *kbasename(const char *path)¶
return the last part of a pathname.
Parameters
const char *pathpath to extract the filename from.
-
strtomem_pad¶
strtomem_pad (dest, src, pad)
Copy NUL-terminated string to non-NUL-terminated buffer
Parameters
destPointer of destination character array (marked as __nonstring)
srcPointer to NUL-terminated string
padPadding character to fill any remaining bytes of dest after copy
Description
This is a replacement for strncpy() uses where the destination is not
a NUL-terminated string, but with bounds checking on the source size, and
an explicit padding character. If padding is not required, use strtomem().
Note that the size of dest is not an argument, as the length of dest must be discoverable by the compiler.
-
strtomem¶
strtomem (dest, src)
Copy NUL-terminated string to non-NUL-terminated buffer
Parameters
destPointer of destination character array (marked as __nonstring)
srcPointer to NUL-terminated string
Description
This is a replacement for strncpy() uses where the destination is not
a NUL-terminated string, but with bounds checking on the source size, and
without trailing padding. If padding is required, use strtomem_pad().
Note that the size of dest is not an argument, as the length of dest must be discoverable by the compiler.
-
memtostr¶
memtostr (dest, src)
Copy a possibly non-NUL-term string to a NUL-term string
Parameters
destPointer to destination NUL-terminates string
srcPointer to character array (likely marked as __nonstring)
Description
This is a replacement for strncpy() uses where the source is not
a NUL-terminated string.
Note that sizes of dest and src must be known at compile-time.
-
memtostr_pad¶
memtostr_pad (dest, src)
Copy a possibly non-NUL-term string to a NUL-term string with NUL padding in the destination
Parameters
destPointer to destination NUL-terminates string
srcPointer to character array (likely marked as __nonstring)
Description
This is a replacement for strncpy() uses where the source is not
a NUL-terminated string.
Note that sizes of dest and src must be known at compile-time.
-
memset_after¶
memset_after (obj, v, member)
Set a value after a struct member to the end of a struct
Parameters
objAddress of target struct instance
vByte value to repeatedly write
memberafter which struct member to start writing bytes
Description
This is good for clearing padding following the given member.
-
memset_startat¶
memset_startat (obj, v, member)
Set a value starting at a member to the end of a struct
Parameters
objAddress of target struct instance
vByte value to repeatedly write
memberstruct member to start writing at
Description
Note that if there is padding between the prior member and the target
member, memset_after() should be used to clear the prior padding.
-
size_t str_has_prefix(const char *str, const char *prefix)¶
Test if a string has a given prefix
Parameters
const char *strThe string to test
const char *prefixThe string to see if str starts with
Description
- A common way to test a prefix of a string is to do:
strncmp(str, prefix, sizeof(prefix) - 1)
But this can lead to bugs due to typos, or if prefix is a pointer
and not a constant. Instead use str_has_prefix().
Return
strlen(prefix) if str starts with prefix
0 if str does not start with prefix
-
char *kstrdup(const char *s, gfp_t gfp)¶
allocate space for and copy an existing string
Parameters
const char *sthe string to duplicate
gfp_t gfpthe GFP mask used in the
kmalloc()call when allocating memory
Return
newly allocated copy of s or NULL in case of error
-
const char *kstrdup_const(const char *s, gfp_t gfp)¶
conditionally duplicate an existing const string
Parameters
const char *sthe string to duplicate
gfp_t gfpthe GFP mask used in the
kmalloc()call when allocating memory
Note
Strings allocated by kstrdup_const should be freed by kfree_const and must not be passed to krealloc().
Return
source string if it is in .rodata section otherwise fallback to kstrdup.
-
char *kstrndup(const char *s, size_t max, gfp_t gfp)¶
allocate space for and copy an existing string
Parameters
const char *sthe string to duplicate
size_t maxread at most max chars from s
gfp_t gfpthe GFP mask used in the
kmalloc()call when allocating memory
Note
Use kmemdup_nul() instead if the size is known exactly.
Return
newly allocated copy of s or NULL in case of error
-
void *kmemdup(const void *src, size_t len, gfp_t gfp)¶
duplicate region of memory
Parameters
const void *srcmemory region to duplicate
size_t lenmemory region length
gfp_t gfpGFP mask to use
Return
newly allocated copy of src or NULL in case of error,
result is physically contiguous. Use kfree() to free.
-
char *kmemdup_nul(const char *s, size_t len, gfp_t gfp)¶
Create a NUL-terminated string from unterminated data
Parameters
const char *sThe data to stringify
size_t lenThe size of the data
gfp_t gfpthe GFP mask used in the
kmalloc()call when allocating memory
Return
newly allocated copy of s with NUL-termination or NULL in
case of error
-
void *memdup_user(const void __user *src, size_t len)¶
duplicate memory region from user space
Parameters
const void __user *srcsource address in user space
size_t lennumber of bytes to copy
Return
an ERR_PTR() on failure. Result is physically
contiguous, to be freed by kfree().
-
void *vmemdup_user(const void __user *src, size_t len)¶
duplicate memory region from user space
Parameters
const void __user *srcsource address in user space
size_t lennumber of bytes to copy
Return
an ERR_PTR() on failure. Result may be not
physically contiguous. Use kvfree() to free.
-
char *strndup_user(const char __user *s, long n)¶
duplicate an existing string from user space
Parameters
const char __user *sThe string to duplicate
long nMaximum number of bytes to copy, including the trailing NUL.
Return
newly allocated copy of s or an ERR_PTR() in case of error
-
void *memdup_user_nul(const void __user *src, size_t len)¶
duplicate memory region from user space and NUL-terminate
Parameters
const void __user *srcsource address in user space
size_t lennumber of bytes to copy
Return
an ERR_PTR() on failure.
Basic Kernel Library Functions¶
The Linux kernel provides more basic utility functions.
Bit Operations¶
-
void set_bit(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Atomically set a bit in memory
Parameters
long nrthe bit to set
volatile unsigned long *addrthe address to start counting from
Description
This is a relaxed atomic operation (no implied memory barriers).
Note that nr may be almost arbitrarily large; this function is not restricted to acting on a single-word quantity.
-
void clear_bit(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Clears a bit in memory
Parameters
long nrBit to clear
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to start counting from
Description
This is a relaxed atomic operation (no implied memory barriers).
-
void change_bit(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Toggle a bit in memory
Parameters
long nrBit to change
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to start counting from
Description
This is a relaxed atomic operation (no implied memory barriers).
Note that nr may be almost arbitrarily large; this function is not restricted to acting on a single-word quantity.
-
bool test_and_set_bit(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Set a bit and return its old value
Parameters
long nrBit to set
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to count from
Description
This is an atomic fully-ordered operation (implied full memory barrier).
-
bool test_and_clear_bit(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Clear a bit and return its old value
Parameters
long nrBit to clear
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to count from
Description
This is an atomic fully-ordered operation (implied full memory barrier).
-
bool test_and_change_bit(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Change a bit and return its old value
Parameters
long nrBit to change
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to count from
Description
This is an atomic fully-ordered operation (implied full memory barrier).
-
void ___set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Set a bit in memory
Parameters
unsigned long nrthe bit to set
volatile unsigned long *addrthe address to start counting from
Description
Unlike set_bit(), this function is non-atomic. If it is called on the same
region of memory concurrently, the effect may be that only one operation
succeeds.
-
void ___clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Clears a bit in memory
Parameters
unsigned long nrthe bit to clear
volatile unsigned long *addrthe address to start counting from
Description
Unlike clear_bit(), this function is non-atomic. If it is called on the same
region of memory concurrently, the effect may be that only one operation
succeeds.
-
void ___change_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Toggle a bit in memory
Parameters
unsigned long nrthe bit to change
volatile unsigned long *addrthe address to start counting from
Description
Unlike change_bit(), this function is non-atomic. If it is called on the same
region of memory concurrently, the effect may be that only one operation
succeeds.
-
bool ___test_and_set_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Set a bit and return its old value
Parameters
unsigned long nrBit to set
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to count from
Description
This operation is non-atomic. If two instances of this operation race, one can appear to succeed but actually fail.
-
bool ___test_and_clear_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Clear a bit and return its old value
Parameters
unsigned long nrBit to clear
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to count from
Description
This operation is non-atomic. If two instances of this operation race, one can appear to succeed but actually fail.
-
bool ___test_and_change_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Change a bit and return its old value
Parameters
unsigned long nrBit to change
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to count from
Description
This operation is non-atomic. If two instances of this operation race, one can appear to succeed but actually fail.
-
bool _test_bit(unsigned long nr, volatile const unsigned long *addr)¶
Determine whether a bit is set
Parameters
unsigned long nrbit number to test
const volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to start counting from
-
bool _test_bit_acquire(unsigned long nr, volatile const unsigned long *addr)¶
Determine, with acquire semantics, whether a bit is set
Parameters
unsigned long nrbit number to test
const volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to start counting from
-
void clear_bit_unlock(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Clear a bit in memory, for unlock
Parameters
long nrthe bit to set
volatile unsigned long *addrthe address to start counting from
Description
This operation is atomic and provides release barrier semantics.
-
void __clear_bit_unlock(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Clears a bit in memory
Parameters
long nrBit to clear
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to start counting from
Description
This is a non-atomic operation but implies a release barrier before the memory operation. It can be used for an unlock if no other CPUs can concurrently modify other bits in the word.
-
bool test_and_set_bit_lock(long nr, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
Set a bit and return its old value, for lock
Parameters
long nrBit to set
volatile unsigned long *addrAddress to count from
Description
This operation is atomic and provides acquire barrier semantics if the returned value is 0. It can be used to implement bit locks.
-
bool xor_unlock_is_negative_byte(unsigned long mask, volatile unsigned long *addr)¶
XOR a single byte in memory and test if it is negative, for unlock.
Parameters
unsigned long maskChange the bits which are set in this mask.
volatile unsigned long *addrThe address of the word containing the byte to change.
Description
Changes some of bits 0-6 in the word pointed to by addr. This operation is atomic and provides release barrier semantics. Used to optimise some folio operations which are commonly paired with an unlock or end of writeback. Bit 7 is used as PG_waiters to indicate whether anybody is waiting for the unlock.
Return
Whether the top bit of the byte is set.
Bitmap Operations¶
bitmaps provide an array of bits, implemented using an array of unsigned longs. The number of valid bits in a given bitmap does _not_ need to be an exact multiple of BITS_PER_LONG.
The possible unused bits in the last, partially used word of a bitmap are ‘don’t care’. The implementation makes no particular effort to keep them zero. It ensures that their value will not affect the results of any operation. The bitmap operations that return Boolean (bitmap_empty, for example) or scalar (bitmap_weight, for example) results carefully filter out these unused bits from impacting their results.
The byte ordering of bitmaps is more natural on little endian architectures. See the big-endian headers include/asm-ppc64/bitops.h and include/asm-s390/bitops.h for the best explanations of this ordering.
The DECLARE_BITMAP(name,bits) macro, in linux/types.h, can be used to declare an array named ‘name’ of just enough unsigned longs to contain all bit positions from 0 to ‘bits’ - 1.
The available bitmap operations and their rough meaning in the case that the bitmap is a single unsigned long are thus:
The generated code is more efficient when nbits is known at compile-time and at most BITS_PER_LONG.
bitmap_zero(dst, nbits) *dst = 0UL
bitmap_fill(dst, nbits) *dst = ~0UL
bitmap_copy(dst, src, nbits) *dst = *src
bitmap_and(dst, src1, src2, nbits) *dst = *src1 & *src2
bitmap_or(dst, src1, src2, nbits) *dst = *src1 | *src2
bitmap_xor(dst, src1, src2, nbits) *dst = *src1 ^ *src2
bitmap_andnot(dst, src1, src2, nbits) *dst = *src1 & ~(*src2)
bitmap_complement(dst, src, nbits) *dst = ~(*src)
bitmap_equal(src1, src2, nbits) Are *src1 and *src2 equal?
bitmap_intersects(src1, src2, nbits) Do *src1 and *src2 overlap?
bitmap_subset(src1, src2, nbits) Is *src1 a subset of *src2?
bitmap_empty(src, nbits) Are all bits zero in *src?
bitmap_full(src, nbits) Are all bits set in *src?
bitmap_weight(src, nbits) Hamming Weight: number set bits
bitmap_weight_and(src1, src2, nbits) Hamming Weight of and'ed bitmap
bitmap_weight_andnot(src1, src2, nbits) Hamming Weight of andnot'ed bitmap
bitmap_set(dst, pos, nbits) Set specified bit area
bitmap_clear(dst, pos, nbits) Clear specified bit area
bitmap_find_next_zero_area(buf, len, pos, n, mask) Find bit free area
bitmap_find_next_zero_area_off(buf, len, pos, n, mask, mask_off) as above
bitmap_shift_right(dst, src, n, nbits) *dst = *src >> n
bitmap_shift_left(dst, src, n, nbits) *dst = *src << n
bitmap_cut(dst, src, first, n, nbits) Cut n bits from first, copy rest
bitmap_replace(dst, old, new, mask, nbits) *dst = (*old & ~(*mask)) | (*new & *mask)
bitmap_scatter(dst, src, mask, nbits) *dst = map(dense, sparse)(src)
bitmap_gather(dst, src, mask, nbits) *dst = map(sparse, dense)(src)
bitmap_remap(dst, src, old, new, nbits) *dst = map(old, new)(src)
bitmap_bitremap(oldbit, old, new, nbits) newbit = map(old, new)(oldbit)
bitmap_onto(dst, orig, relmap, nbits) *dst = orig relative to relmap
bitmap_fold(dst, orig, sz, nbits) dst bits = orig bits mod sz
bitmap_parse(buf, buflen, dst, nbits) Parse bitmap dst from kernel buf
bitmap_parse_user(ubuf, ulen, dst, nbits) Parse bitmap dst from user buf
bitmap_parselist(buf, dst, nbits) Parse bitmap dst from kernel buf
bitmap_parselist_user(buf, dst, nbits) Parse bitmap dst from user buf
bitmap_find_free_region(bitmap, bits, order) Find and allocate bit region
bitmap_release_region(bitmap, pos, order) Free specified bit region
bitmap_allocate_region(bitmap, pos, order) Allocate specified bit region
bitmap_from_arr32(dst, buf, nbits) Copy nbits from u32[] buf to dst
bitmap_from_arr64(dst, buf, nbits) Copy nbits from u64[] buf to dst
bitmap_to_arr32(buf, src, nbits) Copy nbits from buf to u32[] dst
bitmap_to_arr64(buf, src, nbits) Copy nbits from buf to u64[] dst
bitmap_get_value8(map, start) Get 8bit value from map at start
bitmap_set_value8(map, value, start) Set 8bit value to map at start
bitmap_read(map, start, nbits) Read an nbits-sized value from
map at start
bitmap_write(map, value, start, nbits) Write an nbits-sized value to
map at start
Note, bitmap_zero() and bitmap_fill() operate over the region of unsigned longs, that is, bits behind bitmap till the unsigned long boundary will be zeroed or filled as well. Consider to use bitmap_clear() or bitmap_set() to make explicit zeroing or filling respectively.
Also the following operations in asm/bitops.h apply to bitmaps.:
set_bit(bit, addr) *addr |= bit
clear_bit(bit, addr) *addr &= ~bit
change_bit(bit, addr) *addr ^= bit
test_bit(bit, addr) Is bit set in *addr?
test_and_set_bit(bit, addr) Set bit and return old value
test_and_clear_bit(bit, addr) Clear bit and return old value
test_and_change_bit(bit, addr) Change bit and return old value
find_first_zero_bit(addr, nbits) Position first zero bit in *addr
find_first_bit(addr, nbits) Position first set bit in *addr
find_next_zero_bit(addr, nbits, bit)
Position next zero bit in *addr >= bit
find_next_bit(addr, nbits, bit) Position next set bit in *addr >= bit
find_next_and_bit(addr1, addr2, nbits, bit)
Same as find_next_bit, but in
(*addr1 & *addr2)
-
void __bitmap_shift_right(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *src, unsigned shift, unsigned nbits)¶
logical right shift of the bits in a bitmap
Parameters
unsigned long *dstdestination bitmap
const unsigned long *srcsource bitmap
unsigned shiftshift by this many bits
unsigned nbitsbitmap size, in bits
Description
Shifting right (dividing) means moving bits in the MS -> LS bit direction. Zeros are fed into the vacated MS positions and the LS bits shifted off the bottom are lost.
-
void __bitmap_shift_left(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *src, unsigned int shift, unsigned int nbits)¶
logical left shift of the bits in a bitmap
Parameters
unsigned long *dstdestination bitmap
const unsigned long *srcsource bitmap
unsigned int shiftshift by this many bits
unsigned int nbitsbitmap size, in bits
Description
Shifting left (multiplying) means moving bits in the LS -> MS direction. Zeros are fed into the vacated LS bit positions and those MS bits shifted off the top are lost.
-
void bitmap_cut(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *src, unsigned int first, unsigned int cut, unsigned int nbits)¶
remove bit region from bitmap and right shift remaining bits
Parameters
unsigned long *dstdestination bitmap, might overlap with src
const unsigned long *srcsource bitmap
unsigned int firststart bit of region to be removed
unsigned int cutnumber of bits to remove
unsigned int nbitsbitmap size, in bits
Description
Set the n-th bit of dst iff the n-th bit of src is set and n is less than first, or the m-th bit of src is set for any m such that first <= n < nbits, and m = n + cut.
In pictures, example for a big-endian 32-bit architecture:
The src bitmap is:
31 63
| |
10000000 11000001 11110010 00010101 10000000 11000001 01110010 00010101
| | | |
16 14 0 32
if cut is 3, and first is 14, bits 14-16 in src are cut and dst is:
31 63
| |
10110000 00011000 00110010 00010101 00010000 00011000 00101110 01000010
| | |
14 (bit 17 0 32
from @src)
Note that dst and src might overlap partially or entirely.
This is implemented in the obvious way, with a shift and carry step for each moved bit. Optimisation is left as an exercise for the compiler.
-
unsigned long bitmap_find_next_zero_area_off(unsigned long *map, unsigned long size, unsigned long start, unsigned int nr, unsigned long align_mask, unsigned long align_offset)¶
find a contiguous aligned zero area
Parameters
unsigned long *mapThe address to base the search on
unsigned long sizeThe bitmap size in bits
unsigned long startThe bitnumber to start searching at
unsigned int nrThe number of zeroed bits we’re looking for
unsigned long align_maskAlignment mask for zero area
unsigned long align_offsetAlignment offset for zero area.
Description
The align_mask should be one less than a power of 2; the effect is that the bit offset of all zero areas this function finds plus align_offset is multiple of that power of 2.
-
void bitmap_remap(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *src, const unsigned long *old, const unsigned long *new, unsigned int nbits)¶
Apply map defined by a pair of bitmaps to another bitmap
Parameters
unsigned long *dstremapped result
const unsigned long *srcsubset to be remapped
const unsigned long *olddefines domain of map
const unsigned long *newdefines range of map
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in each of these bitmaps
Description
Let old and new define a mapping of bit positions, such that whatever position is held by the n-th set bit in old is mapped to the n-th set bit in new. In the more general case, allowing for the possibility that the weight ‘w’ of new is less than the weight of old, map the position of the n-th set bit in old to the position of the m-th set bit in new, where m == n % w.
If either of the old and new bitmaps are empty, or if src and dst point to the same location, then this routine copies src to dst.
The positions of unset bits in old are mapped to themselves (the identity map).
Apply the above specified mapping to src, placing the result in dst, clearing any bits previously set in dst.
For example, lets say that old has bits 4 through 7 set, and new has bits 12 through 15 set. This defines the mapping of bit position 4 to 12, 5 to 13, 6 to 14 and 7 to 15, and of all other bit positions unchanged. So if say src comes into this routine with bits 1, 5 and 7 set, then dst should leave with bits 1, 13 and 15 set.
-
int bitmap_bitremap(int oldbit, const unsigned long *old, const unsigned long *new, int bits)¶
Apply map defined by a pair of bitmaps to a single bit
Parameters
int oldbitbit position to be mapped
const unsigned long *olddefines domain of map
const unsigned long *newdefines range of map
int bitsnumber of bits in each of these bitmaps
Description
Let old and new define a mapping of bit positions, such that whatever position is held by the n-th set bit in old is mapped to the n-th set bit in new. In the more general case, allowing for the possibility that the weight ‘w’ of new is less than the weight of old, map the position of the n-th set bit in old to the position of the m-th set bit in new, where m == n % w.
The positions of unset bits in old are mapped to themselves (the identity map).
Apply the above specified mapping to bit position oldbit, returning the new bit position.
For example, lets say that old has bits 4 through 7 set, and new has bits 12 through 15 set. This defines the mapping of bit position 4 to 12, 5 to 13, 6 to 14 and 7 to 15, and of all other bit positions unchanged. So if say oldbit is 5, then this routine returns 13.
-
void bitmap_from_arr32(unsigned long *bitmap, const u32 *buf, unsigned int nbits)¶
copy the contents of u32 array of bits to bitmap
Parameters
unsigned long *bitmaparray of unsigned longs, the destination bitmap
const u32 *bufarray of u32 (in host byte order), the source bitmap
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in bitmap
-
void bitmap_to_arr32(u32 *buf, const unsigned long *bitmap, unsigned int nbits)¶
copy the contents of bitmap to a u32 array of bits
Parameters
u32 *bufarray of u32 (in host byte order), the dest bitmap
const unsigned long *bitmaparray of unsigned longs, the source bitmap
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in bitmap
-
void bitmap_from_arr64(unsigned long *bitmap, const u64 *buf, unsigned int nbits)¶
copy the contents of u64 array of bits to bitmap
Parameters
unsigned long *bitmaparray of unsigned longs, the destination bitmap
const u64 *bufarray of u64 (in host byte order), the source bitmap
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in bitmap
-
void bitmap_to_arr64(u64 *buf, const unsigned long *bitmap, unsigned int nbits)¶
copy the contents of bitmap to a u64 array of bits
Parameters
u64 *bufarray of u64 (in host byte order), the dest bitmap
const unsigned long *bitmaparray of unsigned longs, the source bitmap
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in bitmap
-
int bitmap_pos_to_ord(const unsigned long *buf, unsigned int pos, unsigned int nbits)¶
find ordinal of set bit at given position in bitmap
Parameters
const unsigned long *bufpointer to a bitmap
unsigned int posa bit position in buf (0 <= pos < nbits)
unsigned int nbitsnumber of valid bit positions in buf
Description
Map the bit at position pos in buf (of length nbits) to the ordinal of which set bit it is. If it is not set or if pos is not a valid bit position, map to -1.
If for example, just bits 4 through 7 are set in buf, then pos values 4 through 7 will get mapped to 0 through 3, respectively, and other pos values will get mapped to -1. When pos value 7 gets mapped to (returns) ord value 3 in this example, that means that bit 7 is the 3rd (starting with 0th) set bit in buf.
The bit positions 0 through bits are valid positions in buf.
-
void bitmap_onto(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *orig, const unsigned long *relmap, unsigned int bits)¶
translate one bitmap relative to another
Parameters
unsigned long *dstresulting translated bitmap
const unsigned long *origoriginal untranslated bitmap
const unsigned long *relmapbitmap relative to which translated
unsigned int bitsnumber of bits in each of these bitmaps
Description
Set the n-th bit of dst iff there exists some m such that the n-th bit of relmap is set, the m-th bit of orig is set, and the n-th bit of relmap is also the m-th _set_ bit of relmap. (If you understood the previous sentence the first time your read it, you’re overqualified for your current job.)
In other words, orig is mapped onto (surjectively) dst, using the map { <n, m> | the n-th bit of relmap is the m-th set bit of relmap }.
Any set bits in orig above bit number W, where W is the
weight of (number of set bits in) relmap are mapped nowhere.
In particular, if for all bits m set in orig, m >= W, then
dst will end up empty. In situations where the possibility
of such an empty result is not desired, one way to avoid it is
to use the bitmap_fold() operator, below, to first fold the
orig bitmap over itself so that all its set bits x are in the
range 0 <= x < W. The bitmap_fold() operator does this by
setting the bit (m % W) in dst, for each bit (m) set in orig.
- Example [1] for bitmap_onto():
Let’s say relmap has bits 30-39 set, and orig has bits 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 and 11 set. Then on return from this routine, dst will have bits 31, 33, 35, 37 and 39 set.
When bit 0 is set in orig, it means turn on the bit in dst corresponding to whatever is the first bit (if any) that is turned on in relmap. Since bit 0 was off in the above example, we leave off that bit (bit 30) in dst.
When bit 1 is set in orig (as in the above example), it means turn on the bit in dst corresponding to whatever is the second bit that is turned on in relmap. The second bit in relmap that was turned on in the above example was bit 31, so we turned on bit 31 in dst.
Similarly, we turned on bits 33, 35, 37 and 39 in dst, because they were the 4th, 6th, 8th and 10th set bits set in relmap, and the 4th, 6th, 8th and 10th bits of orig (i.e. bits 3, 5, 7 and 9) were also set.
When bit 11 is set in orig, it means turn on the bit in dst corresponding to whatever is the twelfth bit that is turned on in relmap. In the above example, there were only ten bits turned on in relmap (30..39), so that bit 11 was set in orig had no affect on dst.
- Example [2] for bitmap_fold() + bitmap_onto():
Let’s say relmap has these ten bits set:
40 41 42 43 45 48 53 61 74 95
(for the curious, that’s 40 plus the first ten terms of the Fibonacci sequence.)
Further lets say we use the following code, invoking
bitmap_fold()then bitmap_onto, as suggested above to avoid the possibility of an empty dst result:unsigned long *tmp; // a temporary bitmap's bits bitmap_fold(tmp, orig, bitmap_weight(relmap, bits), bits); bitmap_onto(dst, tmp, relmap, bits);
Then this table shows what various values of dst would be, for various orig’s. I list the zero-based positions of each set bit. The tmp column shows the intermediate result, as computed by using
bitmap_fold()to fold the orig bitmap modulo ten (the weight of relmap):
If either of orig or relmap is empty (no set bits), then dst will be returned empty.
If (as explained above) the only set bits in orig are in positions m where m >= W, (where W is the weight of relmap) then dst will once again be returned empty.
All bits in dst not set by the above rule are cleared.
-
void bitmap_fold(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *orig, unsigned int sz, unsigned int nbits)¶
fold larger bitmap into smaller, modulo specified size
Parameters
unsigned long *dstresulting smaller bitmap
const unsigned long *origoriginal larger bitmap
unsigned int szspecified size
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in each of these bitmaps
Description
For each bit oldbit in orig, set bit oldbit mod sz in dst.
Clear all other bits in dst. See further the comment and
Example [2] for bitmap_onto() for why and how to use this.
-
unsigned long bitmap_find_next_zero_area(unsigned long *map, unsigned long size, unsigned long start, unsigned int nr, unsigned long align_mask)¶
find a contiguous aligned zero area
Parameters
unsigned long *mapThe address to base the search on
unsigned long sizeThe bitmap size in bits
unsigned long startThe bitnumber to start searching at
unsigned int nrThe number of zeroed bits we’re looking for
unsigned long align_maskAlignment mask for zero area
Description
The align_mask should be one less than a power of 2; the effect is that the bit offset of all zero areas this function finds is multiples of that power of 2. A align_mask of 0 means no alignment is required.
-
bool bitmap_or_equal(const unsigned long *src1, const unsigned long *src2, const unsigned long *src3, unsigned int nbits)¶
Check whether the or of two bitmaps is equal to a third
Parameters
const unsigned long *src1Pointer to bitmap 1
const unsigned long *src2Pointer to bitmap 2 will be or’ed with bitmap 1
const unsigned long *src3Pointer to bitmap 3. Compare to the result of *src1 | *src2
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in each of these bitmaps
Return
True if (*src1 | *src2) == *src3, false otherwise
-
void bitmap_scatter(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *src, const unsigned long *mask, unsigned int nbits)¶
Scatter a bitmap according to the given mask
Parameters
unsigned long *dstscattered bitmap
const unsigned long *srcgathered bitmap
const unsigned long *maskmask representing bits to assign to in the scattered bitmap
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in each of these bitmaps
Description
Scatters bitmap with sequential bits according to the given mask.
Or in binary form src mask dst 0000000001011010 0001001100010011 0000001100000010
(Bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 are copied to the bits 0, 1, 4, 8, 9, 12)
A more ‘visual’ description of the operation:
src: 0000000001011010
||||||
+------+|||||
| +----+||||
| |+----+|||
| || +-+||
| || | ||
mask: ...v..vv...v..vv
...0..11...0..10
dst: 0000001100000010
A relationship exists between bitmap_scatter() and bitmap_gather().
bitmap_gather() can be seen as the ‘reverse’ bitmap_scatter() operation.
See bitmap_scatter() for details related to this relationship.
Example
If src bitmap = 0x005a, with mask = 0x1313, dst will be 0x0302.
-
void bitmap_gather(unsigned long *dst, const unsigned long *src, const unsigned long *mask, unsigned int nbits)¶
Gather a bitmap according to given mask
Parameters
unsigned long *dstgathered bitmap
const unsigned long *srcscattered bitmap
const unsigned long *maskmask representing bits to extract from in the scattered bitmap
unsigned int nbitsnumber of bits in each of these bitmaps
Description
Gathers bitmap with sparse bits according to the given mask.
Or in binary form src mask dst 0000001100000010 0001001100010011 0000000000011010
(Bits 0, 1, 4, 8, 9, 12 are copied to the bits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5)
A more ‘visual’ description of the operation:
mask: ...v..vv...v..vv
src: 0000001100000010
^ ^^ ^ 0
| || | 10
| || > 010
| |+--> 1010
| +--> 11010
+----> 011010
dst: 0000000000011010
A relationship exists between bitmap_gather() and bitmap_scatter(). See
bitmap_scatter() for the bitmap scatter detailed operations.
Suppose scattered computed using bitmap_scatter(scattered, src, mask, n).
The operation bitmap_gather(result, scattered, mask, n) leads to a result
equal or equivalent to src.
The result can be ‘equivalent’ because bitmap_scatter() and bitmap_gather()
are not bijective.
The result and src values are equivalent in that sense that a call to
bitmap_scatter(res, src, mask, n) and a call to
bitmap_scatter(res, result, mask, n) will lead to the same res value.
Example
If src bitmap = 0x0302, with mask = 0x1313, dst will be 0x001a.
-
void bitmap_release_region(unsigned long *bitmap, unsigned int pos, int order)¶
release allocated bitmap region
Parameters
unsigned long *bitmaparray of unsigned longs corresponding to the bitmap
unsigned int posbeginning of bit region to release
int orderregion size (log base 2 of number of bits) to release
Description
This is the complement to __bitmap_find_free_region() and releases the found region (by clearing it in the bitmap).
-
int bitmap_allocate_region(unsigned long *bitmap, unsigned int pos, int order)¶
allocate bitmap region
Parameters
unsigned long *bitmaparray of unsigned longs corresponding to the bitmap
unsigned int posbeginning of bit region to allocate
int orderregion size (log base 2 of number of bits) to allocate
Description
Allocate (set bits in) a specified region of a bitmap.
Return
0 on success, or -EBUSY if specified region wasn’t
free (not all bits were zero).
-
int bitmap_find_free_region(unsigned long *bitmap, unsigned int bits, int order)¶
find a contiguous aligned mem region
Parameters
unsigned long *bitmaparray of unsigned longs corresponding to the bitmap
unsigned int bitsnumber of bits in the bitmap
int orderregion size (log base 2 of number of bits) to find
Description
Find a region of free (zero) bits in a bitmap of bits bits and allocate them (set them to one). Only consider regions of length a power (order) of two, aligned to that power of two, which makes the search algorithm much faster.
Return
the bit offset in bitmap of the allocated region, or -errno on failure.
-
BITMAP_FROM_U64¶
BITMAP_FROM_U64 (n)
Represent u64 value in the format suitable for bitmap.
Parameters
nu64 value
Description
Linux bitmaps are internally arrays of unsigned longs, i.e. 32-bit integers in 32-bit environment, and 64-bit integers in 64-bit one.
There are four combinations of endianness and length of the word in linux ABIs: LE64, BE64, LE32 and BE32.
On 64-bit kernels 64-bit LE and BE numbers are naturally ordered in bitmaps and therefore don’t require any special handling.
On 32-bit kernels 32-bit LE ABI orders lo word of 64-bit number in memory prior to hi, and 32-bit BE orders hi word prior to lo. The bitmap on the other hand is represented as an array of 32-bit words and the position of bit N may therefore be calculated as: word #(N/32) and bit #(N``32``) in that word. For example, bit #42 is located at 10th position of 2nd word. It matches 32-bit LE ABI, and we can simply let the compiler store 64-bit values in memory as it usually does. But for BE we need to swap hi and lo words manually.
With all that, the macro BITMAP_FROM_U64() does explicit reordering of hi and
lo parts of u64. For LE32 it does nothing, and for BE environment it swaps
hi and lo words, as is expected by bitmap.
-
void bitmap_from_u64(unsigned long *dst, u64 mask)¶
Check and swap words within u64.
Parameters
unsigned long *dstdestination bitmap
u64 masksource bitmap
Description
In 32-bit Big Endian kernel, when using (u32 *)(:c:type:`val`)[*]
to read u64 mask, we will get the wrong word.
That is (u32 *)(:c:type:`val`)[0] gets the upper 32 bits,
but we expect the lower 32-bits of u64.
-
unsigned long bitmap_read(const unsigned long *map, unsigned long start, unsigned long nbits)¶
read a value of n-bits from the memory region
Parameters
const unsigned long *mapaddress to the bitmap memory region
unsigned long startbit offset of the n-bit value
unsigned long nbitssize of value in bits, nonzero, up to BITS_PER_LONG
Return
value of nbits bits located at the start bit offset within the map memory region. For nbits = 0 and nbits > BITS_PER_LONG the return value is undefined.
-
void bitmap_write(unsigned long *map, unsigned long value, unsigned long start, unsigned long nbits)¶
write n-bit value within a memory region
Parameters
unsigned long *mapaddress to the bitmap memory region
unsigned long valuevalue to write, clamped to nbits
unsigned long startbit offset of the n-bit value
unsigned long nbitssize of value in bits, nonzero, up to BITS_PER_LONG.
Description
bitmap_write() behaves as-if implemented as nbits calls of __assign_bit(),
i.e. bits beyond nbits are ignored:
- for (bit = 0; bit < nbits; bit++)
__assign_bit(start + bit, bitmap, val & BIT(bit));
For nbits == 0 and nbits > BITS_PER_LONG no writes are performed.
Command-line Parsing¶
-
int get_option(char **str, int *pint)¶
Parse integer from an option string
Parameters
char **stroption string
int *pint(optional output) integer value parsed from str
Read an int from an option string; if available accept a subsequent comma as well.
When pint is NULL the function can be used as a validator of the current option in the string.
Return values: 0 - no int in string 1 - int found, no subsequent comma 2 - int found including a subsequent comma 3 - hyphen found to denote a range
Leading hyphen without integer is no integer case, but we consume it for the sake of simplification.
-
char *get_options(const char *str, int nints, int *ints)¶
Parse a string into a list of integers
Parameters
const char *strString to be parsed
int nintssize of integer array
int *intsinteger array (must have room for at least one element)
This function parses a string containing a comma-separated list of integers, a hyphen-separated range of _positive_ integers, or a combination of both. The parse halts when the array is full, or when no more numbers can be retrieved from the string.
When nints is 0, the function just validates the given str and returns the amount of parseable integers as described below.
Return
The first element is filled by the number of collected integers in the range. The rest is what was parsed from the str.
Return value is the character in the string which caused the parse to end (typically a null terminator, if str is completely parseable).
-
unsigned long long memparse(const char *ptr, char **retptr)¶
parse a string with mem suffixes into a number
Parameters
const char *ptrWhere parse begins
char **retptr(output) Optional pointer to next char after parse completes
Parses a string into a number. The number stored at ptr is potentially suffixed with K, M, G, T, P, E.
Error Pointers¶
-
IS_ERR_VALUE¶
IS_ERR_VALUE (x)
Detect an error pointer.
Parameters
xThe pointer to check.
Description
Like IS_ERR(), but does not generate a compiler warning if result is unused.
-
void *ERR_PTR(long error)¶
Create an error pointer.
Parameters
long errorA negative error code.
Description
Encodes error into a pointer value. Users should consider the result opaque and not assume anything about how the error is encoded.
Return
A pointer with error encoded within its value.
-
long PTR_ERR(__force const void *ptr)¶
Extract the error code from an error pointer.
Parameters
__force const void *ptrAn error pointer.
Return
The error code within ptr.
-
bool IS_ERR(__force const void *ptr)¶
Detect an error pointer.
Parameters
__force const void *ptrThe pointer to check.
Return
true if ptr is an error pointer, false otherwise.
-
bool IS_ERR_OR_NULL(__force const void *ptr)¶
Detect an error pointer or a null pointer.
Parameters
__force const void *ptrThe pointer to check.
Description
Like IS_ERR(), but also returns true for a null pointer.
-
void *ERR_CAST(__force const void *ptr)¶
Explicitly cast an error-valued pointer to another pointer type
Parameters
__force const void *ptrThe pointer to cast.
Description
Explicitly cast an error-valued pointer to another pointer type in such a way as to make it clear that’s what’s going on.
-
int PTR_ERR_OR_ZERO(__force const void *ptr)¶
Extract the error code from a pointer if it has one.
Parameters
__force const void *ptrA potential error pointer.
Description
Convenience function that can be used inside a function that returns
an error code to propagate errors received as error pointers.
For example, return PTR_ERR_OR_ZERO(ptr); replaces:
if (IS_ERR(ptr))
return PTR_ERR(ptr);
else
return 0;
Return
The error code within ptr if it is an error pointer; 0 otherwise.
Sorting¶
-
void sort_r(void *base, size_t num, size_t size, cmp_r_func_t cmp_func, swap_r_func_t swap_func, const void *priv)¶
sort an array of elements
Parameters
void *basepointer to data to sort
size_t numnumber of elements
size_t sizesize of each element
cmp_r_func_t cmp_funcpointer to comparison function
swap_r_func_t swap_funcpointer to swap function or NULL
const void *privthird argument passed to comparison function
Description
This function does a heapsort on the given array. You may provide a swap_func function if you need to do something more than a memory copy (e.g. fix up pointers or auxiliary data), but the built-in swap avoids a slow retpoline and so is significantly faster.
Sorting time is O(n log n) both on average and worst-case. While quicksort is slightly faster on average, it suffers from exploitable O(n*n) worst-case behavior and extra memory requirements that make it less suitable for kernel use.
-
void list_sort(void *priv, struct list_head *head, list_cmp_func_t cmp)¶
sort a list
Parameters
void *privprivate data, opaque to
list_sort(), passed to cmpstruct list_head *headthe list to sort
list_cmp_func_t cmpthe elements comparison function
Description
The comparison function cmp must return > 0 if a should sort after b (”a > b” if you want an ascending sort), and <= 0 if a should sort before b or their original order should be preserved. It is always called with the element that came first in the input in a, and list_sort is a stable sort, so it is not necessary to distinguish the a < b and a == b cases.
This is compatible with two styles of cmp function: - The traditional style which returns <0 / =0 / >0, or - Returning a boolean 0/1. The latter offers a chance to save a few cycles in the comparison (which is used by e.g. plug_ctx_cmp() in block/blk-mq.c).
A good way to write a multi-word comparison is:
if (a->high != b->high)
return a->high > b->high;
if (a->middle != b->middle)
return a->middle > b->middle;
return a->low > b->low;
This mergesort is as eager as possible while always performing at least 2:1 balanced merges. Given two pending sublists of size 2^k, they are merged to a size-2^(k+1) list as soon as we have 2^k following elements.
Thus, it will avoid cache thrashing as long as 3*2^k elements can fit into the cache. Not quite as good as a fully-eager bottom-up mergesort, but it does use 0.2*n fewer comparisons, so is faster in the common case that everything fits into L1.
The merging is controlled by “count”, the number of elements in the pending lists. This is beautifully simple code, but rather subtle.
Each time we increment “count”, we set one bit (bit k) and clear bits k-1 .. 0. Each time this happens (except the very first time for each bit, when count increments to 2^k), we merge two lists of size 2^k into one list of size 2^(k+1).
This merge happens exactly when the count reaches an odd multiple of 2^k, which is when we have 2^k elements pending in smaller lists, so it’s safe to merge away two lists of size 2^k.
After this happens twice, we have created two lists of size 2^(k+1), which will be merged into a list of size 2^(k+2) before we create a third list of size 2^(k+1), so there are never more than two pending.
The number of pending lists of size 2^k is determined by the state of bit k of “count” plus two extra pieces of information:
The state of bit k-1 (when k == 0, consider bit -1 always set), and
Whether the higher-order bits are zero or non-zero (i.e. is count >= 2^(k+1)).
There are six states we distinguish. “x” represents some arbitrary bits, and “y” represents some arbitrary non-zero bits: 0: 00x: 0 pending of size 2^k; x pending of sizes < 2^k 1: 01x: 0 pending of size 2^k; 2^(k-1) + x pending of sizes < 2^k 2: x10x: 0 pending of size 2^k; 2^k + x pending of sizes < 2^k 3: x11x: 1 pending of size 2^k; 2^(k-1) + x pending of sizes < 2^k 4: y00x: 1 pending of size 2^k; 2^k + x pending of sizes < 2^k 5: y01x: 2 pending of size 2^k; 2^(k-1) + x pending of sizes < 2^k (merge and loop back to state 2)
We gain lists of size 2^k in the 2->3 and 4->5 transitions (because bit k-1 is set while the more significant bits are non-zero) and merge them away in the 5->2 transition. Note in particular that just before the 5->2 transition, all lower-order bits are 11 (state 3), so there is one list of each smaller size.
When we reach the end of the input, we merge all the pending lists, from smallest to largest. If you work through cases 2 to 5 above, you can see that the number of elements we merge with a list of size 2^k varies from 2^(k-1) (cases 3 and 5 when x == 0) to 2^(k+1) - 1 (second merge of case 5 when x == 2^(k-1) - 1).
Text Searching¶
INTRODUCTION
The textsearch infrastructure provides text searching facilities for both linear and non-linear data. Individual search algorithms are implemented in modules and chosen by the user.
ARCHITECTURE
User
+----------------+
| finish()|<--------------(6)-----------------+
|get_next_block()|<--------------(5)---------------+ |
| | Algorithm | |
| | +------------------------------+
| | | init() find() destroy() |
| | +------------------------------+
| | Core API ^ ^ ^
| | +---------------+ (2) (4) (8)
| (1)|----->| prepare() |---+ | |
| (3)|----->| find()/next() |-----------+ |
| (7)|----->| destroy() |----------------------+
+----------------+ +---------------+
(1) User configures a search by calling textsearch_prepare() specifying
the search parameters such as the pattern and algorithm name.
(2) Core requests the algorithm to allocate and initialize a search
configuration according to the specified parameters.
(3) User starts the search(es) by calling textsearch_find() or
textsearch_next() to fetch subsequent occurrences. A state variable
is provided to the algorithm to store persistent variables.
(4) Core eventually resets the search offset and forwards the find()
request to the algorithm.
(5) Algorithm calls get_next_block() provided by the user continuously
to fetch the data to be searched in block by block.
(6) Algorithm invokes finish() after the last call to get_next_block
to clean up any leftovers from get_next_block. (Optional)
(7) User destroys the configuration by calling textsearch_destroy().
(8) Core notifies the algorithm to destroy algorithm specific
allocations. (Optional)
USAGE
Before a search can be performed, a configuration must be created by calling
textsearch_prepare()specifying the searching algorithm, the pattern to look for and flags. As a flag, you can set TS_IGNORECASE to perform case insensitive matching. But it might slow down performance of algorithm, so you should use it at own your risk. The returned configuration may then be used for an arbitrary amount of times and even in parallel as long as a separate struct ts_state variable is provided to every instance.The actual search is performed by either calling
textsearch_find_continuous()for linear data or by providing an own get_next_block() implementation and callingtextsearch_find(). Both functions return the position of the first occurrence of the pattern or UINT_MAX if no match was found. Subsequent occurrences can be found by callingtextsearch_next()regardless of the linearity of the data.Once you’re done using a configuration it must be given back via textsearch_destroy.
EXAMPLE:
int pos;
struct ts_config *conf;
struct ts_state state;
const char *pattern = "chicken";
const char *example = "We dance the funky chicken";
conf = textsearch_prepare("kmp", pattern, strlen(pattern),
GFP_KERNEL, TS_AUTOLOAD);
if (IS_ERR(conf)) {
err = PTR_ERR(conf);
goto errout;
}
pos = textsearch_find_continuous(conf, &state, example, strlen(example));
if (pos != UINT_MAX)
panic("Oh my god, dancing chickens at %d\n", pos);
textsearch_destroy(conf);
-
int textsearch_register(struct ts_ops *ops)¶
register a textsearch module
Parameters
struct ts_ops *opsoperations lookup table
Description
This function must be called by textsearch modules to announce
their presence. The specified &**ops** must have name set to a
unique identifier and the callbacks find(), init(), get_pattern(),
and get_pattern_len() must be implemented.
Returns 0 or -EEXISTS if another module has already registered with same name.
-
int textsearch_unregister(struct ts_ops *ops)¶
unregister a textsearch module
Parameters
struct ts_ops *opsoperations lookup table
Description
This function must be called by textsearch modules to announce
their disappearance for examples when the module gets unloaded.
The ops parameter must be the same as the one during the
registration.
Returns 0 on success or -ENOENT if no matching textsearch registration was found.
-
unsigned int textsearch_find_continuous(struct ts_config *conf, struct ts_state *state, const void *data, unsigned int len)¶
search a pattern in continuous/linear data
Parameters
struct ts_config *confsearch configuration
struct ts_state *statesearch state
const void *datadata to search in
unsigned int lenlength of data
Description
A simplified version of textsearch_find() for continuous/linear data.
Call textsearch_next() to retrieve subsequent matches.
Returns the position of first occurrence of the pattern or
UINT_MAX if no occurrence was found.
-
struct ts_config *textsearch_prepare(const char *algo, const void *pattern, unsigned int len, gfp_t gfp_mask, int flags)¶
Prepare a search
Parameters
const char *algoname of search algorithm
const void *patternpattern data
unsigned int lenlength of pattern
gfp_t gfp_maskallocation mask
int flagssearch flags
Description
Looks up the search algorithm module and creates a new textsearch configuration for the specified pattern.
Returns a new textsearch configuration according to the specified
parameters or a ERR_PTR(). If a zero length pattern is passed, this
function returns EINVAL.
Note
- The format of the pattern may not be compatible between
the various search algorithms.
-
void textsearch_destroy(struct ts_config *conf)¶
destroy a search configuration
Parameters
struct ts_config *confsearch configuration
Description
Releases all references of the configuration and frees up the memory.
-
unsigned int textsearch_next(struct ts_config *conf, struct ts_state *state)¶
continue searching for a pattern
Parameters
struct ts_config *confsearch configuration
struct ts_state *statesearch state
Description
Continues a search looking for more occurrences of the pattern.
textsearch_find() must be called to find the first occurrence
in order to reset the state.
Returns the position of the next occurrence of the pattern or UINT_MAX if not match was found.
-
unsigned int textsearch_find(struct ts_config *conf, struct ts_state *state)¶
start searching for a pattern
Parameters
struct ts_config *confsearch configuration
struct ts_state *statesearch state
Description
Returns the position of first occurrence of the pattern or UINT_MAX if no match was found.
-
void *textsearch_get_pattern(struct ts_config *conf)¶
return head of the pattern
Parameters
struct ts_config *confsearch configuration
-
unsigned int textsearch_get_pattern_len(struct ts_config *conf)¶
return length of the pattern
Parameters
struct ts_config *confsearch configuration
CRC and Math Functions in Linux¶
Arithmetic Overflow Checking¶
-
check_add_overflow¶
check_add_overflow (a, b, d)
Calculate addition with overflow checking
Parameters
afirst addend
bsecond addend
dpointer to store sum
Description
Returns true on wrap-around, false otherwise.
*d holds the results of the attempted addition, regardless of whether wrap-around occurred.
-
wrapping_add¶
wrapping_add (type, a, b)
Intentionally perform a wrapping addition
Parameters
typetype for result of calculation
afirst addend
bsecond addend
Description
Return the potentially wrapped-around addition without tripping any wrap-around sanitizers that may be enabled.
-
wrapping_assign_add¶
wrapping_assign_add (var, offset)
Intentionally perform a wrapping increment assignment
Parameters
varvariable to be incremented
offsetamount to add
Description
Increments var by offset with wrap-around. Returns the resulting value of var. Will not trip any wrap-around sanitizers.
Returns the new value of var.
-
check_sub_overflow¶
check_sub_overflow (a, b, d)
Calculate subtraction with overflow checking
Parameters
aminuend; value to subtract from
bsubtrahend; value to subtract from a
dpointer to store difference
Description
Returns true on wrap-around, false otherwise.
*d holds the results of the attempted subtraction, regardless of whether wrap-around occurred.
-
wrapping_sub¶
wrapping_sub (type, a, b)
Intentionally perform a wrapping subtraction
Parameters
typetype for result of calculation
aminuend; value to subtract from
bsubtrahend; value to subtract from a
Description
Return the potentially wrapped-around subtraction without tripping any wrap-around sanitizers that may be enabled.
-
wrapping_assign_sub¶
wrapping_assign_sub (var, offset)
Intentionally perform a wrapping decrement assign
Parameters
varvariable to be decremented
offsetamount to subtract
Description
Decrements var by offset with wrap-around. Returns the resulting value of var. Will not trip any wrap-around sanitizers.
Returns the new value of var.
-
check_mul_overflow¶
check_mul_overflow (a, b, d)
Calculate multiplication with overflow checking
Parameters
afirst factor
bsecond factor
dpointer to store product
Description
Returns true on wrap-around, false otherwise.
*d holds the results of the attempted multiplication, regardless of whether wrap-around occurred.
-
wrapping_mul¶
wrapping_mul (type, a, b)
Intentionally perform a wrapping multiplication
Parameters
typetype for result of calculation
afirst factor
bsecond factor
Description
Return the potentially wrapped-around multiplication without tripping any wrap-around sanitizers that may be enabled.
-
check_shl_overflow¶
check_shl_overflow (a, s, d)
Calculate a left-shifted value and check overflow
Parameters
aValue to be shifted
sHow many bits left to shift
dPointer to where to store the result
Description
Computes *d = (a << s)
Returns true if ‘*d’ cannot hold the result or when ‘a << s’ doesn’t make sense. Example conditions:
‘a << s’ causes bits to be lost when stored in *d.
‘s’ is garbage (e.g. negative) or so large that the result of ‘a << s’ is guaranteed to be 0.
‘a’ is negative.
‘a << s’ sets the sign bit, if any, in ‘*d’.
‘*d’ will hold the results of the attempted shift, but is not considered “safe for use” if true is returned.
-
overflows_type¶
overflows_type (n, T)
helper for checking the overflows between value, variables, or data type
Parameters
nsource constant value or variable to be checked
Tdestination variable or data type proposed to store x
Description
Compares the x expression for whether or not it can safely fit in the storage of the type in T. x and T can have different types. If x is a constant expression, this will also resolve to a constant expression.
Return
true if overflow can occur, false otherwise.
-
castable_to_type¶
castable_to_type (n, T)
like __same_type(), but also allows for casted literals
Parameters
nvariable or constant value
Tvariable or data type
Description
Unlike the __same_type() macro, this allows a constant value as the first argument. If this value would not overflow into an assignment of the second argument’s type, it returns true. Otherwise, this falls back to __same_type().
-
size_t size_mul(size_t factor1, size_t factor2)¶
Calculate size_t multiplication with saturation at SIZE_MAX
Parameters
size_t factor1first factor
size_t factor2second factor
Return
calculate factor1 * factor2, both promoted to size_t, with any overflow causing the return value to be SIZE_MAX. The lvalue must be size_t to avoid implicit type conversion.
-
size_t size_add(size_t addend1, size_t addend2)¶
Calculate size_t addition with saturation at SIZE_MAX
Parameters
size_t addend1first addend
size_t addend2second addend
Return
calculate addend1 + addend2, both promoted to size_t, with any overflow causing the return value to be SIZE_MAX. The lvalue must be size_t to avoid implicit type conversion.
-
size_t size_sub(size_t minuend, size_t subtrahend)¶
Calculate size_t subtraction with saturation at SIZE_MAX
Parameters
size_t minuendvalue to subtract from
size_t subtrahendvalue to subtract from minuend
Return
calculate minuend - subtrahend, both promoted to size_t,
with any overflow causing the return value to be SIZE_MAX. For
composition with the size_add() and size_mul() helpers, neither
argument may be SIZE_MAX (or the result with be forced to SIZE_MAX).
The lvalue must be size_t to avoid implicit type conversion.
-
array_size¶
array_size (a, b)
Calculate size of 2-dimensional array.
Parameters
adimension one
bdimension two
Description
Calculates size of 2-dimensional array: a * b.
Return
number of bytes needed to represent the array or SIZE_MAX on overflow.
-
array3_size¶
array3_size (a, b, c)
Calculate size of 3-dimensional array.
Parameters
adimension one
bdimension two
cdimension three
Description
Calculates size of 3-dimensional array: a * b * c.
Return
number of bytes needed to represent the array or SIZE_MAX on overflow.
-
flex_array_size¶
flex_array_size (p, member, count)
Calculate size of a flexible array member within an enclosing structure.
Parameters
pPointer to the structure.
memberName of the flexible array member.
countNumber of elements in the array.
Description
Calculates size of a flexible array of count number of member elements, at the end of structure p.
Return
number of bytes needed or SIZE_MAX on overflow.
-
struct_size¶
struct_size (p, member, count)
Calculate size of structure with trailing flexible array.
Parameters
pPointer to the structure.
memberName of the array member.
countNumber of elements in the array.
Description
Calculates size of memory needed for structure of p followed by an array of count number of member elements.
Return
number of bytes needed or SIZE_MAX on overflow.
-
struct_size_t¶
struct_size_t (type, member, count)
Calculate size of structure with trailing flexible array
Parameters
typestructure type name.
memberName of the array member.
countNumber of elements in the array.
Description
Calculates size of memory needed for structure type followed by an
array of count number of member elements. Prefer using struct_size()
when possible instead, to keep calculations associated with a specific
instance variable of type type.
Return
number of bytes needed or SIZE_MAX on overflow.
-
_DEFINE_FLEX¶
_DEFINE_FLEX (type, name, member, count, initializer...)
helper macro for
DEFINE_FLEX()family. Enables caller macro to pass (different) initializer.
Parameters
typestructure type name, including “struct” keyword.
nameName for a variable to define.
memberName of the array member.
countNumber of elements in the array; must be compile-time const.
initializer...initializer expression (could be empty for no init).
-
DEFINE_RAW_FLEX¶
DEFINE_RAW_FLEX (type, name, member, count)
Define an on-stack instance of structure with a trailing flexible array member, when it does not have a __counted_by annotation.
Parameters
typestructure type name, including “struct” keyword.
nameName for a variable to define.
memberName of the array member.
countNumber of elements in the array; must be compile-time const.
Description
Define a zeroed, on-stack, instance of type structure with a trailing flexible array member. Use __struct_size(name) to get compile-time size of it afterwards.
-
DEFINE_FLEX¶
DEFINE_FLEX (TYPE, NAME, MEMBER, COUNTER, COUNT)
Define an on-stack instance of structure with a trailing flexible array member.
Parameters
TYPEstructure type name, including “struct” keyword.
NAMEName for a variable to define.
MEMBERName of the array member.
COUNTERName of the __counted_by member.
COUNTNumber of elements in the array; must be compile-time const.
Description
Define a zeroed, on-stack, instance of TYPE structure with a trailing flexible array member. Use __struct_size(NAME) to get compile-time size of it afterwards.
CRC Functions¶
-
uint8_t crc4(uint8_t c, uint64_t x, int bits)¶
calculate the 4-bit crc of a value.
Parameters
uint8_t cstarting crc4
uint64_t xvalue to checksum
int bitsnumber of bits in x to checksum
Description
Returns the crc4 value of x, using polynomial 0b10111.
The x value is treated as left-aligned, and bits above bits are ignored in the crc calculations.
-
u8 crc7_be(u8 crc, const u8 *buffer, size_t len)¶
update the CRC7 for the data buffer
Parameters
u8 crcprevious CRC7 value
const u8 *bufferdata pointer
size_t lennumber of bytes in the buffer
Context
any
Description
Returns the updated CRC7 value. The CRC7 is left-aligned in the byte (the lsbit is always 0), as that makes the computation easier, and all callers want it in that form.
-
void crc8_populate_msb(u8 table[CRC8_TABLE_SIZE], u8 polynomial)¶
fill crc table for given polynomial in reverse bit order.
Parameters
u8 table[CRC8_TABLE_SIZE]table to be filled.
u8 polynomialpolynomial for which table is to be filled.
-
void crc8_populate_lsb(u8 table[CRC8_TABLE_SIZE], u8 polynomial)¶
fill crc table for given polynomial in regular bit order.
Parameters
u8 table[CRC8_TABLE_SIZE]table to be filled.
u8 polynomialpolynomial for which table is to be filled.
-
u8 crc8(const u8 table[CRC8_TABLE_SIZE], const u8 *pdata, size_t nbytes, u8 crc)¶
calculate a crc8 over the given input data.
Parameters
const u8 table[CRC8_TABLE_SIZE]crc table used for calculation.
const u8 *pdatapointer to data buffer.
size_t nbytesnumber of bytes in data buffer.
u8 crcprevious returned crc8 value.
-
u16 crc16(u16 crc, u8 const *buffer, size_t len)¶
compute the CRC-16 for the data buffer
Parameters
u16 crcprevious CRC value
u8 const *bufferdata pointer
size_t lennumber of bytes in the buffer
Description
Returns the updated CRC value.
-
u32 __pure crc32_le_generic(u32 crc, unsigned char const *p, size_t len, const u32 (*tab)[256], u32 polynomial)¶
Calculate bitwise little-endian Ethernet AUTODIN II CRC32/CRC32C
Parameters
u32 crcseed value for computation. ~0 for Ethernet, sometimes 0 for other uses, or the previous crc32/crc32c value if computing incrementally.
unsigned char const *ppointer to buffer over which CRC32/CRC32C is run
size_t lenlength of buffer p
const u32 (*tab)[256]little-endian Ethernet table
u32 polynomialCRC32/CRC32c LE polynomial
-
u32 crc32_generic_shift(u32 crc, size_t len, u32 polynomial)¶
Append len 0 bytes to crc, in logarithmic time
Parameters
u32 crcThe original little-endian CRC (i.e. lsbit is x^31 coefficient)
size_t lenThe number of bytes. crc is multiplied by x^(8***len**)
u32 polynomialThe modulus used to reduce the result to 32 bits.
Description
It’s possible to parallelize CRC computations by computing a CRC over separate ranges of a buffer, then summing them. This shifts the given CRC by 8*len bits (i.e. produces the same effect as appending len bytes of zero to the data), in time proportional to log(len).
-
u32 __pure crc32_be_generic(u32 crc, unsigned char const *p, size_t len, const u32 (*tab)[256], u32 polynomial)¶
Calculate bitwise big-endian Ethernet AUTODIN II CRC32
Parameters
u32 crcseed value for computation. ~0 for Ethernet, sometimes 0 for other uses, or the previous crc32 value if computing incrementally.
unsigned char const *ppointer to buffer over which CRC32 is run
size_t lenlength of buffer p
const u32 (*tab)[256]big-endian Ethernet table
u32 polynomialCRC32 BE polynomial
-
u16 crc_ccitt(u16 crc, u8 const *buffer, size_t len)¶
recompute the CRC (CRC-CCITT variant) for the data buffer
Parameters
u16 crcprevious CRC value
u8 const *bufferdata pointer
size_t lennumber of bytes in the buffer
-
u16 crc_itu_t(u16 crc, const u8 *buffer, size_t len)¶
Compute the CRC-ITU-T for the data buffer
Parameters
u16 crcprevious CRC value
const u8 *bufferdata pointer
size_t lennumber of bytes in the buffer
Description
Returns the updated CRC value
Base 2 log and power Functions¶
-
bool is_power_of_2(unsigned long n)¶
check if a value is a power of two
Parameters
unsigned long nthe value to check
Description
Determine whether some value is a power of two, where zero is not considered a power of two.
Return
true if n is a power of 2, otherwise false.
-
unsigned long __roundup_pow_of_two(unsigned long n)¶
round up to nearest power of two
Parameters
unsigned long nvalue to round up
-
unsigned long __rounddown_pow_of_two(unsigned long n)¶
round down to nearest power of two
Parameters
unsigned long nvalue to round down
-
const_ilog2¶
const_ilog2 (n)
log base 2 of 32-bit or a 64-bit constant unsigned value
Parameters
nparameter
Description
Use this where sparse expects a true constant expression, e.g. for array indices.
-
ilog2¶
ilog2 (n)
log base 2 of 32-bit or a 64-bit unsigned value
Parameters
nparameter
Description
constant-capable log of base 2 calculation - this can be used to initialise global variables from constant data, hence the massive ternary operator construction
selects the appropriately-sized optimised version depending on sizeof(n)
-
roundup_pow_of_two¶
roundup_pow_of_two (n)
round the given value up to nearest power of two
Parameters
nparameter
Description
round the given value up to the nearest power of two - the result is undefined when n == 0 - this can be used to initialise global variables from constant data
-
rounddown_pow_of_two¶
rounddown_pow_of_two (n)
round the given value down to nearest power of two
Parameters
nparameter
Description
round the given value down to the nearest power of two - the result is undefined when n == 0 - this can be used to initialise global variables from constant data
-
order_base_2¶
order_base_2 (n)
calculate the (rounded up) base 2 order of the argument
Parameters
nparameter
Description
- The first few values calculated by this routine:
ob2(0) = 0 ob2(1) = 0 ob2(2) = 1 ob2(3) = 2 ob2(4) = 2 ob2(5) = 3 ... and so on.
-
bits_per¶
bits_per (n)
calculate the number of bits required for the argument
Parameters
nparameter
Description
This is constant-capable and can be used for compile time initializations, e.g bitfields.
The first few values calculated by this routine: bf(0) = 1 bf(1) = 1 bf(2) = 2 bf(3) = 2 bf(4) = 3 ... and so on.
Integer log and power Functions¶
-
unsigned int intlog2(u32 value)¶
computes log2 of a value; the result is shifted left by 24 bits
Parameters
u32 valueThe value (must be != 0)
Description
to use rational values you can use the following method:
intlog2(value) = intlog2(value * 2^x) - x * 2^24
Some usecase examples:
intlog2(8) will give 3 << 24 = 3 * 2^24
intlog2(9) will give 3 << 24 + ... = 3.16... * 2^24
intlog2(1.5) = intlog2(3) - 2^24 = 0.584... * 2^24
Return
log2(value) * 2^24
-
unsigned int intlog10(u32 value)¶
computes log10 of a value; the result is shifted left by 24 bits
Parameters
u32 valueThe value (must be != 0)
Description
to use rational values you can use the following method:
intlog10(value) = intlog10(value * 10^x) - x * 2^24
An usecase example:
intlog10(1000) will give 3 << 24 = 3 * 2^24
due to the implementation intlog10(1000) might be not exactly 3 * 2^24
look at intlog2 for similar examples
Return
log10(value) * 2^24
-
u64 int_pow(u64 base, unsigned int exp)¶
computes the exponentiation of the given base and exponent
Parameters
u64 basebase which will be raised to the given power
unsigned int exppower to be raised to
Description
Computes: pow(base, exp), i.e. base raised to the exp power
-
unsigned long int_sqrt(unsigned long x)¶
computes the integer square root
Parameters
unsigned long xinteger of which to calculate the sqrt
Description
Computes: floor(sqrt(x))
-
u32 int_sqrt64(u64 x)¶
strongly typed int_sqrt function when minimum 64 bit input is expected.
Parameters
u64 x64bit integer of which to calculate the sqrt
Division Functions¶
-
do_div¶
do_div (n, base)
returns 2 values: calculate remainder and update new dividend
Parameters
nuint64_t dividend (will be updated)
baseuint32_t divisor
Description
Summary:
uint32_t remainder = n % base;
n = n / base;
Return
(uint32_t)remainder
NOTE
macro parameter n is evaluated multiple times, beware of side effects!
-
u64 div_u64_rem(u64 dividend, u32 divisor, u32 *remainder)¶
unsigned 64bit divide with 32bit divisor with remainder
Parameters
u64 dividendunsigned 64bit dividend
u32 divisorunsigned 32bit divisor
u32 *remainderpointer to unsigned 32bit remainder
Return
sets *remainder, then returns dividend / divisor
Description
This is commonly provided by 32bit archs to provide an optimized 64bit divide.
-
s64 div_s64_rem(s64 dividend, s32 divisor, s32 *remainder)¶
signed 64bit divide with 32bit divisor with remainder
Parameters
s64 dividendsigned 64bit dividend
s32 divisorsigned 32bit divisor
s32 *remainderpointer to signed 32bit remainder
Return
sets *remainder, then returns dividend / divisor
-
u64 div64_u64_rem(u64 dividend, u64 divisor, u64 *remainder)¶
unsigned 64bit divide with 64bit divisor and remainder
Parameters
u64 dividendunsigned 64bit dividend
u64 divisorunsigned 64bit divisor
u64 *remainderpointer to unsigned 64bit remainder
Return
sets *remainder, then returns dividend / divisor
-
u64 div64_u64(u64 dividend, u64 divisor)¶
unsigned 64bit divide with 64bit divisor
Parameters
u64 dividendunsigned 64bit dividend
u64 divisorunsigned 64bit divisor
Return
dividend / divisor
-
s64 div64_s64(s64 dividend, s64 divisor)¶
signed 64bit divide with 64bit divisor
Parameters
s64 dividendsigned 64bit dividend
s64 divisorsigned 64bit divisor
Return
dividend / divisor
-
u64 div_u64(u64 dividend, u32 divisor)¶
unsigned 64bit divide with 32bit divisor
Parameters
u64 dividendunsigned 64bit dividend
u32 divisorunsigned 32bit divisor
Description
This is the most common 64bit divide and should be used if possible, as many 32bit archs can optimize this variant better than a full 64bit divide.
Return
dividend / divisor
-
s64 div_s64(s64 dividend, s32 divisor)¶
signed 64bit divide with 32bit divisor
Parameters
s64 dividendsigned 64bit dividend
s32 divisorsigned 32bit divisor
Return
dividend / divisor
-
DIV64_U64_ROUND_UP¶
DIV64_U64_ROUND_UP (ll, d)
unsigned 64bit divide with 64bit divisor rounded up
Parameters
llunsigned 64bit dividend
dunsigned 64bit divisor
Description
Divide unsigned 64bit dividend by unsigned 64bit divisor and round up.
Return
dividend / divisor rounded up
-
DIV64_U64_ROUND_CLOSEST¶
DIV64_U64_ROUND_CLOSEST (dividend, divisor)
unsigned 64bit divide with 64bit divisor rounded to nearest integer
Parameters
dividendunsigned 64bit dividend
divisorunsigned 64bit divisor
Description
Divide unsigned 64bit dividend by unsigned 64bit divisor and round to closest integer.
Return
dividend / divisor rounded to nearest integer
-
DIV_U64_ROUND_CLOSEST¶
DIV_U64_ROUND_CLOSEST (dividend, divisor)
unsigned 64bit divide with 32bit divisor rounded to nearest integer
Parameters
dividendunsigned 64bit dividend
divisorunsigned 32bit divisor
Description
Divide unsigned 64bit dividend by unsigned 32bit divisor and round to closest integer.
Return
dividend / divisor rounded to nearest integer
-
DIV_S64_ROUND_CLOSEST¶
DIV_S64_ROUND_CLOSEST (dividend, divisor)
signed 64bit divide with 32bit divisor rounded to nearest integer
Parameters
dividendsigned 64bit dividend
divisorsigned 32bit divisor
Description
Divide signed 64bit dividend by signed 32bit divisor and round to closest integer.
Return
dividend / divisor rounded to nearest integer
-
unsigned long gcd(unsigned long a, unsigned long b)¶
calculate and return the greatest common divisor of 2 unsigned longs
Parameters
unsigned long afirst value
unsigned long bsecond value
UUID/GUID¶
-
void generate_random_uuid(unsigned char uuid[16])¶
generate a random UUID
Parameters
unsigned char uuid[16]where to put the generated UUID
Description
Random UUID interface
Used to create a Boot ID or a filesystem UUID/GUID, but can be useful for other kernel drivers.
-
bool uuid_is_valid(const char *uuid)¶
checks if a UUID string is valid
Parameters
const char *uuidUUID string to check
Description
- It checks if the UUID string is following the format:
xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxxxxxxxxxx
where x is a hex digit.
Return
true if input is valid UUID string.
Kernel IPC facilities¶
IPC utilities¶
-
int ipc_init(void)¶
initialise ipc subsystem
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
The various sysv ipc resources (semaphores, messages and shared memory) are initialised.
A callback routine is registered into the memory hotplug notifier chain: since msgmni scales to lowmem this callback routine will be called upon successful memory add / remove to recompute msmgni.
-
void ipc_init_ids(struct ipc_ids *ids)¶
initialise ipc identifiers
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
Description
Set up the sequence range to use for the ipc identifier range (limited below ipc_mni) then initialise the keys hashtable and ids idr.
-
void ipc_init_proc_interface(const char *path, const char *header, int ids, int (*show)(struct seq_file*, void*))¶
create a proc interface for sysipc types using a seq_file interface.
Parameters
const char *pathPath in procfs
const char *headerBanner to be printed at the beginning of the file.
int idsipc id table to iterate.
int (*show)(struct seq_file *, void *)show routine.
-
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipc_findkey(struct ipc_ids *ids, key_t key)¶
find a key in an ipc identifier set
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
key_t keykey to find
Description
Returns the locked pointer to the ipc structure if found or NULL otherwise. If key is found ipc points to the owning ipc structure
Called with writer ipc_ids.rwsem held.
-
int ipc_addid(struct ipc_ids *ids, struct kern_ipc_perm *new, int limit)¶
add an ipc identifier
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
struct kern_ipc_perm *newnew ipc permission set
int limitlimit for the number of used ids
Description
Add an entry ‘new’ to the ipc ids idr. The permissions object is initialised and the first free entry is set up and the index assigned is returned. The ‘new’ entry is returned in a locked state on success.
On failure the entry is not locked and a negative err-code is returned. The caller must use ipc_rcu_putref() to free the identifier.
Called with writer ipc_ids.rwsem held.
-
int ipcget_new(struct ipc_namespace *ns, struct ipc_ids *ids, const struct ipc_ops *ops, struct ipc_params *params)¶
create a new ipc object
Parameters
struct ipc_namespace *nsipc namespace
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
const struct ipc_ops *opsthe actual creation routine to call
struct ipc_params *paramsits parameters
Description
This routine is called by sys_msgget, sys_semget() and sys_shmget() when the key is IPC_PRIVATE.
-
int ipc_check_perms(struct ipc_namespace *ns, struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp, const struct ipc_ops *ops, struct ipc_params *params)¶
check security and permissions for an ipc object
Parameters
struct ipc_namespace *nsipc namespace
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc permission set
const struct ipc_ops *opsthe actual security routine to call
struct ipc_params *paramsits parameters
Description
This routine is called by sys_msgget(), sys_semget() and sys_shmget() when the key is not IPC_PRIVATE and that key already exists in the ds IDR.
On success, the ipc id is returned.
It is called with ipc_ids.rwsem and ipcp->lock held.
-
int ipcget_public(struct ipc_namespace *ns, struct ipc_ids *ids, const struct ipc_ops *ops, struct ipc_params *params)¶
get an ipc object or create a new one
Parameters
struct ipc_namespace *nsipc namespace
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
const struct ipc_ops *opsthe actual creation routine to call
struct ipc_params *paramsits parameters
Description
This routine is called by sys_msgget, sys_semget() and sys_shmget() when the key is not IPC_PRIVATE. It adds a new entry if the key is not found and does some permission / security checkings if the key is found.
On success, the ipc id is returned.
-
void ipc_kht_remove(struct ipc_ids *ids, struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp)¶
remove an ipc from the key hashtable
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc perm structure containing the key to remove
Description
ipc_ids.rwsem (as a writer) and the spinlock for this ID are held before this function is called, and remain locked on the exit.
-
int ipc_search_maxidx(struct ipc_ids *ids, int limit)¶
search for the highest assigned index
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
int limitknown upper limit for highest assigned index
Description
The function determines the highest assigned index in ids. It is intended to be called when ids->max_idx needs to be updated. Updating ids->max_idx is necessary when the current highest index ipc object is deleted. If no ipc object is allocated, then -1 is returned.
ipc_ids.rwsem needs to be held by the caller.
-
void ipc_rmid(struct ipc_ids *ids, struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp)¶
remove an ipc identifier
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc perm structure containing the identifier to remove
Description
ipc_ids.rwsem (as a writer) and the spinlock for this ID are held before this function is called, and remain locked on the exit.
-
void ipc_set_key_private(struct ipc_ids *ids, struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp)¶
switch the key of an existing ipc to IPC_PRIVATE
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc perm structure containing the key to modify
Description
ipc_ids.rwsem (as a writer) and the spinlock for this ID are held before this function is called, and remain locked on the exit.
-
int ipcperms(struct ipc_namespace *ns, struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp, short flag)¶
check ipc permissions
Parameters
struct ipc_namespace *nsipc namespace
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc permission set
short flagdesired permission set
Description
Check user, group, other permissions for access to ipc resources. return 0 if allowed
flag will most probably be 0 or S_...UGO from <linux/stat.h>
-
void kernel_to_ipc64_perm(struct kern_ipc_perm *in, struct ipc64_perm *out)¶
convert kernel ipc permissions to user
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *inkernel permissions
struct ipc64_perm *outnew style ipc permissions
Description
Turn the kernel object in into a set of permissions descriptions for returning to userspace (out).
-
void ipc64_perm_to_ipc_perm(struct ipc64_perm *in, struct ipc_perm *out)¶
convert new ipc permissions to old
Parameters
struct ipc64_perm *innew style ipc permissions
struct ipc_perm *outold style ipc permissions
Description
Turn the new style permissions object in into a compatibility object and store it into the out pointer.
-
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipc_obtain_object_idr(struct ipc_ids *ids, int id)¶
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
int idipc id to look for
Description
Look for an id in the ipc ids idr and return associated ipc object.
Call inside the RCU critical section. The ipc object is not locked on exit.
-
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipc_obtain_object_check(struct ipc_ids *ids, int id)¶
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
int idipc id to look for
Description
Similar to ipc_obtain_object_idr() but also checks the ipc object
sequence number.
Call inside the RCU critical section. The ipc object is not locked on exit.
-
int ipcget(struct ipc_namespace *ns, struct ipc_ids *ids, const struct ipc_ops *ops, struct ipc_params *params)¶
Common sys_*get() code
Parameters
struct ipc_namespace *nsnamespace
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
const struct ipc_ops *opsoperations to be called on ipc object creation, permission checks and further checks
struct ipc_params *paramsthe parameters needed by the previous operations.
Description
Common routine called by sys_msgget(), sys_semget() and sys_shmget().
-
int ipc_update_perm(struct ipc64_perm *in, struct kern_ipc_perm *out)¶
update the permissions of an ipc object
Parameters
struct ipc64_perm *inthe permission given as input.
struct kern_ipc_perm *outthe permission of the ipc to set.
-
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcctl_obtain_check(struct ipc_namespace *ns, struct ipc_ids *ids, int id, int cmd, struct ipc64_perm *perm, int extra_perm)¶
retrieve an ipc object and check permissions
Parameters
struct ipc_namespace *nsipc namespace
struct ipc_ids *idsthe table of ids where to look for the ipc
int idthe id of the ipc to retrieve
int cmdthe cmd to check
struct ipc64_perm *permthe permission to set
int extra_permone extra permission parameter used by msq
Description
This function does some common audit and permissions check for some IPC_XXX cmd and is called from semctl_down, shmctl_down and msgctl_down.
- It:
retrieves the ipc object with the given id in the given table.
performs some audit and permission check, depending on the given cmd
returns a pointer to the ipc object or otherwise, the corresponding error.
Call holding the both the rwsem and the rcu read lock.
-
int ipc_parse_version(int *cmd)¶
ipc call version
Parameters
int *cmdpointer to command
Description
Return IPC_64 for new style IPC and IPC_OLD for old style IPC. The cmd value is turned from an encoding command and version into just the command code.
-
struct kern_ipc_perm *sysvipc_find_ipc(struct ipc_ids *ids, loff_t *pos)¶
Find and lock the ipc structure based on seq pos
Parameters
struct ipc_ids *idsipc identifier set
loff_t *posexpected position
Description
The function finds an ipc structure, based on the sequence file
position pos. If there is no ipc structure at position pos, then
the successor is selected.
If a structure is found, then it is locked (both rcu_read_lock() and
ipc_lock_object()) and pos is set to the position needed to locate
the found ipc structure.
If nothing is found (i.e. EOF), pos is not modified.
The function returns the found ipc structure, or NULL at EOF.
FIFO Buffer¶
kfifo interface¶
-
DECLARE_KFIFO_PTR¶
DECLARE_KFIFO_PTR (fifo, type)
macro to declare a fifo pointer object
Parameters
fifoname of the declared fifo
typetype of the fifo elements
-
DECLARE_KFIFO¶
DECLARE_KFIFO (fifo, type, size)
macro to declare a fifo object
Parameters
fifoname of the declared fifo
typetype of the fifo elements
sizethe number of elements in the fifo, this must be a power of 2
-
INIT_KFIFO¶
INIT_KFIFO (fifo)
Initialize a fifo declared by DECLARE_KFIFO
Parameters
fifoname of the declared fifo datatype
-
DEFINE_KFIFO¶
DEFINE_KFIFO (fifo, type, size)
macro to define and initialize a fifo
Parameters
fifoname of the declared fifo datatype
typetype of the fifo elements
sizethe number of elements in the fifo, this must be a power of 2
Note
the macro can be used for global and local fifo data type variables.
-
kfifo_initialized¶
kfifo_initialized (fifo)
Check if the fifo is initialized
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to check
Description
Return true if fifo is initialized, otherwise false.
Assumes the fifo was 0 before.
-
kfifo_esize¶
kfifo_esize (fifo)
returns the size of the element managed by the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_recsize¶
kfifo_recsize (fifo)
returns the size of the record length field
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_size¶
kfifo_size (fifo)
returns the size of the fifo in elements
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_reset¶
kfifo_reset (fifo)
removes the entire fifo content
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
Note
usage of kfifo_reset() is dangerous. It should be only called when the
fifo is exclusived locked or when it is secured that no other thread is
accessing the fifo.
-
kfifo_reset_out¶
kfifo_reset_out (fifo)
skip fifo content
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
Note
The usage of kfifo_reset_out() is safe until it will be only called
from the reader thread and there is only one concurrent reader. Otherwise
it is dangerous and must be handled in the same way as kfifo_reset().
-
kfifo_len¶
kfifo_len (fifo)
returns the number of used elements in the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_is_empty¶
kfifo_is_empty (fifo)
returns true if the fifo is empty
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_is_empty_spinlocked¶
kfifo_is_empty_spinlocked (fifo, lock)
returns true if the fifo is empty using a spinlock for locking
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
lockspinlock to be used for locking
-
kfifo_is_empty_spinlocked_noirqsave¶
kfifo_is_empty_spinlocked_noirqsave (fifo, lock)
returns true if the fifo is empty using a spinlock for locking, doesn’t disable interrupts
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
lockspinlock to be used for locking
-
kfifo_is_full¶
kfifo_is_full (fifo)
returns true if the fifo is full
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_avail¶
kfifo_avail (fifo)
returns the number of unused elements in the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_skip_count¶
kfifo_skip_count (fifo, count)
skip output data
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
countcount of data to skip
-
kfifo_skip¶
kfifo_skip (fifo)
skip output data
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
-
kfifo_peek_len¶
kfifo_peek_len (fifo)
gets the size of the next fifo record
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
Description
This function returns the size of the next fifo record in number of bytes.
-
kfifo_alloc¶
kfifo_alloc (fifo, size, gfp_mask)
dynamically allocates a new fifo buffer
Parameters
fifopointer to the fifo
sizethe number of elements in the fifo, this must be a power of 2
gfp_maskget_free_pages mask, passed to
kmalloc()
Description
This macro dynamically allocates a new fifo buffer.
The number of elements will be rounded-up to a power of 2.
The fifo will be release with kfifo_free().
Return 0 if no error, otherwise an error code.
-
kfifo_free¶
kfifo_free (fifo)
frees the fifo
Parameters
fifothe fifo to be freed
-
kfifo_init¶
kfifo_init (fifo, buffer, size)
initialize a fifo using a preallocated buffer
Parameters
fifothe fifo to assign the buffer
bufferthe preallocated buffer to be used
sizethe size of the internal buffer, this have to be a power of 2
Description
This macro initializes a fifo using a preallocated buffer.
The number of elements will be rounded-up to a power of 2. Return 0 if no error, otherwise an error code.
-
kfifo_put¶
kfifo_put (fifo, val)
put data into the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
valthe data to be added
Description
This macro copies the given value into the fifo. It returns 0 if the fifo was full. Otherwise it returns the number processed elements.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_get¶
kfifo_get (fifo, val)
get data from the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
valaddress where to store the data
Description
This macro reads the data from the fifo. It returns 0 if the fifo was empty. Otherwise it returns the number processed elements.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_peek¶
kfifo_peek (fifo, val)
get data from the fifo without removing
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
valaddress where to store the data
Description
This reads the data from the fifo without removing it from the fifo. It returns 0 if the fifo was empty. Otherwise it returns the number processed elements.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_in¶
kfifo_in (fifo, buf, n)
put data into the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
bufthe data to be added
nnumber of elements to be added
Description
This macro copies the given buffer into the fifo and returns the number of copied elements.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_in_spinlocked¶
kfifo_in_spinlocked (fifo, buf, n, lock)
put data into the fifo using a spinlock for locking
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
bufthe data to be added
nnumber of elements to be added
lockpointer to the spinlock to use for locking
Description
This macro copies the given values buffer into the fifo and returns the number of copied elements.
-
kfifo_in_spinlocked_noirqsave¶
kfifo_in_spinlocked_noirqsave (fifo, buf, n, lock)
put data into fifo using a spinlock for locking, don’t disable interrupts
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
bufthe data to be added
nnumber of elements to be added
lockpointer to the spinlock to use for locking
Description
This is a variant of kfifo_in_spinlocked() but uses spin_lock/unlock()
for locking and doesn’t disable interrupts.
-
kfifo_out¶
kfifo_out (fifo, buf, n)
get data from the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
bufpointer to the storage buffer
nmax. number of elements to get
Description
This macro gets some data from the fifo and returns the numbers of elements copied.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_out_spinlocked¶
kfifo_out_spinlocked (fifo, buf, n, lock)
get data from the fifo using a spinlock for locking
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
bufpointer to the storage buffer
nmax. number of elements to get
lockpointer to the spinlock to use for locking
Description
This macro gets the data from the fifo and returns the numbers of elements copied.
-
kfifo_out_spinlocked_noirqsave¶
kfifo_out_spinlocked_noirqsave (fifo, buf, n, lock)
get data from the fifo using a spinlock for locking, don’t disable interrupts
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
bufpointer to the storage buffer
nmax. number of elements to get
lockpointer to the spinlock to use for locking
Description
This is a variant of kfifo_out_spinlocked() which uses spin_lock/unlock()
for locking and doesn’t disable interrupts.
-
kfifo_from_user¶
kfifo_from_user (fifo, from, len, copied)
puts some data from user space into the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
frompointer to the data to be added
lenthe length of the data to be added
copiedpointer to output variable to store the number of copied bytes
Description
This macro copies at most len bytes from the from into the fifo, depending of the available space and returns -EFAULT/0.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_to_user¶
kfifo_to_user (fifo, to, len, copied)
copies data from the fifo into user space
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
towhere the data must be copied
lenthe size of the destination buffer
copiedpointer to output variable to store the number of copied bytes
Description
This macro copies at most len bytes from the fifo into the to buffer and returns -EFAULT/0.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_dma_in_prepare_mapped¶
kfifo_dma_in_prepare_mapped (fifo, sgl, nents, len, dma)
setup a scatterlist for DMA input
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
sglpointer to the scatterlist array
nentsnumber of entries in the scatterlist array
lennumber of elements to transfer
dmamapped dma address to fill into sgl
Description
This macro fills a scatterlist for DMA input. It returns the number entries in the scatterlist array.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macros.
-
kfifo_dma_in_finish¶
kfifo_dma_in_finish (fifo, len)
finish a DMA IN operation
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
lennumber of bytes to received
Description
This macro finishes a DMA IN operation. The in counter will be updated by the len parameter. No error checking will be done.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macros.
-
kfifo_dma_out_prepare_mapped¶
kfifo_dma_out_prepare_mapped (fifo, sgl, nents, len, dma)
setup a scatterlist for DMA output
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
sglpointer to the scatterlist array
nentsnumber of entries in the scatterlist array
lennumber of elements to transfer
dmamapped dma address to fill into sgl
Description
This macro fills a scatterlist for DMA output which at most len bytes to transfer. It returns the number entries in the scatterlist array. A zero means there is no space available and the scatterlist is not filled.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macros.
-
kfifo_dma_out_finish¶
kfifo_dma_out_finish (fifo, len)
finish a DMA OUT operation
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
lennumber of bytes transferred
Description
This macro finishes a DMA OUT operation. The out counter will be updated by the len parameter. No error checking will be done.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macros.
-
kfifo_out_peek¶
kfifo_out_peek (fifo, buf, n)
gets some data from the fifo
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
bufpointer to the storage buffer
nmax. number of elements to get
Description
This macro gets the data from the fifo and returns the numbers of elements copied. The data is not removed from the fifo.
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_out_linear¶
kfifo_out_linear (fifo, tail, n)
gets a tail of/offset to available data
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
tailpointer to an unsigned int to store the value of tail
nmax. number of elements to point at
Description
This macro obtains the offset (tail) to the available data in the fifo
buffer and returns the
numbers of elements available. It returns the available count till the end
of data or till the end of the buffer. So that it can be used for linear
data processing (like memcpy() of (fifo->data + tail) with count
returned).
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
-
kfifo_out_linear_ptr¶
kfifo_out_linear_ptr (fifo, ptr, n)
gets a pointer to the available data
Parameters
fifoaddress of the fifo to be used
ptrpointer to data to store the pointer to tail
nmax. number of elements to point at
Description
Similarly to kfifo_out_linear(), this macro obtains the pointer to the
available data in the fifo buffer and returns the numbers of elements
available. It returns the available count till the end of available data or
till the end of the buffer. So that it can be used for linear data
processing (like memcpy() of ptr with count returned).
Note that with only one concurrent reader and one concurrent writer, you don’t need extra locking to use these macro.
relay interface support¶
Relay interface support is designed to provide an efficient mechanism for tools and facilities to relay large amounts of data from kernel space to user space.
relay interface¶
-
int relay_buf_full(struct rchan_buf *buf)¶
boolean, is the channel buffer full?
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufchannel buffer
Returns 1 if the buffer is full, 0 otherwise.
-
void relay_reset(struct rchan *chan)¶
reset the channel
Parameters
struct rchan *chanthe channel
This has the effect of erasing all data from all channel buffers and restarting the channel in its initial state. The buffers are not freed, so any mappings are still in effect.
NOTE. Care should be taken that the channel isn’t actually being used by anything when this call is made.
-
struct rchan *relay_open(const char *base_filename, struct dentry *parent, size_t subbuf_size, size_t n_subbufs, const struct rchan_callbacks *cb, void *private_data)¶
create a new relay channel
Parameters
const char *base_filenamebase name of files to create,
NULLfor buffering onlystruct dentry *parentdentry of parent directory,
NULLfor root directory or buffersize_t subbuf_sizesize of sub-buffers
size_t n_subbufsnumber of sub-buffers
const struct rchan_callbacks *cbclient callback functions
void *private_datauser-defined data
Returns channel pointer if successful,
NULLotherwise.Creates a channel buffer for each cpu using the sizes and attributes specified. The created channel buffer files will be named base_filename0...base_filenameN-1. File permissions will be
S_IRUSR.If opening a buffer (parent = NULL) that you later wish to register in a filesystem, call
relay_late_setup_files()once the parent dentry is available.
-
int relay_late_setup_files(struct rchan *chan, const char *base_filename, struct dentry *parent)¶
triggers file creation
Parameters
struct rchan *chanchannel to operate on
const char *base_filenamebase name of files to create
struct dentry *parentdentry of parent directory,
NULLfor root directoryReturns 0 if successful, non-zero otherwise.
Use to setup files for a previously buffer-only channel created by
relay_open()with a NULL parent dentry.For example, this is useful for perfomring early tracing in kernel, before VFS is up and then exposing the early results once the dentry is available.
-
size_t relay_switch_subbuf(struct rchan_buf *buf, size_t length)¶
switch to a new sub-buffer
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufchannel buffer
size_t lengthsize of current event
Returns either the length passed in or 0 if full.
Performs sub-buffer-switch tasks such as invoking callbacks, updating padding counts, waking up readers, etc.
-
void relay_subbufs_consumed(struct rchan *chan, unsigned int cpu, size_t subbufs_consumed)¶
update the buffer’s sub-buffers-consumed count
Parameters
struct rchan *chanthe channel
unsigned int cputhe cpu associated with the channel buffer to update
size_t subbufs_consumednumber of sub-buffers to add to current buf’s count
Adds to the channel buffer’s consumed sub-buffer count. subbufs_consumed should be the number of sub-buffers newly consumed, not the total consumed.
NOTE. Kernel clients don’t need to call this function if the channel mode is ‘overwrite’.
-
void relay_close(struct rchan *chan)¶
close the channel
Parameters
struct rchan *chanthe channel
Closes all channel buffers and frees the channel.
-
void relay_flush(struct rchan *chan)¶
close the channel
Parameters
struct rchan *chanthe channel
Flushes all channel buffers, i.e. forces buffer switch.
-
int relay_mmap_buf(struct rchan_buf *buf, struct vm_area_struct *vma)¶
mmap channel buffer to process address space
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufrelay channel buffer
struct vm_area_struct *vmavm_area_struct describing memory to be mapped
Returns 0 if ok, negative on error
Caller should already have grabbed mmap_lock.
-
void *relay_alloc_buf(struct rchan_buf *buf, size_t *size)¶
allocate a channel buffer
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufthe buffer struct
size_t *sizetotal size of the buffer
Returns a pointer to the resulting buffer,
NULLif unsuccessful. The passed in size will get page aligned, if it isn’t already.
-
struct rchan_buf *relay_create_buf(struct rchan *chan)¶
allocate and initialize a channel buffer
Parameters
struct rchan *chanthe relay channel
Returns channel buffer if successful,
NULLotherwise.
Parameters
struct kref *kreftarget kernel reference that contains the relay channel
Should only be called from kref_put().
-
void relay_destroy_buf(struct rchan_buf *buf)¶
destroy an rchan_buf struct and associated buffer
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufthe buffer struct
Parameters
struct kref *kreftarget kernel reference that contains the relay buffer
Removes the file from the filesystem, which also frees the rchan_buf_struct and the channel buffer. Should only be called from kref_put().
-
int relay_buf_empty(struct rchan_buf *buf)¶
boolean, is the channel buffer empty?
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufchannel buffer
Returns 1 if the buffer is empty, 0 otherwise.
-
void wakeup_readers(struct irq_work *work)¶
wake up readers waiting on a channel
Parameters
struct irq_work *workcontains the channel buffer
This is the function used to defer reader waking
-
void __relay_reset(struct rchan_buf *buf, unsigned int init)¶
reset a channel buffer
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufthe channel buffer
unsigned int init1 if this is a first-time initialization
See
relay_reset()for description of effect.
-
void relay_close_buf(struct rchan_buf *buf)¶
close a channel buffer
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufchannel buffer
Marks the buffer finalized and restores the default callbacks. The channel buffer and channel buffer data structure are then freed automatically when the last reference is given up.
Parameters
struct inode *inodethe inode
struct file *filpthe file
Increments the channel buffer refcount.
-
int relay_file_mmap(struct file *filp, struct vm_area_struct *vma)¶
mmap file op for relay files
Parameters
struct file *filpthe file
struct vm_area_struct *vmathe vma describing what to map
Calls upon
relay_mmap_buf()to map the file into user space.
-
__poll_t relay_file_poll(struct file *filp, poll_table *wait)¶
poll file op for relay files
Parameters
struct file *filpthe file
poll_table *waitpoll table
Poll implemention.
Parameters
struct inode *inodethe inode
struct file *filpthe file
Decrements the channel refcount, as the filesystem is no longer using it.
-
size_t relay_file_read_subbuf_avail(size_t read_pos, struct rchan_buf *buf)¶
return bytes available in sub-buffer
Parameters
size_t read_posfile read position
struct rchan_buf *bufrelay channel buffer
-
size_t relay_file_read_start_pos(struct rchan_buf *buf)¶
find the first available byte to read
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufrelay channel buffer
If the read_pos is in the middle of padding, return the position of the first actually available byte, otherwise return the original value.
-
size_t relay_file_read_end_pos(struct rchan_buf *buf, size_t read_pos, size_t count)¶
return the new read position
Parameters
struct rchan_buf *bufrelay channel buffer
size_t read_posfile read position
size_t countnumber of bytes to be read
Module Support¶
Kernel module auto-loading¶
-
int __request_module(bool wait, const char *fmt, ...)¶
try to load a kernel module
Parameters
bool waitwait (or not) for the operation to complete
const char *fmtprintf style format string for the name of the module
...arguments as specified in the format string
Description
Load a module using the user mode module loader. The function returns zero on success or a negative errno code or positive exit code from “modprobe” on failure. Note that a successful module load does not mean the module did not then unload and exit on an error of its own. Callers must check that the service they requested is now available not blindly invoke it.
If module auto-loading support is disabled then this function simply returns -ENOENT.
Module debugging¶
Enabling CONFIG_MODULE_STATS enables module debugging statistics which are useful to monitor and root cause memory pressure issues with module loading. These statistics are useful to allow us to improve production workloads.
The current module debugging statistics supported help keep track of module loading failures to enable improvements either for kernel module auto-loading usage (request_module()) or interactions with userspace. Statistics are provided to track all possible failures in the finit_module() path and memory wasted in this process space. Each of the failure counters are associated to a type of module loading failure which is known to incur a certain amount of memory allocation loss. In the worst case loading a module will fail after a 3 step memory allocation process:
memory allocated with kernel_read_file_from_fd()
module decompression processes the file read from kernel_read_file_from_fd(), and
vmap()is used to map the decompressed module to a new local buffer which represents a copy of the decompressed module passed from userspace. The buffer from kernel_read_file_from_fd() is freed right away.layout_and_allocate() allocates space for the final resting place where we would keep the module if it were to be processed successfully.
If a failure occurs after these three different allocations only one counter will be incremented with the summation of the allocated bytes freed incurred during this failure. Likewise, if module loading failed only after step b) a separate counter is used and incremented for the bytes freed and not used during both of those allocations.
Virtual memory space can be limited, for example on x86 virtual memory size defaults to 128 MiB. We should strive to limit and avoid wasting virtual memory allocations when possible. These module debugging statistics help to evaluate how much memory is being wasted on bootup due to module loading failures.
All counters are designed to be incremental. Atomic counters are used so to remain simple and avoid delays and deadlocks.
dup_failed_modules - tracks duplicate failed modules¶
Linked list of modules which failed to be loaded because an already existing module with the same name was already being processed or already loaded. The finit_module() system call incurs heavy virtual memory allocations. In the worst case an finit_module() system call can end up allocating virtual memory 3 times:
kernel_read_file_from_fd() call uses vmalloc()
optional module decompression uses
vmap()layout_and allocate() can use vzalloc() or an arch specific variation of vmalloc to deal with ELF sections requiring special permissions
In practice on a typical boot today most finit_module() calls fail due to the module with the same name already being loaded or about to be processed. All virtual memory allocated to these failed modules will be freed with no functional use.
To help with this the dup_failed_modules allows us to track modules which failed to load due to the fact that a module was already loaded or being processed. There are only two points at which we can fail such calls, we list them below along with the number of virtual memory allocation calls:
FAIL_DUP_MOD_BECOMING: at the end of early_mod_check() before layout_and_allocate(). - with module decompression: 2 virtual memory allocation calls - without module decompression: 1 virtual memory allocation calls
FAIL_DUP_MOD_LOAD: after layout_and_allocate() on add_unformed_module() - with module decompression 3 virtual memory allocation calls - without module decompression 2 virtual memory allocation calls
We should strive to get this list to be as small as possible. If this list is not empty it is a reflection of possible work or optimizations possible either in-kernel or in userspace.
module statistics debugfs counters¶
The total amount of wasted virtual memory allocation space during module loading can be computed by adding the total from the summation:
invalid_kread_bytes + invalid_decompress_bytes + invalid_becoming_bytes + invalid_mod_bytes
The following debugfs counters are available to inspect module loading failures:
total_mod_size: total bytes ever used by all modules we’ve dealt with on this system
total_text_size: total bytes of the .text and .init.text ELF section sizes we’ve dealt with on this system
invalid_kread_bytes: bytes allocated and then freed on failures which happen due to the initial kernel_read_file_from_fd(). kernel_read_file_from_fd() uses vmalloc(). These should typically not happen unless your system is under memory pressure.
invalid_decompress_bytes: number of bytes allocated and freed due to memory allocations in the module decompression path that use
vmap(). These typically should not happen unless your system is under memory pressure.invalid_becoming_bytes: total number of bytes allocated and freed used to read the kernel module userspace wants us to read before we promote it to be processed to be added to our modules linked list. These failures can happen if we had a check in between a successful kernel_read_file_from_fd() call and right before we allocate the our private memory for the module which would be kept if the module is successfully loaded. The most common reason for this failure is when userspace is racing to load a module which it does not yet see loaded. The first module to succeed in add_unformed_module() will add a module to our
moduleslist and subsequent loads of modules with the same name will error out at the end of early_mod_check(). The check for module_patient_check_exists() at the end of early_mod_check() prevents duplicate allocations on layout_and_allocate() for modules already being processed. These duplicate failed modules are non-fatal, however they typically are indicative of userspace not seeing a module in userspace loaded yet and unnecessarily trying to load a module before the kernel even has a chance to begin to process prior requests. Although duplicate failures can be non-fatal, we should try to reduce vmalloc() pressure proactively, so ideally after boot this will be close to as 0 as possible. If module decompression was used we also add to this counter the cost of the initial kernel_read_file_from_fd() of the compressed module. If module decompression was not used the value represents the total allocated and freed bytes in kernel_read_file_from_fd() calls for these type of failures. These failures can occur because:
module_sig_check() - module signature checks
elf_validity_cache_copy() - some ELF validation issue
early_mod_check():
blacklisting
failed to rewrite section headers
version magic
live patch requirements didn’t check out
the module was detected as being already present
invalid_mod_bytes: these are the total number of bytes allocated and freed due to failures after we did all the sanity checks of the module which userspace passed to us and after our first check that the module is unique. A module can still fail to load if we detect the module is loaded after we allocate space for it with layout_and_allocate(), we do this check right before processing the module as live and run its initialization routines. Note that you have a failure of this type it also means the respective kernel_read_file_from_fd() memory space was also freed and not used, and so we increment this counter with twice the size of the module. Additionally if you used module decompression the size of the compressed module is also added to this counter.
modcount: how many modules we’ve loaded in our kernel life time
failed_kreads: how many modules failed due to failed kernel_read_file_from_fd()
failed_decompress: how many failed module decompression attempts we’ve had. These really should not happen unless your compression / decompression might be broken.
failed_becoming: how many modules failed after we kernel_read_file_from_fd() it and before we allocate memory for it with layout_and_allocate(). This counter is never incremented if you manage to validate the module and call layout_and_allocate() for it.
failed_load_modules: how many modules failed once we’ve allocated our private space for our module using layout_and_allocate(). These failures should hopefully mostly be dealt with already. Races in theory could still exist here, but it would just mean the kernel had started processing two threads concurrently up to early_mod_check() and one thread won. These failures are good signs the kernel or userspace is doing something seriously stupid or that could be improved. We should strive to fix these, but it is perhaps not easy to fix them. A recent example are the modules requests incurred for frequency modules, a separate module request was being issued for each CPU on a system.
Inter Module support¶
Refer to the files in kernel/module/ for more information.
Hardware Interfaces¶
DMA Channels¶
-
int request_dma(unsigned int dmanr, const char *device_id)¶
request and reserve a system DMA channel
Parameters
unsigned int dmanrDMA channel number
const char * device_idreserving device ID string, used in /proc/dma
-
void free_dma(unsigned int dmanr)¶
free a reserved system DMA channel
Parameters
unsigned int dmanrDMA channel number
Resources Management¶
-
struct resource *request_resource_conflict(struct resource *root, struct resource *new)¶
request and reserve an I/O or memory resource
Parameters
struct resource *rootroot resource descriptor
struct resource *newresource descriptor desired by caller
Description
Returns 0 for success, conflict resource on error.
-
int find_next_iomem_res(resource_size_t start, resource_size_t end, unsigned long flags, unsigned long desc, struct resource *res)¶
Finds the lowest iomem resource that covers part of [start..**end**].
Parameters
resource_size_t startstart address of the resource searched for
resource_size_t endend address of same resource
unsigned long flagsflags which the resource must have
unsigned long descdescriptor the resource must have
struct resource *resreturn ptr, if resource found
Description
If a resource is found, returns 0 and ***res is overwritten with the part of the resource that’s within [**start..**end**]; if none is found, returns -ENODEV. Returns -EINVAL for invalid parameters.
The caller must specify start, end, flags, and desc (which may be IORES_DESC_NONE).
-
int reallocate_resource(struct resource *root, struct resource *old, resource_size_t newsize, struct resource_constraint *constraint)¶
allocate a slot in the resource tree given range & alignment. The resource will be relocated if the new size cannot be reallocated in the current location.
Parameters
struct resource *rootroot resource descriptor
struct resource *oldresource descriptor desired by caller
resource_size_t newsizenew size of the resource descriptor
struct resource_constraint *constraintthe size and alignment constraints to be met.
-
struct resource *lookup_resource(struct resource *root, resource_size_t start)¶
find an existing resource by a resource start address
Parameters
struct resource *rootroot resource descriptor
resource_size_t startresource start address
Description
Returns a pointer to the resource if found, NULL otherwise
-
struct resource *insert_resource_conflict(struct resource *parent, struct resource *new)¶
Inserts resource in the resource tree
Parameters
struct resource *parentparent of the new resource
struct resource *newnew resource to insert
Description
Returns 0 on success, conflict resource if the resource can’t be inserted.
This function is equivalent to request_resource_conflict when no conflict happens. If a conflict happens, and the conflicting resources entirely fit within the range of the new resource, then the new resource is inserted and the conflicting resources become children of the new resource.
This function is intended for producers of resources, such as FW modules and bus drivers.
-
resource_size_t resource_alignment(struct resource *res)¶
calculate resource’s alignment
Parameters
struct resource *resresource pointer
Description
Returns alignment on success, 0 (invalid alignment) on failure.
-
void release_mem_region_adjustable(resource_size_t start, resource_size_t size)¶
release a previously reserved memory region
Parameters
resource_size_t startresource start address
resource_size_t sizeresource region size
Description
This interface is intended for memory hot-delete. The requested region is released from a currently busy memory resource. The requested region must either match exactly or fit into a single busy resource entry. In the latter case, the remaining resource is adjusted accordingly. Existing children of the busy memory resource must be immutable in the request.
Note
Additional release conditions, such as overlapping region, can be supported after they are confirmed as valid cases.
When a busy memory resource gets split into two entries, the code assumes that all children remain in the lower address entry for simplicity. Enhance this logic when necessary.
-
void merge_system_ram_resource(struct resource *res)¶
mark the System RAM resource mergeable and try to merge it with adjacent, mergeable resources
Parameters
struct resource *resresource descriptor
Description
This interface is intended for memory hotplug, whereby lots of contiguous system ram resources are added (e.g., via add_memory*()) by a driver, and the actual resource boundaries are not of interest (e.g., it might be relevant for DIMMs). Only resources that are marked mergeable, that have the same parent, and that don’t have any children are considered. All mergeable resources must be immutable during the request.
Note
The caller has to make sure that no pointers to resources that are marked mergeable are used anymore after this call - the resource might be freed and the pointer might be stale!
release_mem_region_adjustable()will split on demand on memory hotunplug
-
int request_resource(struct resource *root, struct resource *new)¶
request and reserve an I/O or memory resource
Parameters
struct resource *rootroot resource descriptor
struct resource *newresource descriptor desired by caller
Description
Returns 0 for success, negative error code on error.
-
int release_resource(struct resource *old)¶
release a previously reserved resource
Parameters
struct resource *oldresource pointer
-
int walk_iomem_res_desc(unsigned long desc, unsigned long flags, u64 start, u64 end, void *arg, int (*func)(struct resource*, void*))¶
Walks through iomem resources and calls func() with matching resource ranges. *
Parameters
unsigned long descI/O resource descriptor. Use IORES_DESC_NONE to skip desc check.
unsigned long flagsI/O resource flags
u64 startstart addr
u64 endend addr
void *argfunction argument for the callback func
int (*func)(struct resource *, void *)callback function that is called for each qualifying resource area
Description
All the memory ranges which overlap start,end and also match flags and desc are valid candidates.
NOTE
For a new descriptor search, define a new IORES_DESC in <linux/ioport.h> and set it in ‘desc’ of a target resource entry.
-
int region_intersects(resource_size_t start, size_t size, unsigned long flags, unsigned long desc)¶
determine intersection of region with known resources
Parameters
resource_size_t startregion start address
size_t sizesize of region
unsigned long flagsflags of resource (in iomem_resource)
unsigned long descdescriptor of resource (in iomem_resource) or IORES_DESC_NONE
Description
Check if the specified region partially overlaps or fully eclipses a resource identified by flags and desc (optional with IORES_DESC_NONE). Return REGION_DISJOINT if the region does not overlap flags/desc, return REGION_MIXED if the region overlaps flags/desc and another resource, and return REGION_INTERSECTS if the region overlaps flags/desc and no other defined resource. Note that REGION_INTERSECTS is also returned in the case when the specified region overlaps RAM and undefined memory holes.
region_intersect() is used by memory remapping functions to ensure the user is not remapping RAM and is a vast speed up over walking through the resource table page by page.
-
int allocate_resource(struct resource *root, struct resource *new, resource_size_t size, resource_size_t min, resource_size_t max, resource_size_t align, resource_size_t (*alignf)(void*, const struct resource*, resource_size_t, resource_size_t), void *alignf_data)¶
allocate empty slot in the resource tree given range & alignment. The resource will be reallocated with a new size if it was already allocated
Parameters
struct resource *rootroot resource descriptor
struct resource *newresource descriptor desired by caller
resource_size_t sizerequested resource region size
resource_size_t minminimum boundary to allocate
resource_size_t maxmaximum boundary to allocate
resource_size_t alignalignment requested, in bytes
resource_size_t (*alignf)(void *, const struct resource *, resource_size_t, resource_size_t)alignment function, optional, called if not NULL
void *alignf_dataarbitrary data to pass to the alignf function
-
int insert_resource(struct resource *parent, struct resource *new)¶
Inserts a resource in the resource tree
Parameters
struct resource *parentparent of the new resource
struct resource *newnew resource to insert
Description
Returns 0 on success, -EBUSY if the resource can’t be inserted.
This function is intended for producers of resources, such as FW modules and bus drivers.
-
void insert_resource_expand_to_fit(struct resource *root, struct resource *new)¶
Insert a resource into the resource tree
Parameters
struct resource *rootroot resource descriptor
struct resource *newnew resource to insert
Description
Insert a resource into the resource tree, possibly expanding it in order to make it encompass any conflicting resources.
-
int remove_resource(struct resource *old)¶
Remove a resource in the resource tree
Parameters
struct resource *oldresource to remove
Description
Returns 0 on success, -EINVAL if the resource is not valid.
This function removes a resource previously inserted by insert_resource()
or insert_resource_conflict(), and moves the children (if any) up to
where they were before. insert_resource() and insert_resource_conflict()
insert a new resource, and move any conflicting resources down to the
children of the new resource.
insert_resource(), insert_resource_conflict() and remove_resource() are
intended for producers of resources, such as FW modules and bus drivers.
-
int adjust_resource(struct resource *res, resource_size_t start, resource_size_t size)¶
modify a resource’s start and size
Parameters
struct resource *resresource to modify
resource_size_t startnew start value
resource_size_t sizenew size
Description
Given an existing resource, change its start and size to match the arguments. Returns 0 on success, -EBUSY if it can’t fit. Existing children of the resource are assumed to be immutable.
-
struct resource *__request_region(struct resource *parent, resource_size_t start, resource_size_t n, const char *name, int flags)¶
create a new busy resource region
Parameters
struct resource *parentparent resource descriptor
resource_size_t startresource start address
resource_size_t nresource region size
const char *namereserving caller’s ID string
int flagsIO resource flags
-
void __release_region(struct resource *parent, resource_size_t start, resource_size_t n)¶
release a previously reserved resource region
Parameters
struct resource *parentparent resource descriptor
resource_size_t startresource start address
resource_size_t nresource region size
Description
The described resource region must match a currently busy region.
-
int devm_request_resource(struct device *dev, struct resource *root, struct resource *new)¶
request and reserve an I/O or memory resource
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for which to request the resource
struct resource *rootroot of the resource tree from which to request the resource
struct resource *newdescriptor of the resource to request
Description
This is a device-managed version of request_resource(). There is usually
no need to release resources requested by this function explicitly since
that will be taken care of when the device is unbound from its driver.
If for some reason the resource needs to be released explicitly, because
of ordering issues for example, drivers must call devm_release_resource()
rather than the regular release_resource().
When a conflict is detected between any existing resources and the newly requested resource, an error message will be printed.
Returns 0 on success or a negative error code on failure.
-
void devm_release_resource(struct device *dev, struct resource *new)¶
release a previously requested resource
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for which to release the resource
struct resource *newdescriptor of the resource to release
Description
Releases a resource previously requested using devm_request_resource().
-
struct resource *devm_request_free_mem_region(struct device *dev, struct resource *base, unsigned long size)¶
find free region for device private memory
Parameters
struct device *devdevice struct to bind the resource to
struct resource *baseresource tree to look in
unsigned long sizesize in bytes of the device memory to add
Description
This function tries to find an empty range of physical address big enough to contain the new resource, so that it can later be hotplugged as ZONE_DEVICE memory, which in turn allocates struct pages.
-
struct resource *alloc_free_mem_region(struct resource *base, unsigned long size, unsigned long align, const char *name)¶
find a free region relative to base
Parameters
struct resource *baseresource that will parent the new resource
unsigned long sizesize in bytes of memory to allocate from base
unsigned long alignalignment requirements for the allocation
const char *nameresource name
Description
Buses like CXL, that can dynamically instantiate new memory regions, need a method to allocate physical address space for those regions. Allocate and insert a new resource to cover a free, unclaimed by a descendant of base, range in the span of base.
MTRR Handling¶
-
int arch_phys_wc_add(unsigned long base, unsigned long size)¶
add a WC MTRR and handle errors if PAT is unavailable
Parameters
unsigned long basePhysical base address
unsigned long sizeSize of region
Description
If PAT is available, this does nothing. If PAT is unavailable, it attempts to add a WC MTRR covering size bytes starting at base and logs an error if this fails.
The called should provide a power of two size on an equivalent power of two boundary.
Drivers must store the return value to pass to mtrr_del_wc_if_needed, but drivers should not try to interpret that return value.
Security Framework¶
-
int security_init(void)¶
initializes the security framework
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
This should be called early in the kernel initialization sequence.
-
void security_add_hooks(struct security_hook_list *hooks, int count, const struct lsm_id *lsmid)¶
Add a modules hooks to the hook lists.
Parameters
struct security_hook_list *hooksthe hooks to add
int countthe number of hooks to add
const struct lsm_id *lsmidthe identification information for the security module
Description
Each LSM has to register its hooks with the infrastructure.
Parameters
struct cred *credthe cred that needs a blob
gfp_t gfpallocation type
Description
Allocate the cred blob for all the modules
Returns 0, or -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
Parameters
struct cred *credthe cred that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the cred blob for all the modules
Parameters
struct file *filethe file that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the file blob for all the modules
Returns 0, or -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
Parameters
struct inode *inodethe inode that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the inode blob for all the modules
Returns 0, or -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
-
int lsm_task_alloc(struct task_struct *task)¶
allocate a composite task blob
Parameters
struct task_struct *taskthe task that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the task blob for all the modules
Returns 0, or -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
-
int lsm_ipc_alloc(struct kern_ipc_perm *kip)¶
allocate a composite ipc blob
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *kipthe ipc that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the ipc blob for all the modules
Returns 0, or -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
-
int lsm_msg_msg_alloc(struct msg_msg *mp)¶
allocate a composite msg_msg blob
Parameters
struct msg_msg *mpthe msg_msg that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the ipc blob for all the modules
Returns 0, or -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
-
void lsm_early_task(struct task_struct *task)¶
during initialization allocate a composite task blob
Parameters
struct task_struct *taskthe task that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the task blob for all the modules
-
int lsm_superblock_alloc(struct super_block *sb)¶
allocate a composite superblock blob
Parameters
struct super_block *sbthe superblock that needs a blob
Description
Allocate the superblock blob for all the modules
Returns 0, or -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
-
int lsm_fill_user_ctx(struct lsm_ctx __user *uctx, u32 *uctx_len, void *val, size_t val_len, u64 id, u64 flags)¶
Fill a user space lsm_ctx structure
Parameters
struct lsm_ctx __user *uctxa userspace LSM context to be filled
u32 *uctx_lenavailable uctx size (input), used uctx size (output)
void *valthe new LSM context value
size_t val_lenthe size of the new LSM context value
u64 idLSM id
u64 flagsLSM defined flags
Description
Fill all of the fields in a userspace lsm_ctx structure. If uctx is NULL simply calculate the required size to output via utc_len and return success.
Returns 0 on success, -E2BIG if userspace buffer is not large enough, -EFAULT on a copyout error, -ENOMEM if memory can’t be allocated.
-
int security_binder_set_context_mgr(const struct cred *mgr)¶
Check if becoming binder ctx mgr is ok
Parameters
const struct cred *mgrtask credentials of current binder process
Description
Check whether mgr is allowed to be the binder context manager.
Return
Return 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_binder_transaction(const struct cred *from, const struct cred *to)¶
Check if a binder transaction is allowed
Parameters
const struct cred *fromsending process
const struct cred *toreceiving process
Description
Check whether from is allowed to invoke a binder transaction call to to.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_binder_transfer_binder(const struct cred *from, const struct cred *to)¶
Check if a binder transfer is allowed
Parameters
const struct cred *fromsending process
const struct cred *toreceiving process
Description
Check whether from is allowed to transfer a binder reference to to.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_binder_transfer_file(const struct cred *from, const struct cred *to, const struct file *file)¶
Check if a binder file xfer is allowed
Parameters
const struct cred *fromsending process
const struct cred *toreceiving process
const struct file *filefile being transferred
Description
Check whether from is allowed to transfer file to to.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_ptrace_access_check(struct task_struct *child, unsigned int mode)¶
Check if tracing is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *childtarget process
unsigned int modePTRACE_MODE flags
Description
Check permission before allowing the current process to trace the child process. Security modules may also want to perform a process tracing check during an execve in the set_security or apply_creds hooks of tracing check during an execve in the bprm_set_creds hook of binprm_security_ops if the process is being traced and its security attributes would be changed by the execve.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_ptrace_traceme(struct task_struct *parent)¶
Check if tracing is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *parenttracing process
Description
Check that the parent process has sufficient permission to trace the current process before allowing the current process to present itself to the parent process for tracing.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_capget(const struct task_struct *target, kernel_cap_t *effective, kernel_cap_t *inheritable, kernel_cap_t *permitted)¶
Get the capability sets for a process
Parameters
const struct task_struct *targettarget process
kernel_cap_t *effectiveeffective capability set
kernel_cap_t *inheritableinheritable capability set
kernel_cap_t *permittedpermitted capability set
Description
Get the effective, inheritable, and permitted capability sets for the target process. The hook may also perform permission checking to determine if the current process is allowed to see the capability sets of the target process.
Return
Returns 0 if the capability sets were successfully obtained.
-
int security_capset(struct cred *new, const struct cred *old, const kernel_cap_t *effective, const kernel_cap_t *inheritable, const kernel_cap_t *permitted)¶
Set the capability sets for a process
Parameters
struct cred *newnew credentials for the target process
const struct cred *oldcurrent credentials of the target process
const kernel_cap_t *effectiveeffective capability set
const kernel_cap_t *inheritableinheritable capability set
const kernel_cap_t *permittedpermitted capability set
Description
Set the effective, inheritable, and permitted capability sets for the current process.
Return
Returns 0 and update new if permission is granted.
-
int security_capable(const struct cred *cred, struct user_namespace *ns, int cap, unsigned int opts)¶
Check if a process has the necessary capability
Parameters
const struct cred *credcredentials to examine
struct user_namespace *nsuser namespace
int capcapability requested
unsigned int optscapability check options
Description
Check whether the tsk process has the cap capability in the indicated credentials. cap contains the capability <include/linux/capability.h>. opts contains options for the capable check <include/linux/security.h>.
Return
Returns 0 if the capability is granted.
-
int security_quotactl(int cmds, int type, int id, const struct super_block *sb)¶
Check if a quotactl() syscall is allowed for this fs
Parameters
int cmdscommands
int typetype
int idid
const struct super_block *sbfilesystem
Description
Check whether the quotactl syscall is allowed for this sb.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct dentry *dentrydentry
Description
Check whether QUOTAON is allowed for dentry.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_syslog(int type)¶
Check if accessing the kernel message ring is allowed
Parameters
int typeSYSLOG_ACTION_* type
Description
Check permission before accessing the kernel message ring or changing logging to the console. See the syslog(2) manual page for an explanation of the type values.
Return
Return 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_settime64(const struct timespec64 *ts, const struct timezone *tz)¶
Check if changing the system time is allowed
Parameters
const struct timespec64 *tsnew time
const struct timezone *tztimezone
Description
Check permission to change the system time, struct timespec64 is defined in <include/linux/time64.h> and timezone is defined in <include/linux/time.h>.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_vm_enough_memory_mm(struct mm_struct *mm, long pages)¶
Check if allocating a new mem map is allowed
Parameters
struct mm_struct *mmmm struct
long pagesnumber of pages
Description
Check permissions for allocating a new virtual mapping. If all LSMs return a positive value, __vm_enough_memory() will be called with cap_sys_admin set. If at least one LSM returns 0 or negative, __vm_enough_memory() will be called with cap_sys_admin cleared.
Return
- Returns 0 if permission is granted by the LSM infrastructure to the
caller.
-
int security_bprm_creds_for_exec(struct linux_binprm *bprm)¶
Prepare the credentials for exec()
Parameters
struct linux_binprm *bprmbinary program information
Description
If the setup in prepare_exec_creds did not setup bprm->cred->security properly for executing bprm->file, update the LSM’s portion of bprm->cred->security to be what commit_creds needs to install for the new program. This hook may also optionally check permissions (e.g. for transitions between security domains). The hook must set bprm->secureexec to 1 if AT_SECURE should be set to request libc enable secure mode. bprm contains the linux_binprm structure.
Return
Returns 0 if the hook is successful and permission is granted.
-
int security_bprm_creds_from_file(struct linux_binprm *bprm, const struct file *file)¶
Update linux_binprm creds based on file
Parameters
struct linux_binprm *bprmbinary program information
const struct file *fileassociated file
Description
If file is setpcap, suid, sgid or otherwise marked to change privilege upon exec, update bprm->cred to reflect that change. This is called after finding the binary that will be executed without an interpreter. This ensures that the credentials will not be derived from a script that the binary will need to reopen, which when reopend may end up being a completely different file. This hook may also optionally check permissions (e.g. for transitions between security domains). The hook must set bprm->secureexec to 1 if AT_SECURE should be set to request libc enable secure mode. The hook must add to bprm->per_clear any personality flags that should be cleared from current->personality. bprm contains the linux_binprm structure.
Return
Returns 0 if the hook is successful and permission is granted.
-
int security_bprm_check(struct linux_binprm *bprm)¶
Mediate binary handler search
Parameters
struct linux_binprm *bprmbinary program information
Description
This hook mediates the point when a search for a binary handler will begin. It allows a check against the bprm->cred->security value which was set in the preceding creds_for_exec call. The argv list and envp list are reliably available in bprm. This hook may be called multiple times during a single execve. bprm contains the linux_binprm structure.
Return
Returns 0 if the hook is successful and permission is granted.
-
void security_bprm_committing_creds(const struct linux_binprm *bprm)¶
Install creds for a process during exec()
Parameters
const struct linux_binprm *bprmbinary program information
Description
Prepare to install the new security attributes of a process being transformed by an execve operation, based on the old credentials pointed to by current->cred and the information set in bprm->cred by the bprm_creds_for_exec hook. bprm points to the linux_binprm structure. This hook is a good place to perform state changes on the process such as closing open file descriptors to which access will no longer be granted when the attributes are changed. This is called immediately before commit_creds().
-
void security_bprm_committed_creds(const struct linux_binprm *bprm)¶
Tidy up after cred install during exec()
Parameters
const struct linux_binprm *bprmbinary program information
Description
Tidy up after the installation of the new security attributes of a process being transformed by an execve operation. The new credentials have, by this point, been set to current->cred. bprm points to the linux_binprm structure. This hook is a good place to perform state changes on the process such as clearing out non-inheritable signal state. This is called immediately after commit_creds().
-
int security_fs_context_submount(struct fs_context *fc, struct super_block *reference)¶
Initialise fc->security
Parameters
struct fs_context *fcnew filesystem context
struct super_block *referencedentry reference for submount/remount
Description
Fill out the ->security field for a new fs_context.
Return
Returns 0 on success or negative error code on failure.
-
int security_fs_context_dup(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_context *src_fc)¶
Duplicate a fs_context LSM blob
Parameters
struct fs_context *fcdestination filesystem context
struct fs_context *src_fcsource filesystem context
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to sc->security. This pointer is initialised to NULL by the caller. fc indicates the new filesystem context. src_fc indicates the original filesystem context.
Return
Returns 0 on success or a negative error code on failure.
-
int security_fs_context_parse_param(struct fs_context *fc, struct fs_parameter *param)¶
Configure a filesystem context
Parameters
struct fs_context *fcfilesystem context
struct fs_parameter *paramfilesystem parameter
Description
Userspace provided a parameter to configure a superblock. The LSM can consume the parameter or return it to the caller for use elsewhere.
Return
- If the parameter is used by the LSM it should return 0, if it is
returned to the caller -ENOPARAM is returned, otherwise a negative error code is returned.
-
int security_sb_alloc(struct super_block *sb)¶
Allocate a super_block LSM blob
Parameters
struct super_block *sbfilesystem superblock
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to the sb->s_security field. The s_security field is initialized to NULL when the structure is allocated. sb contains the super_block structure to be modified.
Return
Returns 0 if operation was successful.
-
void security_sb_delete(struct super_block *sb)¶
Release super_block LSM associated objects
Parameters
struct super_block *sbfilesystem superblock
Description
Release objects tied to a superblock (e.g. inodes). sb contains the super_block structure being released.
-
void security_sb_free(struct super_block *sb)¶
Free a super_block LSM blob
Parameters
struct super_block *sbfilesystem superblock
Description
Deallocate and clear the sb->s_security field. sb contains the super_block structure to be modified.
-
int security_sb_kern_mount(const struct super_block *sb)¶
Check if a kernel mount is allowed
Parameters
const struct super_block *sbfilesystem superblock
Description
Mount this sb if allowed by permissions.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_sb_show_options(struct seq_file *m, struct super_block *sb)¶
Output the mount options for a superblock
Parameters
struct seq_file *moutput file
struct super_block *sbfilesystem superblock
Description
Show (print on m) mount options for this sb.
Return
Returns 0 on success, negative values on failure.
Parameters
struct dentry *dentrysuperblock handle
Description
Check permission before obtaining filesystem statistics for the mnt mountpoint. dentry is a handle on the superblock for the filesystem.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_sb_mount(const char *dev_name, const struct path *path, const char *type, unsigned long flags, void *data)¶
Check permission for mounting a filesystem
Parameters
const char *dev_namefilesystem backing device
const struct path *pathmount point
const char *typefilesystem type
unsigned long flagsmount flags
void *datafilesystem specific data
Description
Check permission before an object specified by dev_name is mounted on the mount point named by nd. For an ordinary mount, dev_name identifies a device if the file system type requires a device. For a remount (flags & MS_REMOUNT), dev_name is irrelevant. For a loopback/bind mount (flags & MS_BIND), dev_name identifies the pathname of the object being mounted.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_sb_umount(struct vfsmount *mnt, int flags)¶
Check permission for unmounting a filesystem
Parameters
struct vfsmount *mntmounted filesystem
int flagsunmount flags
Description
Check permission before the mnt file system is unmounted.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_sb_pivotroot(const struct path *old_path, const struct path *new_path)¶
Check permissions for pivoting the rootfs
Parameters
const struct path *old_pathnew location for current rootfs
const struct path *new_pathlocation of the new rootfs
Description
Check permission before pivoting the root filesystem.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_move_mount(const struct path *from_path, const struct path *to_path)¶
Check permissions for moving a mount
Parameters
const struct path *from_pathsource mount point
const struct path *to_pathdestination mount point
Description
Check permission before a mount is moved.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_path_notify(const struct path *path, u64 mask, unsigned int obj_type)¶
Check if setting a watch is allowed
Parameters
const struct path *pathfile path
u64 maskevent mask
unsigned int obj_typefile path type
Description
Check permissions before setting a watch on events as defined by mask, on an object at path, whose type is defined by obj_type.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct inode *inodethe inode
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to inode->i_security. The i_security field is initialized to NULL when the inode structure is allocated.
Return
Return 0 if operation was successful.
Parameters
struct inode *inodethe inode
Description
Deallocate the inode security structure and set inode->i_security to NULL.
-
int security_inode_init_security_anon(struct inode *inode, const struct qstr *name, const struct inode *context_inode)¶
Initialize an anonymous inode
Parameters
struct inode *inodethe inode
const struct qstr *namethe anonymous inode class
const struct inode *context_inodean optional related inode
Description
Set up the incore security field for the new anonymous inode and return whether the inode creation is permitted by the security module or not.
Return
Returns 0 on success, -EACCES if the security module denies the creation of this inode, or another -errno upon other errors.
-
void security_path_post_mknod(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry)¶
Update inode security after reg file creation
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentrynew file
Description
Update inode security field after a regular file has been created.
-
int security_path_rmdir(const struct path *dir, struct dentry *dentry)¶
Check if removing a directory is allowed
Parameters
const struct path *dirparent directory
struct dentry *dentrydirectory to remove
Description
Check the permission to remove a directory.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_path_symlink(const struct path *dir, struct dentry *dentry, const char *old_name)¶
Check if creating a symbolic link is allowed
Parameters
const struct path *dirparent directory
struct dentry *dentrysymbolic link
const char *old_namefile pathname
Description
Check the permission to create a symbolic link to a file.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_path_link(struct dentry *old_dentry, const struct path *new_dir, struct dentry *new_dentry)¶
Check if creating a hard link is allowed
Parameters
struct dentry *old_dentryexisting file
const struct path *new_dirnew parent directory
struct dentry *new_dentrynew link
Description
Check permission before creating a new hard link to a file.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
const struct path *pathfile
Description
Check permission before truncating the file indicated by path. Note that
truncation permissions may also be checked based on already opened files,
using the security_file_truncate() hook.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_path_chmod(const struct path *path, umode_t mode)¶
Check if changing the file’s mode is allowed
Parameters
const struct path *pathfile
umode_t modenew mode
Description
Check for permission to change a mode of the file path. The new mode is specified in mode which is a bitmask of constants from <include/uapi/linux/stat.h>.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_path_chown(const struct path *path, kuid_t uid, kgid_t gid)¶
Check if changing the file’s owner/group is allowed
Parameters
const struct path *pathfile
kuid_t uidfile owner
kgid_t gidfile group
Description
Check for permission to change owner/group of a file or directory.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
const struct path *pathdirectory
Description
Check for permission to change root directory.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
void security_inode_post_create_tmpfile(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct inode *inode)¶
Update inode security of new tmpfile
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct inode *inodeinode of the new tmpfile
Description
Update inode security data after a tmpfile has been created.
-
int security_inode_link(struct dentry *old_dentry, struct inode *dir, struct dentry *new_dentry)¶
Check if creating a hard link is allowed
Parameters
struct dentry *old_dentryexisting file
struct inode *dirnew parent directory
struct dentry *new_dentrynew link
Description
Check permission before creating a new hard link to a file.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_unlink(struct inode *dir, struct dentry *dentry)¶
Check if removing a hard link is allowed
Parameters
struct inode *dirparent directory
struct dentry *dentryfile
Description
Check the permission to remove a hard link to a file.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_symlink(struct inode *dir, struct dentry *dentry, const char *old_name)¶
Check if creating a symbolic link is allowed
Parameters
struct inode *dirparent directory
struct dentry *dentrysymbolic link
const char *old_nameexisting filename
Description
Check the permission to create a symbolic link to a file.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_rmdir(struct inode *dir, struct dentry *dentry)¶
Check if removing a directory is allowed
Parameters
struct inode *dirparent directory
struct dentry *dentrydirectory to be removed
Description
Check the permission to remove a directory.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_mknod(struct inode *dir, struct dentry *dentry, umode_t mode, dev_t dev)¶
Check if creating a special file is allowed
Parameters
struct inode *dirparent directory
struct dentry *dentrynew file
umode_t modenew file mode
dev_t devdevice number
Description
Check permissions when creating a special file (or a socket or a fifo file created via the mknod system call). Note that if mknod operation is being done for a regular file, then the create hook will be called and not this hook.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_rename(struct inode *old_dir, struct dentry *old_dentry, struct inode *new_dir, struct dentry *new_dentry, unsigned int flags)¶
Check if renaming a file is allowed
Parameters
struct inode *old_dirparent directory of the old file
struct dentry *old_dentrythe old file
struct inode *new_dirparent directory of the new file
struct dentry *new_dentrythe new file
unsigned int flagsflags
Description
Check for permission to rename a file or directory.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct dentry *dentrylink
Description
Check the permission to read the symbolic link.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_follow_link(struct dentry *dentry, struct inode *inode, bool rcu)¶
Check if following a symbolic link is allowed
Parameters
struct dentry *dentrylink dentry
struct inode *inodelink inode
bool rcutrue if in RCU-walk mode
Description
Check permission to follow a symbolic link when looking up a pathname. If rcu is true, inode is not stable.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_permission(struct inode *inode, int mask)¶
Check if accessing an inode is allowed
Parameters
struct inode *inodeinode
int maskaccess mask
Description
Check permission before accessing an inode. This hook is called by the existing Linux permission function, so a security module can use it to provide additional checking for existing Linux permission checks. Notice that this hook is called when a file is opened (as well as many other operations), whereas the file_security_ops permission hook is called when the actual read/write operations are performed.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
void security_inode_post_setattr(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry, int ia_valid)¶
Update the inode after a setattr operation
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryfile
int ia_validfile attributes set
Description
Update inode security field after successful setting file attributes.
Parameters
const struct path *pathfile
Description
Check permission before obtaining file attributes.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_setxattr(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry, const char *name, const void *value, size_t size, int flags)¶
Check if setting file xattrs is allowed
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *namexattr name
const void *valuexattr value
size_t sizesize of xattr value
int flagsflags
Description
Check permission before setting the extended attributes.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_set_acl(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry, const char *acl_name, struct posix_acl *kacl)¶
Check if setting posix acls is allowed
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *acl_nameacl name
struct posix_acl *kaclacl struct
Description
Check permission before setting posix acls, the posix acls in kacl are identified by acl_name.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
void security_inode_post_set_acl(struct dentry *dentry, const char *acl_name, struct posix_acl *kacl)¶
Update inode security from posix acls set
Parameters
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *acl_nameacl name
struct posix_acl *kaclacl struct
Description
Update inode security data after successfully setting posix acls on dentry. The posix acls in kacl are identified by acl_name.
-
int security_inode_get_acl(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry, const char *acl_name)¶
Check if reading posix acls is allowed
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *acl_nameacl name
Description
Check permission before getting osix acls, the posix acls are identified by acl_name.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_remove_acl(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry, const char *acl_name)¶
Check if removing a posix acl is allowed
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *acl_nameacl name
Description
Check permission before removing posix acls, the posix acls are identified by acl_name.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
void security_inode_post_remove_acl(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry, const char *acl_name)¶
Update inode security after rm posix acls
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *acl_nameacl name
Description
Update inode security data after successfully removing posix acls on dentry in idmap. The posix acls are identified by acl_name.
-
void security_inode_post_setxattr(struct dentry *dentry, const char *name, const void *value, size_t size, int flags)¶
Update the inode after a setxattr operation
Parameters
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *namexattr name
const void *valuexattr value
size_t sizexattr value size
int flagsflags
Description
Update inode security field after successful setxattr operation.
-
int security_inode_getxattr(struct dentry *dentry, const char *name)¶
Check if xattr access is allowed
Parameters
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *namexattr name
Description
Check permission before obtaining the extended attributes identified by name for dentry.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct dentry *dentryfile
Description
Check permission before obtaining the list of extended attribute names for dentry.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_inode_removexattr(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry, const char *name)¶
Check if removing an xattr is allowed
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *namexattr name
Description
Check permission before removing the extended attribute identified by name for dentry.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
void security_inode_post_removexattr(struct dentry *dentry, const char *name)¶
Update the inode after a removexattr op
Parameters
struct dentry *dentryfile
const char *namexattr name
Description
Update the inode after a successful removexattr operation.
-
int security_inode_need_killpriv(struct dentry *dentry)¶
Check if
security_inode_killpriv()required
Parameters
struct dentry *dentryassociated dentry
Description
Called when an inode has been changed to determine if
security_inode_killpriv() should be called.
Return
- Return <0 on error to abort the inode change operation, return 0 if
security_inode_killpriv()does not need to be called, return >0 ifsecurity_inode_killpriv()does need to be called.
-
int security_inode_killpriv(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct dentry *dentry)¶
The setuid bit is removed, update LSM state
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct dentry *dentryassociated dentry
Description
The dentry’s setuid bit is being removed. Remove similar security labels. Called with the dentry->d_inode->i_mutex held.
Return
- Return 0 on success. If error is returned, then the operation
causing setuid bit removal is failed.
-
int security_inode_getsecurity(struct mnt_idmap *idmap, struct inode *inode, const char *name, void **buffer, bool alloc)¶
Get the xattr security label of an inode
Parameters
struct mnt_idmap *idmapidmap of the mount
struct inode *inodeinode
const char *namexattr name
void **buffersecurity label buffer
bool allocallocation flag
Description
Retrieve a copy of the extended attribute representation of the security label associated with name for inode via buffer. Note that name is the remainder of the attribute name after the security prefix has been removed. alloc is used to specify if the call should return a value via the buffer or just the value length.
Return
Returns size of buffer on success.
-
int security_inode_setsecurity(struct inode *inode, const char *name, const void *value, size_t size, int flags)¶
Set the xattr security label of an inode
Parameters
struct inode *inodeinode
const char *namexattr name
const void *valuesecurity label
size_t sizelength of security label
int flagsflags
Description
Set the security label associated with name for inode from the extended attribute value value. size indicates the size of the value in bytes. flags may be XATTR_CREATE, XATTR_REPLACE, or 0. Note that name is the remainder of the attribute name after the security. prefix has been removed.
Return
Returns 0 on success.
Parameters
struct inode *inodeinode
u32 *secidsecid to return
Description
Get the secid associated with the node. In case of failure, secid will be set to zero.
-
int security_kernfs_init_security(struct kernfs_node *kn_dir, struct kernfs_node *kn)¶
Init LSM context for a kernfs node
Parameters
struct kernfs_node *kn_dirparent kernfs node
struct kernfs_node *knthe kernfs node to initialize
Description
Initialize the security context of a newly created kernfs node based on its own and its parent’s attributes.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *filefile
int maskrequested permissions
Description
Check file permissions before accessing an open file. This hook is called by various operations that read or write files. A security module can use this hook to perform additional checking on these operations, e.g. to revalidate permissions on use to support privilege bracketing or policy changes. Notice that this hook is used when the actual read/write operations are performed, whereas the inode_security_ops hook is called when a file is opened (as well as many other operations). Although this hook can be used to revalidate permissions for various system call operations that read or write files, it does not address the revalidation of permissions for memory-mapped files. Security modules must handle this separately if they need such revalidation.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *filethe file
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to the file->f_security field. The security field is initialized to NULL when the structure is first created.
Return
Return 0 if the hook is successful and permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *filethe file
Description
Perform actions before releasing the last reference to a file.
Parameters
struct file *filethe file
Description
Deallocate and free any security structures stored in file->f_security.
-
int security_mmap_file(struct file *file, unsigned long prot, unsigned long flags)¶
Check if mmap’ing a file is allowed
Parameters
struct file *filefile
unsigned long protprotection applied by the kernel
unsigned long flagsflags
Description
Check permissions for a mmap operation. The file may be NULL, e.g. if mapping anonymous memory.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_mmap_addr(unsigned long addr)¶
Check if mmap’ing an address is allowed
Parameters
unsigned long addraddress
Description
Check permissions for a mmap operation at addr.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_file_mprotect(struct vm_area_struct *vma, unsigned long reqprot, unsigned long prot)¶
Check if changing memory protections is allowed
Parameters
struct vm_area_struct *vmamemory region
unsigned long reqprotapplication requested protection
unsigned long protprotection applied by the kernel
Description
Check permissions before changing memory access permissions.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *filefile
unsigned int cmdlock operation (e.g. F_RDLCK, F_WRLCK)
Description
Check permission before performing file locking operations. Note the hook mediates both flock and fcntl style locks.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_file_fcntl(struct file *file, unsigned int cmd, unsigned long arg)¶
Check if fcntl() op is allowed
Parameters
struct file *filefile
unsigned int cmdfcntl command
unsigned long argcommand argument
Description
Check permission before allowing the file operation specified by cmd from being performed on the file file. Note that arg sometimes represents a user space pointer; in other cases, it may be a simple integer value. When arg represents a user space pointer, it should never be used by the security module.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *filethe file
Description
Save owner security information (typically from current->security) in file->f_security for later use by the send_sigiotask hook.
Return
Returns 0 on success.
-
int security_file_send_sigiotask(struct task_struct *tsk, struct fown_struct *fown, int sig)¶
Check if sending SIGIO/SIGURG is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *tsktarget task
struct fown_struct *fownsignal sender
int sigsignal to be sent, SIGIO is sent if 0
Description
Check permission for the file owner fown to send SIGIO or SIGURG to the process tsk. Note that this hook is sometimes called from interrupt. Note that the fown_struct, fown, is never outside the context of a struct file, so the file structure (and associated security information) can always be obtained: container_of(fown, struct file, f_owner).
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *filefile being received
Description
This hook allows security modules to control the ability of a process to receive an open file descriptor via socket IPC.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *file
Description
Save open-time permission checking state for later use upon file_permission, and recheck access if anything has changed since inode_permission.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct file *filefile
Description
Check permission before truncating a file, i.e. using ftruncate. Note that truncation permission may also be checked based on the path, using the path_truncate hook.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_alloc(struct task_struct *task, unsigned long clone_flags)¶
Allocate a task’s LSM blob
Parameters
struct task_struct *taskthe task
unsigned long clone_flagsflags indicating what is being shared
Description
Handle allocation of task-related resources.
Return
Returns a zero on success, negative values on failure.
-
void security_task_free(struct task_struct *task)¶
Free a task’s LSM blob and related resources
Parameters
struct task_struct *tasktask
Description
Handle release of task-related resources. Note that this can be called from interrupt context.
-
int security_cred_alloc_blank(struct cred *cred, gfp_t gfp)¶
Allocate the min memory to allow cred_transfer
Parameters
struct cred *credcredentials
gfp_t gfpgfp flags
Description
Only allocate sufficient memory and attach to cred such that cred_transfer() will not get ENOMEM.
Return
Returns 0 on success, negative values on failure.
Parameters
struct cred *credcredentials
Description
Deallocate and clear the cred->security field in a set of credentials.
-
int security_prepare_creds(struct cred *new, const struct cred *old, gfp_t gfp)¶
Prepare a new set of credentials
Parameters
struct cred *newnew credentials
const struct cred *oldoriginal credentials
gfp_t gfpgfp flags
Description
Prepare a new set of credentials by copying the data from the old set.
Return
Returns 0 on success, negative values on failure.
-
void security_transfer_creds(struct cred *new, const struct cred *old)¶
Transfer creds
Parameters
struct cred *newtarget credentials
const struct cred *oldoriginal credentials
Description
Transfer data from original creds to new creds.
-
int security_kernel_act_as(struct cred *new, u32 secid)¶
Set the kernel credentials to act as secid
Parameters
struct cred *newcredentials
u32 secidsecid
Description
Set the credentials for a kernel service to act as (subjective context). The current task must be the one that nominated secid.
Return
Returns 0 if successful.
-
int security_kernel_create_files_as(struct cred *new, struct inode *inode)¶
Set file creation context using an inode
Parameters
struct cred *newtarget credentials
struct inode *inodereference inode
Description
Set the file creation context in a set of credentials to be the same as the objective context of the specified inode. The current task must be the one that nominated inode.
Return
Returns 0 if successful.
-
int security_kernel_module_request(char *kmod_name)¶
Check if loading a module is allowed
Parameters
char *kmod_namemodule name
Description
Ability to trigger the kernel to automatically upcall to userspace for userspace to load a kernel module with the given name.
Return
Returns 0 if successful.
-
int security_task_fix_setuid(struct cred *new, const struct cred *old, int flags)¶
Update LSM with new user id attributes
Parameters
struct cred *newupdated credentials
const struct cred *oldcredentials being replaced
int flagsLSM_SETID_* flag values
Description
Update the module’s state after setting one or more of the user identity attributes of the current process. The flags parameter indicates which of the set*uid system calls invoked this hook. If new is the set of credentials that will be installed. Modifications should be made to this rather than to current->cred.
Return
Returns 0 on success.
-
int security_task_fix_setgid(struct cred *new, const struct cred *old, int flags)¶
Update LSM with new group id attributes
Parameters
struct cred *newupdated credentials
const struct cred *oldcredentials being replaced
int flagsLSM_SETID_* flag value
Description
Update the module’s state after setting one or more of the group identity attributes of the current process. The flags parameter indicates which of the set*gid system calls invoked this hook. new is the set of credentials that will be installed. Modifications should be made to this rather than to current->cred.
Return
Returns 0 on success.
-
int security_task_fix_setgroups(struct cred *new, const struct cred *old)¶
Update LSM with new supplementary groups
Parameters
struct cred *newupdated credentials
const struct cred *oldcredentials being replaced
Description
Update the module’s state after setting the supplementary group identity attributes of the current process. new is the set of credentials that will be installed. Modifications should be made to this rather than to current->cred.
Return
Returns 0 on success.
-
int security_task_setpgid(struct task_struct *p, pid_t pgid)¶
Check if setting the pgid is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptask being modified
pid_t pgidnew pgid
Description
Check permission before setting the process group identifier of the process p to pgid.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_getpgid(struct task_struct *p)¶
Check if getting the pgid is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptask
Description
Check permission before getting the process group identifier of the process p.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_getsid(struct task_struct *p)¶
Check if getting the session id is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptask
Description
Check permission before getting the session identifier of the process p.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_setnice(struct task_struct *p, int nice)¶
Check if setting a task’s nice value is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptarget task
int nicenice value
Description
Check permission before setting the nice value of p to nice.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_setioprio(struct task_struct *p, int ioprio)¶
Check if setting a task’s ioprio is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptarget task
int ioprioioprio value
Description
Check permission before setting the ioprio value of p to ioprio.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_getioprio(struct task_struct *p)¶
Check if getting a task’s ioprio is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptask
Description
Check permission before getting the ioprio value of p.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_prlimit(const struct cred *cred, const struct cred *tcred, unsigned int flags)¶
Check if get/setting resources limits is allowed
Parameters
const struct cred *credcurrent task credentials
const struct cred *tcredtarget task credentials
unsigned int flagsLSM_PRLIMIT_* flag bits indicating a get/set/both
Description
Check permission before getting and/or setting the resource limits of another task.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_setrlimit(struct task_struct *p, unsigned int resource, struct rlimit *new_rlim)¶
Check if setting a new rlimit value is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptarget task’s group leader
unsigned int resourceresource whose limit is being set
struct rlimit *new_rlimnew resource limit
Description
Check permission before setting the resource limits of process p for resource to new_rlim. The old resource limit values can be examined by dereferencing (p->signal->rlim + resource).
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_setscheduler(struct task_struct *p)¶
Check if setting sched policy/param is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptarget task
Description
Check permission before setting scheduling policy and/or parameters of process p.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_getscheduler(struct task_struct *p)¶
Check if getting scheduling info is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptarget task
Description
Check permission before obtaining scheduling information for process p.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_movememory(struct task_struct *p)¶
Check if moving memory is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptask
Description
Check permission before moving memory owned by process p.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_kill(struct task_struct *p, struct kernel_siginfo *info, int sig, const struct cred *cred)¶
Check if sending a signal is allowed
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptarget process
struct kernel_siginfo *infosignal information
int sigsignal value
const struct cred *credcredentials of the signal sender, NULL if current
Description
Check permission before sending signal sig to p. info can be NULL, the constant 1, or a pointer to a kernel_siginfo structure. If info is 1 or SI_FROMKERNEL(info) is true, then the signal should be viewed as coming from the kernel and should typically be permitted. SIGIO signals are handled separately by the send_sigiotask hook in file_security_ops.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_task_prctl(int option, unsigned long arg2, unsigned long arg3, unsigned long arg4, unsigned long arg5)¶
Check if a prctl op is allowed
Parameters
int optionoperation
unsigned long arg2argument
unsigned long arg3argument
unsigned long arg4argument
unsigned long arg5argument
Description
Check permission before performing a process control operation on the current process.
Return
- Return -ENOSYS if no-one wanted to handle this op, any other value
to cause prctl() to return immediately with that value.
-
void security_task_to_inode(struct task_struct *p, struct inode *inode)¶
Set the security attributes of a task’s inode
Parameters
struct task_struct *ptask
struct inode *inodeinode
Description
Set the security attributes for an inode based on an associated task’s security attributes, e.g. for /proc/pid inodes.
Parameters
const struct cred *credprepared creds
Description
Check permission prior to creating a new user namespace.
Return
Returns 0 if successful, otherwise < 0 error code.
-
int security_ipc_permission(struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp, short flag)¶
Check if sysv ipc access is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc permission structure
short flagrequested permissions
Description
Check permissions for access to IPC.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
void security_ipc_getsecid(struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp, u32 *secid)¶
Get the sysv ipc object’s secid
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc permission structure
u32 *secidsecid pointer
Description
Get the secid associated with the ipc object. In case of failure, secid will be set to zero.
-
int security_msg_msg_alloc(struct msg_msg *msg)¶
Allocate a sysv ipc message LSM blob
Parameters
struct msg_msg *msgmessage structure
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to the msg->security field. The security field is initialized to NULL when the structure is first created.
Return
Return 0 if operation was successful and permission is granted.
-
void security_msg_msg_free(struct msg_msg *msg)¶
Free a sysv ipc message LSM blob
Parameters
struct msg_msg *msgmessage structure
Description
Deallocate the security structure for this message.
-
int security_msg_queue_alloc(struct kern_ipc_perm *msq)¶
Allocate a sysv ipc msg queue LSM blob
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *msqsysv ipc permission structure
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to msg. The security field is initialized to NULL when the structure is first created.
Return
Returns 0 if operation was successful and permission is granted.
-
void security_msg_queue_free(struct kern_ipc_perm *msq)¶
Free a sysv ipc msg queue LSM blob
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *msqsysv ipc permission structure
Description
Deallocate security field perm->security for the message queue.
-
int security_msg_queue_associate(struct kern_ipc_perm *msq, int msqflg)¶
Check if a msg queue operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *msqsysv ipc permission structure
int msqflgoperation flags
Description
Check permission when a message queue is requested through the msgget system call. This hook is only called when returning the message queue identifier for an existing message queue, not when a new message queue is created.
Return
Return 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_msg_queue_msgctl(struct kern_ipc_perm *msq, int cmd)¶
Check if a msg queue operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *msqsysv ipc permission structure
int cmdoperation
Description
Check permission when a message control operation specified by cmd is to be performed on the message queue with permissions.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_msg_queue_msgsnd(struct kern_ipc_perm *msq, struct msg_msg *msg, int msqflg)¶
Check if sending a sysv ipc message is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *msqsysv ipc permission structure
struct msg_msg *msgmessage
int msqflgoperation flags
Description
Check permission before a message, msg, is enqueued on the message queue with permissions specified in msq.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_msg_queue_msgrcv(struct kern_ipc_perm *msq, struct msg_msg *msg, struct task_struct *target, long type, int mode)¶
Check if receiving a sysv ipc msg is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *msqsysv ipc permission structure
struct msg_msg *msgmessage
struct task_struct *targettarget task
long typetype of message requested
int modeoperation flags
Description
Check permission before a message, msg, is removed from the message queue. The target task structure contains a pointer to the process that will be receiving the message (not equal to the current process when inline receives are being performed).
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_shm_alloc(struct kern_ipc_perm *shp)¶
Allocate a sysv shm LSM blob
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *shpsysv ipc permission structure
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to the shp security field. The security field is initialized to NULL when the structure is first created.
Return
Returns 0 if operation was successful and permission is granted.
-
void security_shm_free(struct kern_ipc_perm *shp)¶
Free a sysv shm LSM blob
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *shpsysv ipc permission structure
Description
Deallocate the security structure perm->security for the memory segment.
-
int security_shm_associate(struct kern_ipc_perm *shp, int shmflg)¶
Check if a sysv shm operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *shpsysv ipc permission structure
int shmflgoperation flags
Description
Check permission when a shared memory region is requested through the shmget system call. This hook is only called when returning the shared memory region identifier for an existing region, not when a new shared memory region is created.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_shm_shmctl(struct kern_ipc_perm *shp, int cmd)¶
Check if a sysv shm operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *shpsysv ipc permission structure
int cmdoperation
Description
Check permission when a shared memory control operation specified by cmd is to be performed on the shared memory region with permissions in shp.
Return
Return 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_shm_shmat(struct kern_ipc_perm *shp, char __user *shmaddr, int shmflg)¶
Check if a sysv shm attach operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *shpsysv ipc permission structure
char __user *shmaddraddress of memory region to attach
int shmflgoperation flags
Description
Check permissions prior to allowing the shmat system call to attach the shared memory segment with permissions shp to the data segment of the calling process. The attaching address is specified by shmaddr.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_sem_alloc(struct kern_ipc_perm *sma)¶
Allocate a sysv semaphore LSM blob
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *smasysv ipc permission structure
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to the sma security field. The security field is initialized to NULL when the structure is first created.
Return
Returns 0 if operation was successful and permission is granted.
-
void security_sem_free(struct kern_ipc_perm *sma)¶
Free a sysv semaphore LSM blob
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *smasysv ipc permission structure
Description
Deallocate security structure sma->security for the semaphore.
-
int security_sem_associate(struct kern_ipc_perm *sma, int semflg)¶
Check if a sysv semaphore operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *smasysv ipc permission structure
int semflgoperation flags
Description
Check permission when a semaphore is requested through the semget system call. This hook is only called when returning the semaphore identifier for an existing semaphore, not when a new one must be created.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_sem_semctl(struct kern_ipc_perm *sma, int cmd)¶
Check if a sysv semaphore operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *smasysv ipc permission structure
int cmdoperation
Description
Check permission when a semaphore operation specified by cmd is to be performed on the semaphore.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_sem_semop(struct kern_ipc_perm *sma, struct sembuf *sops, unsigned nsops, int alter)¶
Check if a sysv semaphore operation is allowed
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *smasysv ipc permission structure
struct sembuf *sopsoperations to perform
unsigned nsopsnumber of operations
int alterflag indicating changes will be made
Description
Check permissions before performing operations on members of the semaphore set. If the alter flag is nonzero, the semaphore set may be modified.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_getselfattr(unsigned int attr, struct lsm_ctx __user *uctx, u32 __user *size, u32 flags)¶
Read an LSM attribute of the current process.
Parameters
unsigned int attrwhich attribute to return
struct lsm_ctx __user *uctxthe user-space destination for the information, or NULL
u32 __user *sizepointer to the size of space available to receive the data
u32 flagsspecial handling options. LSM_FLAG_SINGLE indicates that only attributes associated with the LSM identified in the passed ctx be reported.
Description
A NULL value for uctx can be used to get both the number of attributes and the size of the data.
Returns the number of attributes found on success, negative value on error. size is reset to the total size of the data. If size is insufficient to contain the data -E2BIG is returned.
-
int security_setselfattr(unsigned int attr, struct lsm_ctx __user *uctx, u32 size, u32 flags)¶
Set an LSM attribute on the current process.
Parameters
unsigned int attrwhich attribute to set
struct lsm_ctx __user *uctxthe user-space source for the information
u32 sizethe size of the data
u32 flagsreserved for future use, must be 0
Description
Set an LSM attribute for the current process. The LSM, attribute and new value are included in uctx.
Returns 0 on success, -EINVAL if the input is inconsistent, -EFAULT if the user buffer is inaccessible, E2BIG if size is too big, or an LSM specific failure.
-
int security_getprocattr(struct task_struct *p, int lsmid, const char *name, char **value)¶
Read an attribute for a task
Parameters
struct task_struct *pthe task
int lsmidLSM identification
const char *nameattribute name
char **valueattribute value
Description
Read attribute name for task p and store it into value if allowed.
Return
Returns the length of value on success, a negative value otherwise.
-
int security_setprocattr(int lsmid, const char *name, void *value, size_t size)¶
Set an attribute for a task
Parameters
int lsmidLSM identification
const char *nameattribute name
void *valueattribute value
size_t sizeattribute value size
Description
Write (set) the current task’s attribute name to value, size size if allowed.
Return
Returns bytes written on success, a negative value otherwise.
-
int security_netlink_send(struct sock *sk, struct sk_buff *skb)¶
Save info and check if netlink sending is allowed
Parameters
struct sock *sksending socket
struct sk_buff *skbnetlink message
Description
Save security information for a netlink message so that permission checking can be performed when the message is processed. The security information can be saved using the eff_cap field of the netlink_skb_parms structure. Also may be used to provide fine grained control over message transmission.
Return
- Returns 0 if the information was successfully saved and message is
allowed to be transmitted.
-
int security_post_notification(const struct cred *w_cred, const struct cred *cred, struct watch_notification *n)¶
Check if a watch notification can be posted
Parameters
const struct cred *w_credcredentials of the task that set the watch
const struct cred *credcredentials of the task which triggered the watch
struct watch_notification *nthe notification
Description
Check to see if a watch notification can be posted to a particular queue.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct key *keythe key to watch
Description
Check to see if a process is allowed to watch for event notifications from a key or keyring.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_create(int family, int type, int protocol, int kern)¶
Check if creating a new socket is allowed
Parameters
int familyprotocol family
int typecommunications type
int protocolrequested protocol
int kernset to 1 if a kernel socket is requested
Description
Check permissions prior to creating a new socket.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_post_create(struct socket *sock, int family, int type, int protocol, int kern)¶
Initialize a newly created socket
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
int familyprotocol family
int typecommunications type
int protocolrequested protocol
int kernset to 1 if a kernel socket is requested
Description
This hook allows a module to update or allocate a per-socket security structure. Note that the security field was not added directly to the socket structure, but rather, the socket security information is stored in the associated inode. Typically, the inode alloc_security hook will allocate and attach security information to SOCK_INODE(sock)->i_security. This hook may be used to update the SOCK_INODE(sock)->i_security field with additional information that wasn’t available when the inode was allocated.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_bind(struct socket *sock, struct sockaddr *address, int addrlen)¶
Check if a socket bind operation is allowed
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
struct sockaddr *addressrequested bind address
int addrlenlength of address
Description
Check permission before socket protocol layer bind operation is performed and the socket sock is bound to the address specified in the address parameter.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_connect(struct socket *sock, struct sockaddr *address, int addrlen)¶
Check if a socket connect operation is allowed
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
struct sockaddr *addressaddress of remote connection point
int addrlenlength of address
Description
Check permission before socket protocol layer connect operation attempts to connect socket sock to a remote address, address.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_listen(struct socket *sock, int backlog)¶
Check if a socket is allowed to listen
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
int backlogconnection queue size
Description
Check permission before socket protocol layer listen operation.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_accept(struct socket *sock, struct socket *newsock)¶
Check if a socket is allowed to accept connections
Parameters
struct socket *socklistening socket
struct socket *newsocknewly creation connection socket
Description
Check permission before accepting a new connection. Note that the new socket, newsock, has been created and some information copied to it, but the accept operation has not actually been performed.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_sendmsg(struct socket *sock, struct msghdr *msg, int size)¶
Check if sending a message is allowed
Parameters
struct socket *socksending socket
struct msghdr *msgmessage to send
int sizesize of message
Description
Check permission before transmitting a message to another socket.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_recvmsg(struct socket *sock, struct msghdr *msg, int size, int flags)¶
Check if receiving a message is allowed
Parameters
struct socket *sockreceiving socket
struct msghdr *msgmessage to receive
int sizesize of message
int flagsoperational flags
Description
Check permission before receiving a message from a socket.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
Description
Check permission before reading the local address (name) of the socket object.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
Description
Check permission before the remote address (name) of a socket object.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_getsockopt(struct socket *sock, int level, int optname)¶
Check if reading a socket option is allowed
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
int leveloption’s protocol level
int optnameoption name
Description
Check permissions before retrieving the options associated with socket sock.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_setsockopt(struct socket *sock, int level, int optname)¶
Check if setting a socket option is allowed
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
int leveloption’s protocol level
int optnameoption name
Description
Check permissions before setting the options associated with socket sock.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_shutdown(struct socket *sock, int how)¶
Checks if shutting down the socket is allowed
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
int howflag indicating how sends and receives are handled
Description
Checks permission before all or part of a connection on the socket sock is shut down.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_socket_getpeersec_stream(struct socket *sock, sockptr_t optval, sockptr_t optlen, unsigned int len)¶
Get the remote peer label
Parameters
struct socket *socksocket
sockptr_t optvaldestination buffer
sockptr_t optlensize of peer label copied into the buffer
unsigned int lenmaximum size of the destination buffer
Description
This hook allows the security module to provide peer socket security state for unix or connected tcp sockets to userspace via getsockopt SO_GETPEERSEC. For tcp sockets this can be meaningful if the socket is associated with an ipsec SA.
Return
- Returns 0 if all is well, otherwise, typical getsockopt return
values.
-
int security_sk_alloc(struct sock *sk, int family, gfp_t priority)¶
Allocate and initialize a sock’s LSM blob
Parameters
struct sock *sksock
int familyprotocol family
gfp_t prioritygfp flags
Description
Allocate and attach a security structure to the sk->sk_security field, which is used to copy security attributes between local stream sockets.
Return
Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
Parameters
struct sock *sksock
Description
Deallocate security structure.
-
void security_inet_csk_clone(struct sock *newsk, const struct request_sock *req)¶
Set new sock LSM state based on request_sock
Parameters
struct sock *newsknew sock
const struct request_sock *reqconnection request_sock
Description
Set that LSM state of sock using the LSM state from req.
-
int security_mptcp_add_subflow(struct sock *sk, struct sock *ssk)¶
Inherit the LSM label from the MPTCP socket
Parameters
struct sock *skthe owning MPTCP socket
struct sock *sskthe new subflow
Description
Update the labeling for the given MPTCP subflow, to match the one of the
owning MPTCP socket. This hook has to be called after the socket creation and
initialization via the security_socket_create() and
security_socket_post_create() LSM hooks.
Return
Returns 0 on success or a negative error code on failure.
-
int security_xfrm_policy_clone(struct xfrm_sec_ctx *old_ctx, struct xfrm_sec_ctx **new_ctxp)¶
Clone xfrm policy LSM state
Parameters
struct xfrm_sec_ctx *old_ctxxfrm security context
struct xfrm_sec_ctx **new_ctxptarget xfrm security context
Description
Allocate a security structure in new_ctxp that contains the information from the old_ctx structure.
Return
Return 0 if operation was successful.
-
int security_xfrm_policy_delete(struct xfrm_sec_ctx *ctx)¶
Check if deleting a xfrm policy is allowed
Parameters
struct xfrm_sec_ctx *ctxxfrm security context
Description
Authorize deletion of a SPD entry.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_xfrm_state_alloc_acquire(struct xfrm_state *x, struct xfrm_sec_ctx *polsec, u32 secid)¶
Allocate a xfrm state LSM blob
Parameters
struct xfrm_state *xxfrm state being added to the SAD
struct xfrm_sec_ctx *polsecassociated policy’s security context
u32 secidsecid from the flow
Description
Allocate a security structure to the x->security field; the security field is initialized to NULL when the xfrm_state is allocated. Set the context to correspond to secid.
Return
Returns 0 if operation was successful.
-
void security_xfrm_state_free(struct xfrm_state *x)¶
Free a xfrm state
Parameters
struct xfrm_state *xxfrm state
Description
Deallocate x->security.
-
int security_xfrm_policy_lookup(struct xfrm_sec_ctx *ctx, u32 fl_secid)¶
Check if using a xfrm policy is allowed
Parameters
struct xfrm_sec_ctx *ctxtarget xfrm security context
u32 fl_secidflow secid used to authorize access
Description
Check permission when a flow selects a xfrm_policy for processing XFRMs on a packet. The hook is called when selecting either a per-socket policy or a generic xfrm policy.
Return
- Return 0 if permission is granted, -ESRCH otherwise, or -errno on
other errors.
-
int security_xfrm_state_pol_flow_match(struct xfrm_state *x, struct xfrm_policy *xp, const struct flowi_common *flic)¶
Check for a xfrm match
Parameters
struct xfrm_state *xxfrm state to match
struct xfrm_policy *xpxfrm policy to check for a match
const struct flowi_common *flicflow to check for a match.
Description
Check xp and flic for a match with x.
Return
Returns 1 if there is a match.
-
int security_xfrm_decode_session(struct sk_buff *skb, u32 *secid)¶
Determine the xfrm secid for a packet
Parameters
struct sk_buff *skbxfrm packet
u32 *secidsecid
Description
Decode the packet in skb and return the security label in secid.
Return
Return 0 if all xfrms used have the same secid.
-
int security_key_alloc(struct key *key, const struct cred *cred, unsigned long flags)¶
Allocate and initialize a kernel key LSM blob
Parameters
struct key *keykey
const struct cred *credcredentials
unsigned long flagsallocation flags
Description
Permit allocation of a key and assign security data. Note that key does not have a serial number assigned at this point.
Return
Return 0 if permission is granted, -ve error otherwise.
Parameters
struct key *keykey
Description
Notification of destruction; free security data.
-
int security_key_permission(key_ref_t key_ref, const struct cred *cred, enum key_need_perm need_perm)¶
Check if a kernel key operation is allowed
Parameters
key_ref_t key_refkey reference
const struct cred *credcredentials of actor requesting access
enum key_need_perm need_permrequested permissions
Description
See whether a specific operational right is granted to a process on a key.
Return
Return 0 if permission is granted, -ve error otherwise.
Parameters
struct key *keykey
char **buffersecurity label buffer
Description
Get a textual representation of the security context attached to a key for the purposes of honouring KEYCTL_GETSECURITY. This function allocates the storage for the NUL-terminated string and the caller should free it.
Return
- Returns the length of buffer (including terminating NUL) or -ve if
an error occurs. May also return 0 (and a NULL buffer pointer) if there is no security label assigned to the key.
-
void security_key_post_create_or_update(struct key *keyring, struct key *key, const void *payload, size_t payload_len, unsigned long flags, bool create)¶
Notification of key create or update
Parameters
struct key *keyringkeyring to which the key is linked to
struct key *keycreated or updated key
const void *payloaddata used to instantiate or update the key
size_t payload_lenlength of payload
unsigned long flagskey flags
bool createflag indicating whether the key was created or updated
Description
Notify the caller of a key creation or update.
-
int security_audit_rule_init(u32 field, u32 op, char *rulestr, void **lsmrule)¶
Allocate and init an LSM audit rule struct
Parameters
u32 fieldaudit action
u32 oprule operator
char *rulestrrule context
void **lsmrulereceive buffer for audit rule struct
Description
Allocate and initialize an LSM audit rule structure.
Return
- Return 0 if lsmrule has been successfully set, -EINVAL in case of
an invalid rule.
-
int security_audit_rule_known(struct audit_krule *krule)¶
Check if an audit rule contains LSM fields
Parameters
struct audit_krule *kruleaudit rule
Description
Specifies whether given krule contains any fields related to the current LSM.
Return
Returns 1 in case of relation found, 0 otherwise.
-
void security_audit_rule_free(void *lsmrule)¶
Free an LSM audit rule struct
Parameters
void *lsmruleaudit rule struct
Description
Deallocate the LSM audit rule structure previously allocated by audit_rule_init().
-
int security_audit_rule_match(u32 secid, u32 field, u32 op, void *lsmrule)¶
Check if a label matches an audit rule
Parameters
u32 secidsecurity label
u32 fieldLSM audit field
u32 opmatching operator
void *lsmruleaudit rule
Description
Determine if given secid matches a rule previously approved by
security_audit_rule_known().
Return
- Returns 1 if secid matches the rule, 0 if it does not, -ERRNO on
failure.
-
int security_bpf(int cmd, union bpf_attr *attr, unsigned int size)¶
Check if the bpf syscall operation is allowed
Parameters
int cmdcommand
union bpf_attr *attrbpf attribute
unsigned int sizesize
Description
Do a initial check for all bpf syscalls after the attribute is copied into the kernel. The actual security module can implement their own rules to check the specific cmd they need.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_bpf_map(struct bpf_map *map, fmode_t fmode)¶
Check if access to a bpf map is allowed
Parameters
struct bpf_map *mapbpf map
fmode_t fmodemode
Description
Do a check when the kernel generates and returns a file descriptor for eBPF maps.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_bpf_prog(struct bpf_prog *prog)¶
Check if access to a bpf program is allowed
Parameters
struct bpf_prog *progbpf program
Description
Do a check when the kernel generates and returns a file descriptor for eBPF programs.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_bpf_map_create(struct bpf_map *map, union bpf_attr *attr, struct bpf_token *token)¶
Check if BPF map creation is allowed
Parameters
struct bpf_map *mapBPF map object
union bpf_attr *attrBPF syscall attributes used to create BPF map
struct bpf_token *tokenBPF token used to grant user access
Description
Do a check when the kernel creates a new BPF map. This is also the point where LSM blob is allocated for LSMs that need them.
Return
Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
-
int security_bpf_prog_load(struct bpf_prog *prog, union bpf_attr *attr, struct bpf_token *token)¶
Check if loading of BPF program is allowed
Parameters
struct bpf_prog *progBPF program object
union bpf_attr *attrBPF syscall attributes used to create BPF program
struct bpf_token *tokenBPF token used to grant user access to BPF subsystem
Description
Perform an access control check when the kernel loads a BPF program and allocates associated BPF program object. This hook is also responsible for allocating any required LSM state for the BPF program.
Return
Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
-
int security_bpf_token_create(struct bpf_token *token, union bpf_attr *attr, struct path *path)¶
Check if creating of BPF token is allowed
Parameters
struct bpf_token *tokenBPF token object
union bpf_attr *attrBPF syscall attributes used to create BPF token
struct path *pathpath pointing to BPF FS mount point from which BPF token is created
Description
Do a check when the kernel instantiates a new BPF token object from BPF FS instance. This is also the point where LSM blob can be allocated for LSMs.
Return
Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
-
int security_bpf_token_cmd(const struct bpf_token *token, enum bpf_cmd cmd)¶
Check if BPF token is allowed to delegate requested BPF syscall command
Parameters
const struct bpf_token *tokenBPF token object
enum bpf_cmd cmdBPF syscall command requested to be delegated by BPF token
Description
Do a check when the kernel decides whether provided BPF token should allow delegation of requested BPF syscall command.
Return
Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
-
int security_bpf_token_capable(const struct bpf_token *token, int cap)¶
Check if BPF token is allowed to delegate requested BPF-related capability
Parameters
const struct bpf_token *tokenBPF token object
int capcapabilities requested to be delegated by BPF token
Description
Do a check when the kernel decides whether provided BPF token should allow delegation of requested BPF-related capabilities.
Return
Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
-
void security_bpf_map_free(struct bpf_map *map)¶
Free a bpf map’s LSM blob
Parameters
struct bpf_map *mapbpf map
Description
Clean up the security information stored inside bpf map.
-
void security_bpf_prog_free(struct bpf_prog *prog)¶
Free a BPF program’s LSM blob
Parameters
struct bpf_prog *progBPF program struct
Description
Clean up the security information stored inside BPF program.
-
void security_bpf_token_free(struct bpf_token *token)¶
Free a BPF token’s LSM blob
Parameters
struct bpf_token *tokenBPF token struct
Description
Clean up the security information stored inside BPF token.
-
int security_perf_event_open(struct perf_event_attr *attr, int type)¶
Check if a perf event open is allowed
Parameters
struct perf_event_attr *attrperf event attribute
int typetype of event
Description
Check whether the type of perf_event_open syscall is allowed.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_perf_event_alloc(struct perf_event *event)¶
Allocate a perf event LSM blob
Parameters
struct perf_event *eventperf event
Description
Allocate and save perf_event security info.
Return
Returns 0 on success, error on failure.
-
void security_perf_event_free(struct perf_event *event)¶
Free a perf event LSM blob
Parameters
struct perf_event *eventperf event
Description
Release (free) perf_event security info.
-
int security_perf_event_read(struct perf_event *event)¶
Check if reading a perf event label is allowed
Parameters
struct perf_event *eventperf event
Description
Read perf_event security info if allowed.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_perf_event_write(struct perf_event *event)¶
Check if writing a perf event label is allowed
Parameters
struct perf_event *eventperf event
Description
Write perf_event security info if allowed.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_uring_override_creds(const struct cred *new)¶
Check if overriding creds is allowed
Parameters
const struct cred *newnew credentials
Description
Check if the current task, executing an io_uring operation, is allowed to override it’s credentials with new.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_uring_sqpoll(void)¶
Check if IORING_SETUP_SQPOLL is allowed
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Check whether the current task is allowed to spawn a io_uring polling thread (IORING_SETUP_SQPOLL).
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
int security_uring_cmd(struct io_uring_cmd *ioucmd)¶
Check if a io_uring passthrough command is allowed
Parameters
struct io_uring_cmd *ioucmdcommand
Description
Check whether the file_operations uring_cmd is allowed to run.
Return
Returns 0 if permission is granted.
-
struct dentry *securityfs_create_file(const char *name, umode_t mode, struct dentry *parent, void *data, const struct file_operations *fops)¶
create a file in the securityfs filesystem
Parameters
const char *namea pointer to a string containing the name of the file to create.
umode_t modethe permission that the file should have
struct dentry *parenta pointer to the parent dentry for this file. This should be a directory dentry if set. If this parameter is
NULL, then the file will be created in the root of the securityfs filesystem.void *dataa pointer to something that the caller will want to get to later on. The inode.i_private pointer will point to this value on the open() call.
const struct file_operations *fopsa pointer to a struct file_operations that should be used for this file.
Description
This function creates a file in securityfs with the given name.
This function returns a pointer to a dentry if it succeeds. This
pointer must be passed to the securityfs_remove() function when the file is
to be removed (no automatic cleanup happens if your module is unloaded,
you are responsible here). If an error occurs, the function will return
the error value (via ERR_PTR).
If securityfs is not enabled in the kernel, the value -ENODEV is
returned.
-
struct dentry *securityfs_create_dir(const char *name, struct dentry *parent)¶
create a directory in the securityfs filesystem
Parameters
const char *namea pointer to a string containing the name of the directory to create.
struct dentry *parenta pointer to the parent dentry for this file. This should be a directory dentry if set. If this parameter is
NULL, then the directory will be created in the root of the securityfs filesystem.
Description
This function creates a directory in securityfs with the given name.
This function returns a pointer to a dentry if it succeeds. This
pointer must be passed to the securityfs_remove() function when the file is
to be removed (no automatic cleanup happens if your module is unloaded,
you are responsible here). If an error occurs, the function will return
the error value (via ERR_PTR).
If securityfs is not enabled in the kernel, the value -ENODEV is
returned.
-
struct dentry *securityfs_create_symlink(const char *name, struct dentry *parent, const char *target, const struct inode_operations *iops)¶
create a symlink in the securityfs filesystem
Parameters
const char *namea pointer to a string containing the name of the symlink to create.
struct dentry *parenta pointer to the parent dentry for the symlink. This should be a directory dentry if set. If this parameter is
NULL, then the directory will be created in the root of the securityfs filesystem.const char *targeta pointer to a string containing the name of the symlink’s target. If this parameter is
NULL, then the iops parameter needs to be setup to handle .readlink and .get_link inode_operations.const struct inode_operations *iopsa pointer to the struct inode_operations to use for the symlink. If this parameter is
NULL, then the default simple_symlink_inode operations will be used.
Description
This function creates a symlink in securityfs with the given name.
This function returns a pointer to a dentry if it succeeds. This
pointer must be passed to the securityfs_remove() function when the file is
to be removed (no automatic cleanup happens if your module is unloaded,
you are responsible here). If an error occurs, the function will return
the error value (via ERR_PTR).
If securityfs is not enabled in the kernel, the value -ENODEV is
returned.
-
void securityfs_remove(struct dentry *dentry)¶
removes a file or directory from the securityfs filesystem
Parameters
struct dentry *dentrya pointer to a the dentry of the file or directory to be removed.
Description
This function removes a file or directory in securityfs that was previously
created with a call to another securityfs function (like
securityfs_create_file() or variants thereof.)
This function is required to be called in order for the file to be removed. No automatic cleanup of files will happen when a module is removed; you are responsible here.
Audit Interfaces¶
-
struct audit_buffer *audit_log_start(struct audit_context *ctx, gfp_t gfp_mask, int type)¶
obtain an audit buffer
Parameters
struct audit_context *ctxaudit_context (may be NULL)
gfp_t gfp_masktype of allocation
int typeaudit message type
Description
Returns audit_buffer pointer on success or NULL on error.
Obtain an audit buffer. This routine does locking to obtain the audit buffer, but then no locking is required for calls to audit_log_*format. If the task (ctx) is a task that is currently in a syscall, then the syscall is marked as auditable and an audit record will be written at syscall exit. If there is no associated task, then task context (ctx) should be NULL.
-
void audit_log_format(struct audit_buffer *ab, const char *fmt, ...)¶
format a message into the audit buffer.
Parameters
struct audit_buffer *abaudit_buffer
const char *fmtformat string
...optional parameters matching fmt string
Description
All the work is done in audit_log_vformat.
-
void audit_log_end(struct audit_buffer *ab)¶
end one audit record
Parameters
struct audit_buffer *abthe audit_buffer
Description
We can not do a netlink send inside an irq context because it blocks (last arg, flags, is not set to MSG_DONTWAIT), so the audit buffer is placed on a queue and a kthread is scheduled to remove them from the queue outside the irq context. May be called in any context.
-
void audit_log(struct audit_context *ctx, gfp_t gfp_mask, int type, const char *fmt, ...)¶
Log an audit record
Parameters
struct audit_context *ctxaudit context
gfp_t gfp_masktype of allocation
int typeaudit message type
const char *fmtformat string to use
...variable parameters matching the format string
Description
This is a convenience function that calls audit_log_start, audit_log_vformat, and audit_log_end. It may be called in any context.
-
int __audit_filter_op(struct task_struct *tsk, struct audit_context *ctx, struct list_head *list, struct audit_names *name, unsigned long op)¶
common filter helper for operations (syscall/uring/etc)
Parameters
struct task_struct *tskassociated task
struct audit_context *ctxaudit context
struct list_head *listaudit filter list
struct audit_names *nameaudit_name (can be NULL)
unsigned long opcurrent syscall/uring_op
Description
Run the udit filters specified in list against tsk using ctx, name, and op, as necessary; the caller is responsible for ensuring that the call is made while the RCU read lock is held. The name parameter can be NULL, but all others must be specified. Returns 1/true if the filter finds a match, 0/false if none are found.
-
void audit_filter_uring(struct task_struct *tsk, struct audit_context *ctx)¶
apply filters to an io_uring operation
Parameters
struct task_struct *tskassociated task
struct audit_context *ctxaudit context
-
void audit_reset_context(struct audit_context *ctx)¶
reset a audit_context structure
Parameters
struct audit_context *ctxthe audit_context to reset
Description
All fields in the audit_context will be reset to an initial state, all references held by fields will be dropped, and private memory will be released. When this function returns the audit_context will be suitable for reuse, so long as the passed context is not NULL or a dummy context.
-
int audit_alloc(struct task_struct *tsk)¶
allocate an audit context block for a task
Parameters
struct task_struct *tsktask
Description
Filter on the task information and allocate a per-task audit context if necessary. Doing so turns on system call auditing for the specified task. This is called from copy_process, so no lock is needed.
-
void audit_log_uring(struct audit_context *ctx)¶
generate a AUDIT_URINGOP record
Parameters
struct audit_context *ctxthe audit context
-
void __audit_free(struct task_struct *tsk)¶
free a per-task audit context
Parameters
struct task_struct *tsktask whose audit context block to free
Description
Called from copy_process, do_exit, and the io_uring code
-
void audit_return_fixup(struct audit_context *ctx, int success, long code)¶
fixup the return codes in the audit_context
Parameters
struct audit_context *ctxthe audit_context
int successtrue/false value to indicate if the operation succeeded or not
long codeoperation return code
Description
We need to fixup the return code in the audit logs if the actual return codes are later going to be fixed by the arch specific signal handlers.
-
void __audit_uring_entry(u8 op)¶
prepare the kernel task’s audit context for io_uring
Parameters
u8 opthe io_uring opcode
Description
This is similar to audit_syscall_entry() but is intended for use by io_uring operations. This function should only ever be called from audit_uring_entry() as we rely on the audit context checking present in that function.
-
void __audit_uring_exit(int success, long code)¶
wrap up the kernel task’s audit context after io_uring
Parameters
int successtrue/false value to indicate if the operation succeeded or not
long codeoperation return code
Description
This is similar to audit_syscall_exit() but is intended for use by io_uring operations. This function should only ever be called from audit_uring_exit() as we rely on the audit context checking present in that function.
-
void __audit_syscall_entry(int major, unsigned long a1, unsigned long a2, unsigned long a3, unsigned long a4)¶
fill in an audit record at syscall entry
Parameters
int majormajor syscall type (function)
unsigned long a1additional syscall register 1
unsigned long a2additional syscall register 2
unsigned long a3additional syscall register 3
unsigned long a4additional syscall register 4
Description
Fill in audit context at syscall entry. This only happens if the audit context was created when the task was created and the state or filters demand the audit context be built. If the state from the per-task filter or from the per-syscall filter is AUDIT_STATE_RECORD, then the record will be written at syscall exit time (otherwise, it will only be written if another part of the kernel requests that it be written).
-
void __audit_syscall_exit(int success, long return_code)¶
deallocate audit context after a system call
Parameters
int successsuccess value of the syscall
long return_codereturn value of the syscall
Description
Tear down after system call. If the audit context has been marked as auditable (either because of the AUDIT_STATE_RECORD state from filtering, or because some other part of the kernel wrote an audit message), then write out the syscall information. In call cases, free the names stored from getname().
-
struct filename *__audit_reusename(__user const char *uptr)¶
fill out filename with info from existing entry
Parameters
const __user char *uptruserland ptr to pathname
Description
Search the audit_names list for the current audit context. If there is an existing entry with a matching “uptr” then return the filename associated with that audit_name. If not, return NULL.
-
void __audit_getname(struct filename *name)¶
add a name to the list
Parameters
struct filename *namename to add
Description
Add a name to the list of audit names for this context. Called from fs/namei.c:getname().
-
void __audit_inode(struct filename *name, const struct dentry *dentry, unsigned int flags)¶
store the inode and device from a lookup
Parameters
struct filename *namename being audited
const struct dentry *dentrydentry being audited
unsigned int flagsattributes for this particular entry
-
int auditsc_get_stamp(struct audit_context *ctx, struct timespec64 *t, unsigned int *serial)¶
get local copies of audit_context values
Parameters
struct audit_context *ctxaudit_context for the task
struct timespec64 *ttimespec64 to store time recorded in the audit_context
unsigned int *serialserial value that is recorded in the audit_context
Description
Also sets the context as auditable.
-
void __audit_mq_open(int oflag, umode_t mode, struct mq_attr *attr)¶
record audit data for a POSIX MQ open
Parameters
int oflagopen flag
umode_t modemode bits
struct mq_attr *attrqueue attributes
-
void __audit_mq_sendrecv(mqd_t mqdes, size_t msg_len, unsigned int msg_prio, const struct timespec64 *abs_timeout)¶
record audit data for a POSIX MQ timed send/receive
Parameters
mqd_t mqdesMQ descriptor
size_t msg_lenMessage length
unsigned int msg_prioMessage priority
const struct timespec64 *abs_timeoutMessage timeout in absolute time
-
void __audit_mq_notify(mqd_t mqdes, const struct sigevent *notification)¶
record audit data for a POSIX MQ notify
Parameters
mqd_t mqdesMQ descriptor
const struct sigevent *notificationNotification event
-
void __audit_mq_getsetattr(mqd_t mqdes, struct mq_attr *mqstat)¶
record audit data for a POSIX MQ get/set attribute
Parameters
mqd_t mqdesMQ descriptor
struct mq_attr *mqstatMQ flags
-
void __audit_ipc_obj(struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcp)¶
record audit data for ipc object
Parameters
struct kern_ipc_perm *ipcpipc permissions
-
void __audit_ipc_set_perm(unsigned long qbytes, uid_t uid, gid_t gid, umode_t mode)¶
record audit data for new ipc permissions
Parameters
unsigned long qbytesmsgq bytes
uid_t uidmsgq user id
gid_t gidmsgq group id
umode_t modemsgq mode (permissions)
Description
Called only after audit_ipc_obj().
-
int __audit_socketcall(int nargs, unsigned long *args)¶
record audit data for sys_socketcall
Parameters
int nargsnumber of args, which should not be more than AUDITSC_ARGS.
unsigned long *argsargs array
-
void __audit_fd_pair(int fd1, int fd2)¶
record audit data for pipe and socketpair
Parameters
int fd1the first file descriptor
int fd2the second file descriptor
-
int __audit_sockaddr(int len, void *a)¶
record audit data for sys_bind, sys_connect, sys_sendto
Parameters
int lendata length in user space
void *adata address in kernel space
Description
Returns 0 for success or NULL context or < 0 on error.
-
int audit_signal_info_syscall(struct task_struct *t)¶
record signal info for syscalls
Parameters
struct task_struct *ttask being signaled
Description
If the audit subsystem is being terminated, record the task (pid) and uid that is doing that.
-
int __audit_log_bprm_fcaps(struct linux_binprm *bprm, const struct cred *new, const struct cred *old)¶
store information about a loading bprm and relevant fcaps
Parameters
struct linux_binprm *bprmpointer to the bprm being processed
const struct cred *newthe proposed new credentials
const struct cred *oldthe old credentials
Description
Simply check if the proc already has the caps given by the file and if not store the priv escalation info for later auditing at the end of the syscall
-Eric
-
void __audit_log_capset(const struct cred *new, const struct cred *old)¶
store information about the arguments to the capset syscall
Parameters
const struct cred *newthe new credentials
const struct cred *oldthe old (current) credentials
Description
Record the arguments userspace sent to sys_capset for later printing by the audit system if applicable
-
void audit_core_dumps(long signr)¶
record information about processes that end abnormally
Parameters
long signrsignal value
Description
If a process ends with a core dump, something fishy is going on and we should record the event for investigation.
-
void audit_seccomp(unsigned long syscall, long signr, int code)¶
record information about a seccomp action
Parameters
unsigned long syscallsyscall number
long signrsignal value
int codethe seccomp action
Description
Record the information associated with a seccomp action. Event filtering for seccomp actions that are not to be logged is done in seccomp_log(). Therefore, this function forces auditing independent of the audit_enabled and dummy context state because seccomp actions should be logged even when audit is not in use.
-
int audit_rule_change(int type, int seq, void *data, size_t datasz)¶
apply all rules to the specified message type
Parameters
int typeaudit message type
int seqnetlink audit message sequence (serial) number
void *datapayload data
size_t dataszsize of payload data
Parameters
struct sk_buff *request_skbskb of request we are replying to (used to target the reply)
int seqnetlink audit message sequence (serial) number
-
int parent_len(const char *path)¶
find the length of the parent portion of a pathname
Parameters
const char *pathpathname of which to determine length
-
int audit_compare_dname_path(const struct qstr *dname, const char *path, int parentlen)¶
compare given dentry name with last component in given path. Return of 0 indicates a match.
Parameters
const struct qstr *dnamedentry name that we’re comparing
const char *pathfull pathname that we’re comparing
int parentlenlength of the parent if known. Passing in AUDIT_NAME_FULL here indicates that we must compute this value.
Accounting Framework¶
-
long sys_acct(const char __user *name)¶
enable/disable process accounting
Parameters
const char __user * namefile name for accounting records or NULL to shutdown accounting
Description
sys_acct() is the only system call needed to implement process
accounting. It takes the name of the file where accounting records
should be written. If the filename is NULL, accounting will be
shutdown.
Return
0 for success or negative errno values for failure.
-
void acct_collect(long exitcode, int group_dead)¶
collect accounting information into pacct_struct
Parameters
long exitcodetask exit code
int group_deadnot 0, if this thread is the last one in the process.
-
void acct_process(void)¶
handles process accounting for an exiting task
Parameters
voidno arguments
Block Devices¶
-
void bio_advance(struct bio *bio, unsigned int nbytes)¶
increment/complete a bio by some number of bytes
Parameters
struct bio *biobio to advance
unsigned int nbytesnumber of bytes to complete
Description
This updates bi_sector, bi_size and bi_idx; if the number of bytes to complete doesn’t align with a bvec boundary, then bv_len and bv_offset will be updated on the last bvec as well.
bio will then represent the remaining, uncompleted portion of the io.
-
struct folio_iter¶
State for iterating all folios in a bio.
Definition:
struct folio_iter {
struct folio *folio;
size_t offset;
size_t length;
};
Members
folioThe current folio we’re iterating. NULL after the last folio.
offsetThe byte offset within the current folio.
lengthThe number of bytes in this iteration (will not cross folio boundary).
-
bio_for_each_folio_all¶
bio_for_each_folio_all (fi, bio)
Iterate over each folio in a bio.
Parameters
fistruct folio_iterwhich is updated for each folio.biostruct bio to iterate over.
-
struct bio *bio_next_split(struct bio *bio, int sectors, gfp_t gfp, struct bio_set *bs)¶
get next sectors from a bio, splitting if necessary
Parameters
struct bio *biobio to split
int sectorsnumber of sectors to split from the front of bio
gfp_t gfpgfp mask
struct bio_set *bsbio set to allocate from
Return
a bio representing the next sectors of bio - if the bio is smaller than sectors, returns the original bio unchanged.
-
void blk_queue_flag_set(unsigned int flag, struct request_queue *q)¶
atomically set a queue flag
Parameters
unsigned int flagflag to be set
struct request_queue *qrequest queue
-
void blk_queue_flag_clear(unsigned int flag, struct request_queue *q)¶
atomically clear a queue flag
Parameters
unsigned int flagflag to be cleared
struct request_queue *qrequest queue
-
bool blk_queue_flag_test_and_set(unsigned int flag, struct request_queue *q)¶
atomically test and set a queue flag
Parameters
unsigned int flagflag to be set
struct request_queue *qrequest queue
Description
Returns the previous value of flag - 0 if the flag was not set and 1 if the flag was already set.
-
const char *blk_op_str(enum req_op op)¶
Return string XXX in the REQ_OP_XXX.
Parameters
enum req_op opREQ_OP_XXX.
Description
Centralize block layer function to convert REQ_OP_XXX into string format. Useful in the debugging and tracing bio or request. For invalid REQ_OP_XXX it returns string “UNKNOWN”.
-
void blk_sync_queue(struct request_queue *q)¶
cancel any pending callbacks on a queue
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe queue
Description
The block layer may perform asynchronous callback activity on a queue, such as calling the unplug function after a timeout. A block device may call blk_sync_queue to ensure that any such activity is cancelled, thus allowing it to release resources that the callbacks might use. The caller must already have made sure that its ->submit_bio will not re-add plugging prior to calling this function.
This function does not cancel any asynchronous activity arising out of elevator or throttling code. That would require elevator_exit() and blkcg_exit_queue() to be called with queue lock initialized.
-
void blk_set_pm_only(struct request_queue *q)¶
increment pm_only counter
Parameters
struct request_queue *qrequest queue pointer
-
void blk_put_queue(struct request_queue *q)¶
decrement the request_queue refcount
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request_queue structure to decrement the refcount for
Description
Decrements the refcount of the request_queue and free it when the refcount reaches 0.
-
bool blk_get_queue(struct request_queue *q)¶
increment the request_queue refcount
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request_queue structure to increment the refcount for
Description
Increment the refcount of the request_queue kobject.
Context
Any context.
Parameters
struct bio *bioThe bio describing the location in memory and on the device.
Description
This is a version of submit_bio() that shall only be used for I/O that is
resubmitted to lower level drivers by stacking block drivers. All file
systems and other upper level users of the block layer should use
submit_bio() instead.
Parameters
struct bio *bioThe
struct biowhich describes the I/O
Description
submit_bio() is used to submit I/O requests to block devices. It is passed a
fully set up struct bio that describes the I/O that needs to be done. The
bio will be send to the device described by the bi_bdev field.
The success/failure status of the request, along with notification of completion, is delivered asynchronously through the ->bi_end_io() callback in bio. The bio must NOT be touched by the caller until ->bi_end_io() has been called.
-
int bio_poll(struct bio *bio, struct io_comp_batch *iob, unsigned int flags)¶
poll for BIO completions
Parameters
struct bio *biobio to poll for
struct io_comp_batch *iobbatches of IO
unsigned int flagsBLK_POLL_* flags that control the behavior
Description
Poll for completions on queue associated with the bio. Returns number of completed entries found.
Note
the caller must either be the context that submitted bio, or be in a RCU critical section to prevent freeing of bio.
Parameters
struct bio *biobio to start account for
Description
Returns the start time that should be passed back to bio_end_io_acct().
-
int blk_lld_busy(struct request_queue *q)¶
Check if underlying low-level drivers of a device are busy
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe queue of the device being checked
Description
Check if underlying low-level drivers of a device are busy. If the drivers want to export their busy state, they must set own exporting function using blk_queue_lld_busy() first.
Basically, this function is used only by request stacking drivers to stop dispatching requests to underlying devices when underlying devices are busy. This behavior helps more I/O merging on the queue of the request stacking driver and prevents I/O throughput regression on burst I/O load.
Return
0 - Not busy (The request stacking driver should dispatch request) 1 - Busy (The request stacking driver should stop dispatching request)
-
void blk_start_plug(struct blk_plug *plug)¶
initialize blk_plug and track it inside the task_struct
Parameters
struct blk_plug *plugThe
struct blk_plugthat needs to be initialized
Description
blk_start_plug()indicates to the block layer an intent by the caller to submit multiple I/O requests in a batch. The block layer may use this hint to defer submitting I/Os from the caller untilblk_finish_plug()is called. However, the block layer may choose to submit requests before a call toblk_finish_plug()if the number of queued I/Os exceedsBLK_MAX_REQUEST_COUNT, or if the size of the I/O is larger thanBLK_PLUG_FLUSH_SIZE. The queued I/Os may also be submitted early if the task schedules (see below).Tracking blk_plug inside the task_struct will help with auto-flushing the pending I/O should the task end up blocking between
blk_start_plug()andblk_finish_plug(). This is important from a performance perspective, but also ensures that we don’t deadlock. For instance, if the task is blocking for a memory allocation, memory reclaim could end up wanting to free a page belonging to that request that is currently residing in our private plug. By flushing the pending I/O when the process goes to sleep, we avoid this kind of deadlock.
-
void blk_finish_plug(struct blk_plug *plug)¶
mark the end of a batch of submitted I/O
Parameters
struct blk_plug *plugThe
struct blk_plugpassed toblk_start_plug()
Description
Indicate that a batch of I/O submissions is complete. This function
must be paired with an initial call to blk_start_plug(). The intent
is to allow the block layer to optimize I/O submission. See the
documentation for blk_start_plug() for more information.
-
int blk_queue_enter(struct request_queue *q, blk_mq_req_flags_t flags)¶
try to increase q->q_usage_counter
Parameters
struct request_queue *qrequest queue pointer
blk_mq_req_flags_t flagsBLK_MQ_REQ_NOWAIT and/or BLK_MQ_REQ_PM
-
int blk_rq_map_user_iov(struct request_queue *q, struct request *rq, struct rq_map_data *map_data, const struct iov_iter *iter, gfp_t gfp_mask)¶
map user data to a request, for passthrough requests
Parameters
struct request_queue *qrequest queue where request should be inserted
struct request *rqrequest to map data to
struct rq_map_data *map_datapointer to the rq_map_data holding pages (if necessary)
const struct iov_iter *iteriovec iterator
gfp_t gfp_maskmemory allocation flags
Description
Data will be mapped directly for zero copy I/O, if possible. Otherwise a kernel bounce buffer is used.
A matching
blk_rq_unmap_user()must be issued at the end of I/O, while still in process context.
Parameters
struct bio *biostart of bio list
Description
Unmap a rq previously mapped by blk_rq_map_user(). The caller must supply the original rq->bio from the blk_rq_map_user() return, since the I/O completion may have changed rq->bio.
-
int blk_rq_map_kern(struct request_queue *q, struct request *rq, void *kbuf, unsigned int len, gfp_t gfp_mask)¶
map kernel data to a request, for passthrough requests
Parameters
struct request_queue *qrequest queue where request should be inserted
struct request *rqrequest to fill
void *kbufthe kernel buffer
unsigned int lenlength of user data
gfp_t gfp_maskmemory allocation flags
Description
Data will be mapped directly if possible. Otherwise a bounce buffer is used. Can be called multiple times to append multiple buffers.
-
int blk_register_queue(struct gendisk *disk)¶
register a block layer queue with sysfs
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskDisk of which the request queue should be registered with sysfs.
-
void blk_unregister_queue(struct gendisk *disk)¶
counterpart of
blk_register_queue()
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskDisk of which the request queue should be unregistered from sysfs.
Note
the caller is responsible for guaranteeing that this function is called
after blk_register_queue() has finished.
-
void blk_set_stacking_limits(struct queue_limits *lim)¶
set default limits for stacking devices
Parameters
struct queue_limits *limthe queue_limits structure to reset
Description
Prepare queue limits for applying limits from underlying devices using
blk_stack_limits().
-
int queue_limits_commit_update(struct request_queue *q, struct queue_limits *lim)¶
commit an atomic update of queue limits
Parameters
struct request_queue *qqueue to update
struct queue_limits *limlimits to apply
Description
Apply the limits in lim that were obtained from queue_limits_start_update() and updated by the caller to q.
Returns 0 if successful, else a negative error code.
-
int queue_limits_set(struct request_queue *q, struct queue_limits *lim)¶
apply queue limits to queue
Parameters
struct request_queue *qqueue to update
struct queue_limits *limlimits to apply
Description
Apply the limits in lim that were freshly initialized to q.
To update existing limits use queue_limits_start_update() and
queue_limits_commit_update() instead.
Returns 0 if successful, else a negative error code.
-
void blk_queue_chunk_sectors(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int chunk_sectors)¶
set size of the chunk for this queue
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int chunk_sectorschunk sectors in the usual 512b unit
Description
If a driver doesn’t want IOs to cross a given chunk size, it can set this limit and prevent merging across chunks. Note that the block layer must accept a page worth of data at any offset. So if the crossing of chunks is a hard limitation in the driver, it must still be prepared to split single page bios.
-
void blk_queue_max_discard_sectors(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int max_discard_sectors)¶
set max sectors for a single discard
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int max_discard_sectorsmaximum number of sectors to discard
-
void blk_queue_max_secure_erase_sectors(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int max_sectors)¶
set max sectors for a secure erase
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int max_sectorsmaximum number of sectors to secure_erase
-
void blk_queue_max_write_zeroes_sectors(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int max_write_zeroes_sectors)¶
set max sectors for a single write zeroes
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int max_write_zeroes_sectorsmaximum number of sectors to write per command
-
void blk_queue_max_zone_append_sectors(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int max_zone_append_sectors)¶
set max sectors for a single zone append
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int max_zone_append_sectorsmaximum number of sectors to write per command
Description
Sets the maximum number of sectors allowed for zone append commands. If Specifying 0 for max_zone_append_sectors indicates that the queue does not natively support zone append operations and that the block layer must emulate these operations using regular writes.
-
void blk_queue_logical_block_size(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int size)¶
set logical block size for the queue
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int sizethe logical block size, in bytes
Description
This should be set to the lowest possible block size that the storage device can address. The default of 512 covers most hardware.
-
void blk_queue_physical_block_size(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int size)¶
set physical block size for the queue
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int sizethe physical block size, in bytes
Description
This should be set to the lowest possible sector size that the hardware can operate on without reverting to read-modify-write operations.
-
void blk_queue_zone_write_granularity(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int size)¶
set zone write granularity for the queue
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the zoned device
unsigned int sizethe zone write granularity size, in bytes
Description
This should be set to the lowest possible size allowing to write in sequential zones of a zoned block device.
-
void blk_queue_alignment_offset(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int offset)¶
set physical block alignment offset
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int offsetalignment offset in bytes
Description
Some devices are naturally misaligned to compensate for things like the legacy DOS partition table 63-sector offset. Low-level drivers should call this function for devices whose first sector is not naturally aligned.
-
void blk_limits_io_min(struct queue_limits *limits, unsigned int min)¶
set minimum request size for a device
Parameters
struct queue_limits *limitsthe queue limits
unsigned int minsmallest I/O size in bytes
Description
Some devices have an internal block size bigger than the reported hardware sector size. This function can be used to signal the smallest I/O the device can perform without incurring a performance penalty.
-
void blk_queue_io_min(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int min)¶
set minimum request size for the queue
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int minsmallest I/O size in bytes
Description
Storage devices may report a granularity or preferred minimum I/O size which is the smallest request the device can perform without incurring a performance penalty. For disk drives this is often the physical block size. For RAID arrays it is often the stripe chunk size. A properly aligned multiple of minimum_io_size is the preferred request size for workloads where a high number of I/O operations is desired.
-
void blk_limits_io_opt(struct queue_limits *limits, unsigned int opt)¶
set optimal request size for a device
Parameters
struct queue_limits *limitsthe queue limits
unsigned int optsmallest I/O size in bytes
Description
Storage devices may report an optimal I/O size, which is the device’s preferred unit for sustained I/O. This is rarely reported for disk drives. For RAID arrays it is usually the stripe width or the internal track size. A properly aligned multiple of optimal_io_size is the preferred request size for workloads where sustained throughput is desired.
-
int blk_stack_limits(struct queue_limits *t, struct queue_limits *b, sector_t start)¶
adjust queue_limits for stacked devices
Parameters
struct queue_limits *tthe stacking driver limits (top device)
struct queue_limits *bthe underlying queue limits (bottom, component device)
sector_t startfirst data sector within component device
Description
This function is used by stacking drivers like MD and DM to ensure that all component devices have compatible block sizes and alignments. The stacking driver must provide a queue_limits struct (top) and then iteratively call the stacking function for all component (bottom) devices. The stacking function will attempt to combine the values and ensure proper alignment.
Returns 0 if the top and bottom queue_limits are compatible. The top device’s block sizes and alignment offsets may be adjusted to ensure alignment with the bottom device. If no compatible sizes and alignments exist, -1 is returned and the resulting top queue_limits will have the misaligned flag set to indicate that the alignment_offset is undefined.
-
void queue_limits_stack_bdev(struct queue_limits *t, struct block_device *bdev, sector_t offset, const char *pfx)¶
adjust queue_limits for stacked devices
Parameters
struct queue_limits *tthe stacking driver limits (top device)
struct block_device *bdevthe underlying block device (bottom)
sector_t offsetoffset to beginning of data within component device
const char *pfxprefix to use for warnings logged
Description
This function is used by stacking drivers like MD and DM to ensure that all component devices have compatible block sizes and alignments. The stacking driver must provide a queue_limits struct (top) and then iteratively call the stacking function for all component (bottom) devices. The stacking function will attempt to combine the values and ensure proper alignment.
-
void blk_queue_update_dma_pad(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int mask)¶
update pad mask
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int maskpad mask
Description
Update dma pad mask.
Appending pad buffer to a request modifies the last entry of a scatter list such that it includes the pad buffer.
-
void blk_set_queue_depth(struct request_queue *q, unsigned int depth)¶
tell the block layer about the device queue depth
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
unsigned int depthqueue depth
-
void blk_queue_write_cache(struct request_queue *q, bool wc, bool fua)¶
configure queue’s write cache
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue for the device
bool wcwrite back cache on or off
bool fuadevice supports FUA writes, if true
Description
Tell the block layer about the write cache of q.
-
void disk_set_zoned(struct gendisk *disk)¶
inidicate a zoned device
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskgendisk to configure
-
int blkdev_issue_flush(struct block_device *bdev)¶
queue a flush
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblockdev to issue flush for
Description
Issue a flush for the block device in question.
-
int blkdev_issue_discard(struct block_device *bdev, sector_t sector, sector_t nr_sects, gfp_t gfp_mask)¶
queue a discard
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblockdev to issue discard for
sector_t sectorstart sector
sector_t nr_sectsnumber of sectors to discard
gfp_t gfp_maskmemory allocation flags (for bio_alloc)
Description
Issue a discard request for the sectors in question.
-
int __blkdev_issue_zeroout(struct block_device *bdev, sector_t sector, sector_t nr_sects, gfp_t gfp_mask, struct bio **biop, unsigned flags)¶
generate number of zero filed write bios
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblockdev to issue
sector_t sectorstart sector
sector_t nr_sectsnumber of sectors to write
gfp_t gfp_maskmemory allocation flags (for bio_alloc)
struct bio **bioppointer to anchor bio
unsigned flagscontrols detailed behavior
Description
Zero-fill a block range, either using hardware offload or by explicitly writing zeroes to the device.
If a device is using logical block provisioning, the underlying space will not be released if
flagscontains BLKDEV_ZERO_NOUNMAP.If
flagscontains BLKDEV_ZERO_NOFALLBACK, the function will return -EOPNOTSUPP if no explicit hardware offload for zeroing is provided.
-
int blkdev_issue_zeroout(struct block_device *bdev, sector_t sector, sector_t nr_sects, gfp_t gfp_mask, unsigned flags)¶
zero-fill a block range
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblockdev to write
sector_t sectorstart sector
sector_t nr_sectsnumber of sectors to write
gfp_t gfp_maskmemory allocation flags (for bio_alloc)
unsigned flagscontrols detailed behavior
Description
Zero-fill a block range, either using hardware offload or by explicitly writing zeroes to the device. See
__blkdev_issue_zeroout()for the valid values forflags.
-
int blk_rq_count_integrity_sg(struct request_queue *q, struct bio *bio)¶
Count number of integrity scatterlist elements
Parameters
struct request_queue *qrequest queue
struct bio *biobio with integrity metadata attached
Description
Returns the number of elements required in a scatterlist corresponding to the integrity metadata in a bio.
-
int blk_rq_map_integrity_sg(struct request_queue *q, struct bio *bio, struct scatterlist *sglist)¶
Map integrity metadata into a scatterlist
Parameters
struct request_queue *qrequest queue
struct bio *biobio with integrity metadata attached
struct scatterlist *sglisttarget scatterlist
Description
Map the integrity vectors in request into a
scatterlist. The scatterlist must be big enough to hold all
elements. I.e. sized using blk_rq_count_integrity_sg().
-
int blk_integrity_compare(struct gendisk *gd1, struct gendisk *gd2)¶
Compare integrity profile of two disks
Parameters
struct gendisk *gd1Disk to compare
struct gendisk *gd2Disk to compare
Description
Meta-devices like DM and MD need to verify that all sub-devices use the same integrity format before advertising to upper layers that they can send/receive integrity metadata. This function can be used to check whether two gendisk devices have compatible integrity formats.
-
void blk_integrity_register(struct gendisk *disk, struct blk_integrity *template)¶
Register a gendisk as being integrity-capable
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskstruct gendisk pointer to make integrity-aware
struct blk_integrity *templateblock integrity profile to register
Description
When a device needs to advertise itself as being able to send/receive integrity metadata it must use this function to register the capability with the block layer. The template is a blk_integrity struct with values appropriate for the underlying hardware. See Data Integrity.
-
void blk_integrity_unregister(struct gendisk *disk)¶
Unregister block integrity profile
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskdisk whose integrity profile to unregister
Description
This function unregisters the integrity capability from a block device.
-
int blk_trace_ioctl(struct block_device *bdev, unsigned cmd, char __user *arg)¶
handle the ioctls associated with tracing
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevthe block device
unsigned cmdthe ioctl cmd
char __user *argthe argument data, if any
-
void blk_trace_shutdown(struct request_queue *q)¶
stop and cleanup trace structures
Parameters
struct request_queue *qthe request queue associated with the device
-
void blk_add_trace_rq(struct request *rq, blk_status_t error, unsigned int nr_bytes, u32 what, u64 cgid)¶
Add a trace for a request oriented action
Parameters
struct request *rqthe source request
blk_status_t errorreturn status to log
unsigned int nr_bytesnumber of completed bytes
u32 whatthe action
u64 cgidthe cgroup info
Description
Records an action against a request. Will log the bio offset + size.
-
void blk_add_trace_bio(struct request_queue *q, struct bio *bio, u32 what, int error)¶
Add a trace for a bio oriented action
Parameters
struct request_queue *qqueue the io is for
struct bio *biothe source bio
u32 whatthe action
int errorerror, if any
Description
Records an action against a bio. Will log the bio offset + size.
-
void blk_add_trace_bio_remap(void *ignore, struct bio *bio, dev_t dev, sector_t from)¶
Add a trace for a bio-remap operation
Parameters
void *ignoretrace callback data parameter (not used)
struct bio *biothe source bio
dev_t devsource device
sector_t fromsource sector
Description
Called after a bio is remapped to a different device and/or sector.
-
void blk_add_trace_rq_remap(void *ignore, struct request *rq, dev_t dev, sector_t from)¶
Add a trace for a request-remap operation
Parameters
void *ignoretrace callback data parameter (not used)
struct request *rqthe source request
dev_t devtarget device
sector_t fromsource sector
Description
Device mapper remaps request to other devices. Add a trace for that action.
Parameters
struct device *devthe device representing this disk
Description
This function releases all allocated resources of the gendisk.
Drivers which used __device_add_disk() have a gendisk with a request_queue
assigned. Since the request_queue sits on top of the gendisk for these
drivers we also call blk_put_queue() for them, and we expect the
request_queue refcount to reach 0 at this point, and so the request_queue
will also be freed prior to the disk.
Context
can sleep
-
int __register_blkdev(unsigned int major, const char *name, void (*probe)(dev_t devt))¶
register a new block device
Parameters
unsigned int majorthe requested major device number [1..BLKDEV_MAJOR_MAX-1]. If major = 0, try to allocate any unused major number.
const char *namethe name of the new block device as a zero terminated string
void (*probe)(dev_t devt)pre-devtmpfs / pre-udev callback used to create disks when their pre-created device node is accessed. When a probe call uses add_disk() and it fails the driver must cleanup resources. This interface may soon be removed.
Description
The name must be unique within the system.
The return value depends on the major input parameter:
if a major device number was requested in range [1..BLKDEV_MAJOR_MAX-1] then the function returns zero on success, or a negative error code
if any unused major number was requested with major = 0 parameter then the return value is the allocated major number in range [1..BLKDEV_MAJOR_MAX-1] or a negative error code otherwise
See Linux allocated devices (4.x+ version) for the list of allocated major numbers.
Use register_blkdev instead for any new code.
-
int device_add_disk(struct device *parent, struct gendisk *disk, const struct attribute_group **groups)¶
add disk information to kernel list
Parameters
struct device *parentparent device for the disk
struct gendisk *diskper-device partitioning information
const struct attribute_group **groupsAdditional per-device sysfs groups
Description
This function registers the partitioning information in disk with the kernel.
-
void blk_mark_disk_dead(struct gendisk *disk)¶
mark a disk as dead
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskdisk to mark as dead
Description
Mark as disk as dead (e.g. surprise removed) and don’t accept any new I/O to this disk.
-
void del_gendisk(struct gendisk *disk)¶
remove the gendisk
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskthe struct gendisk to remove
Description
Removes the gendisk and all its associated resources. This deletes the partitions associated with the gendisk, and unregisters the associated request_queue.
This is the counter to the respective __device_add_disk() call.
The final removal of the struct gendisk happens when its refcount reaches 0
with put_disk(), which should be called after del_gendisk(), if
__device_add_disk() was used.
Drivers exist which depend on the release of the gendisk to be synchronous, it should not be deferred.
Context
can sleep
-
void invalidate_disk(struct gendisk *disk)¶
invalidate the disk
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskthe struct gendisk to invalidate
Description
A helper to invalidates the disk. It will clean the disk’s associated buffer/page caches and reset its internal states so that the disk can be reused by the drivers.
Context
can sleep
-
void put_disk(struct gendisk *disk)¶
decrements the gendisk refcount
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskthe struct gendisk to decrement the refcount for
Description
This decrements the refcount for the struct gendisk. When this reaches 0
we’ll have disk_release() called.
Note
for blk-mq disk put_disk must be called before freeing the tag_set when handling probe errors (that is before add_disk() is called).
Context
Any context, but the last reference must not be dropped from atomic context.
-
void set_disk_ro(struct gendisk *disk, bool read_only)¶
set a gendisk read-only
Parameters
struct gendisk *diskgendisk to operate on
bool read_onlytrueto set the disk read-only,falseset the disk read/write
Description
This function is used to indicate whether a given disk device should have its
read-only flag set. set_disk_ro() is typically used by device drivers to
indicate whether the underlying physical device is write-protected.
-
int bdev_freeze(struct block_device *bdev)¶
lock a filesystem and force it into a consistent state
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblockdevice to lock
Description
If a superblock is found on this device, we take the s_umount semaphore
on it to make sure nobody unmounts until the snapshot creation is done.
The reference counter (bd_fsfreeze_count) guarantees that only the last
unfreeze process can unfreeze the frozen filesystem actually when multiple
freeze requests arrive simultaneously. It counts up in bdev_freeze() and
count down in bdev_thaw(). When it becomes 0, thaw_bdev() will unfreeze
actually.
Return
On success zero is returned, negative error code on failure.
-
int bdev_thaw(struct block_device *bdev)¶
unlock filesystem
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblockdevice to unlock
Description
Unlocks the filesystem and marks it writeable again after bdev_freeze().
Return
On success zero is returned, negative error code on failure.
-
int bd_prepare_to_claim(struct block_device *bdev, void *holder, const struct blk_holder_ops *hops)¶
claim a block device
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblock device of interest
void *holderholder trying to claim bdev
const struct blk_holder_ops *hopsholder ops.
Description
Claim bdev. This function fails if bdev is already claimed by another holder and waits if another claiming is in progress. return, the caller has ownership of bd_claiming and bd_holder[s].
Return
0 if bdev can be claimed, -EBUSY otherwise.
-
void bd_abort_claiming(struct block_device *bdev, void *holder)¶
abort claiming of a block device
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblock device of interest
void *holderholder that has claimed bdev
Description
Abort claiming of a block device when the exclusive open failed. This can be also used when exclusive open is not actually desired and we just needed to block other exclusive openers for a while.
-
void bdev_fput(struct file *bdev_file)¶
yield claim to the block device and put the file
Parameters
struct file *bdev_fileopen block device
Description
Yield claim on the block device and put the file. Ensure that the block device can be reclaimed before the file is closed which is a deferred operation.
-
int lookup_bdev(const char *pathname, dev_t *dev)¶
Look up a struct block_device by name.
Parameters
const char *pathnameName of the block device in the filesystem.
dev_t *devPointer to the block device’s dev_t, if found.
Description
Lookup the block device’s dev_t at pathname in the current namespace if possible and return it in dev.
Context
May sleep.
Return
0 if succeeded, negative errno otherwise.
-
void bdev_mark_dead(struct block_device *bdev, bool surprise)¶
mark a block device as dead
Parameters
struct block_device *bdevblock device to operate on
bool surpriseindicate a surprise removal
Description
Tell the file system that this devices or media is dead. If surprise is set
to true the device or media is already gone, if not we are preparing for an
orderly removal.
This calls into the file system, which then typicall syncs out all dirty data and writes back inodes and then invalidates any cached data in the inodes on the file system. In addition we also invalidate the block device mapping.
Char devices¶
-
int register_chrdev_region(dev_t from, unsigned count, const char *name)¶
register a range of device numbers
Parameters
dev_t fromthe first in the desired range of device numbers; must include the major number.
unsigned countthe number of consecutive device numbers required
const char *namethe name of the device or driver.
Description
Return value is zero on success, a negative error code on failure.
-
int alloc_chrdev_region(dev_t *dev, unsigned baseminor, unsigned count, const char *name)¶
register a range of char device numbers
Parameters
dev_t *devoutput parameter for first assigned number
unsigned baseminorfirst of the requested range of minor numbers
unsigned countthe number of minor numbers required
const char *namethe name of the associated device or driver
Description
Allocates a range of char device numbers. The major number will be chosen dynamically, and returned (along with the first minor number) in dev. Returns zero or a negative error code.
-
int __register_chrdev(unsigned int major, unsigned int baseminor, unsigned int count, const char *name, const struct file_operations *fops)¶
create and register a cdev occupying a range of minors
Parameters
unsigned int majormajor device number or 0 for dynamic allocation
unsigned int baseminorfirst of the requested range of minor numbers
unsigned int countthe number of minor numbers required
const char *namename of this range of devices
const struct file_operations *fopsfile operations associated with this devices
Description
If major == 0 this functions will dynamically allocate a major and return its number.
If major > 0 this function will attempt to reserve a device with the given major number and will return zero on success.
Returns a -ve errno on failure.
The name of this device has nothing to do with the name of the device in /dev. It only helps to keep track of the different owners of devices. If your module name has only one type of devices it’s ok to use e.g. the name of the module here.
-
void unregister_chrdev_region(dev_t from, unsigned count)¶
unregister a range of device numbers
Parameters
dev_t fromthe first in the range of numbers to unregister
unsigned countthe number of device numbers to unregister
Description
This function will unregister a range of count device numbers, starting with from. The caller should normally be the one who allocated those numbers in the first place...
-
void __unregister_chrdev(unsigned int major, unsigned int baseminor, unsigned int count, const char *name)¶
unregister and destroy a cdev
Parameters
unsigned int majormajor device number
unsigned int baseminorfirst of the range of minor numbers
unsigned int countthe number of minor numbers this cdev is occupying
const char *namename of this range of devices
Description
Unregister and destroy the cdev occupying the region described by
major, baseminor and count. This function undoes what
__register_chrdev() did.
-
int cdev_add(struct cdev *p, dev_t dev, unsigned count)¶
add a char device to the system
Parameters
struct cdev *pthe cdev structure for the device
dev_t devthe first device number for which this device is responsible
unsigned countthe number of consecutive minor numbers corresponding to this device
Description
cdev_add() adds the device represented by p to the system, making it
live immediately. A negative error code is returned on failure.
-
void cdev_set_parent(struct cdev *p, struct kobject *kobj)¶
set the parent kobject for a char device
Parameters
struct cdev *pthe cdev structure
struct kobject *kobjthe kobject to take a reference to
Description
cdev_set_parent() sets a parent kobject which will be referenced
appropriately so the parent is not freed before the cdev. This
should be called before cdev_add.
-
int cdev_device_add(struct cdev *cdev, struct device *dev)¶
add a char device and it’s corresponding
struct device, linkink
Parameters
struct cdev *cdevthe cdev structure
struct device *devthe device structure
Description
cdev_device_add() adds the char device represented by cdev to the system,
just as cdev_add does. It then adds dev to the system using device_add
The dev_t for the char device will be taken from the struct device which
needs to be initialized first. This helper function correctly takes a
reference to the parent device so the parent will not get released until
all references to the cdev are released.
This helper uses dev->devt for the device number. If it is not set it will not add the cdev and it will be equivalent to device_add.
This function should be used whenever the struct cdev and the
struct device are members of the same structure whose lifetime is
managed by the struct device.
NOTE
Callers must assume that userspace was able to open the cdev and can call cdev fops callbacks at any time, even if this function fails.
Parameters
struct cdev *cdevthe cdev structure
struct device *devthe device structure
Description
cdev_device_del() is a helper function to call cdev_del and device_del.
It should be used whenever cdev_device_add is used.
If dev->devt is not set it will not remove the cdev and will be equivalent to device_del.
NOTE
This guarantees that associated sysfs callbacks are not running or runnable, however any cdevs already open will remain and their fops will still be callable even after this function returns.
-
void cdev_del(struct cdev *p)¶
remove a cdev from the system
Parameters
struct cdev *pthe cdev structure to be removed
Description
cdev_del() removes p from the system, possibly freeing the structure
itself.
NOTE
This guarantees that cdev device will no longer be able to be opened, however any cdevs already open will remain and their fops will still be callable even after cdev_del returns.
-
struct cdev *cdev_alloc(void)¶
allocate a cdev structure
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Allocates and returns a cdev structure, or NULL on failure.
Parameters
struct cdev *cdevthe structure to initialize
const struct file_operations *fopsthe file_operations for this device
Description
Initializes cdev, remembering fops, making it ready to add to the
system with cdev_add().
Clock Framework¶
The clock framework defines programming interfaces to support software
management of the system clock tree. This framework is widely used with
System-On-Chip (SOC) platforms to support power management and various
devices which may need custom clock rates. Note that these “clocks”
don’t relate to timekeeping or real time clocks (RTCs), each of which
have separate frameworks. These struct clk
instances may be used to manage for example a 96 MHz signal that is used
to shift bits into and out of peripherals or busses, or otherwise
trigger synchronous state machine transitions in system hardware.
Power management is supported by explicit software clock gating: unused clocks are disabled, so the system doesn’t waste power changing the state of transistors that aren’t in active use. On some systems this may be backed by hardware clock gating, where clocks are gated without being disabled in software. Sections of chips that are powered but not clocked may be able to retain their last state. This low power state is often called a retention mode. This mode still incurs leakage currents, especially with finer circuit geometries, but for CMOS circuits power is mostly used by clocked state changes.
Power-aware drivers only enable their clocks when the device they manage is in active use. Also, system sleep states often differ according to which clock domains are active: while a “standby” state may allow wakeup from several active domains, a “mem” (suspend-to-RAM) state may require a more wholesale shutdown of clocks derived from higher speed PLLs and oscillators, limiting the number of possible wakeup event sources. A driver’s suspend method may need to be aware of system-specific clock constraints on the target sleep state.
Some platforms support programmable clock generators. These can be used by external chips of various kinds, such as other CPUs, multimedia codecs, and devices with strict requirements for interface clocking.
-
struct clk_notifier¶
associate a clk with a notifier
Definition:
struct clk_notifier {
struct clk *clk;
struct srcu_notifier_head notifier_head;
struct list_head node;
};
Members
clkstruct clk * to associate the notifier with
notifier_heada blocking_notifier_head for this clk
nodelinked list pointers
Description
A list of struct clk_notifier is maintained by the notifier code.
An entry is created whenever code registers the first notifier on a
particular clk. Future notifiers on that clk are added to the
notifier_head.
-
struct clk_notifier_data¶
rate data to pass to the notifier callback
Definition:
struct clk_notifier_data {
struct clk *clk;
unsigned long old_rate;
unsigned long new_rate;
};
Members
clkstruct clk * being changed
old_rateprevious rate of this clk
new_ratenew rate of this clk
Description
For a pre-notifier, old_rate is the clk’s rate before this rate change, and new_rate is what the rate will be in the future. For a post-notifier, old_rate and new_rate are both set to the clk’s current rate (this was done to optimize the implementation).
-
struct clk_bulk_data¶
Data used for bulk clk operations.
Definition:
struct clk_bulk_data {
const char *id;
struct clk *clk;
};
Members
idclock consumer ID
clkstruct clk * to store the associated clock
Description
The CLK APIs provide a series of clk_bulk_() API calls as a convenience to consumers which require multiple clks. This structure is used to manage data for these calls.
-
int clk_notifier_register(struct clk *clk, struct notifier_block *nb)¶
register a clock rate-change notifier callback
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock whose rate we are interested in
struct notifier_block *nbnotifier block with callback function pointer
Description
ProTip: debugging across notifier chains can be frustrating. Make sure that your notifier callback function prints a nice big warning in case of failure.
-
int clk_notifier_unregister(struct clk *clk, struct notifier_block *nb)¶
unregister a clock rate-change notifier callback
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock whose rate we are no longer interested in
struct notifier_block *nbnotifier block which will be unregistered
-
int devm_clk_notifier_register(struct device *dev, struct clk *clk, struct notifier_block *nb)¶
register a managed rate-change notifier callback
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
struct clk *clkclock whose rate we are interested in
struct notifier_block *nbnotifier block with callback function pointer
Description
Returns 0 on success, -EERROR otherwise
-
long clk_get_accuracy(struct clk *clk)¶
obtain the clock accuracy in ppb (parts per billion) for a clock source.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
This gets the clock source accuracy expressed in ppb. A perfect clock returns 0.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock signal source
int degreesnumber of degrees the signal is shifted
Description
Shifts the phase of a clock signal by the specified degrees. Returns 0 on success, -EERROR otherwise.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock signal source
Description
Returns the phase shift of a clock node in degrees, otherwise returns -EERROR.
-
int clk_set_duty_cycle(struct clk *clk, unsigned int num, unsigned int den)¶
adjust the duty cycle ratio of a clock signal
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock signal source
unsigned int numnumerator of the duty cycle ratio to be applied
unsigned int dendenominator of the duty cycle ratio to be applied
Description
Adjust the duty cycle of a clock signal by the specified ratio. Returns 0 on success, -EERROR otherwise.
-
int clk_get_scaled_duty_cycle(struct clk *clk, unsigned int scale)¶
return the duty cycle ratio of a clock signal
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock signal source
unsigned int scalescaling factor to be applied to represent the ratio as an integer
Description
Returns the duty cycle ratio multiplied by the scale provided, otherwise returns -EERROR.
-
bool clk_is_match(const struct clk *p, const struct clk *q)¶
check if two clk’s point to the same hardware clock
Parameters
const struct clk *pclk compared against q
const struct clk *qclk compared against p
Description
Returns true if the two struct clk pointers both point to the same hardware
clock node. Put differently, returns true if p and q
share the same struct clk_core object.
Returns false otherwise. Note that two NULL clks are treated as matching.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
This function allows drivers to get exclusive control over the rate of a provider. It prevents any other consumer to execute, even indirectly, opereation which could alter the rate of the provider or cause glitches
If exlusivity is claimed more than once on clock, even by the same driver, the rate effectively gets locked as exclusivity can’t be preempted.
Must not be called from within atomic context.
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
-
int devm_clk_rate_exclusive_get(struct device *dev, struct clk *clk)¶
devm variant of clk_rate_exclusive_get
Parameters
struct device *devdevice the exclusivity is bound to
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
Calls clk_rate_exclusive_get() on clk and registers a devm cleanup handler
on dev to call clk_rate_exclusive_put().
Must not be called from within atomic context.
-
void clk_rate_exclusive_put(struct clk *clk)¶
release exclusivity over the rate control of a producer
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
This function allows drivers to release the exclusivity it previously got
from clk_rate_exclusive_get()
The caller must balance the number of clk_rate_exclusive_get() and
clk_rate_exclusive_put() calls.
Must not be called from within atomic context.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
This prepares the clock source for use.
Must not be called from within atomic context.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
Returns true if clk_prepare() implicitly enables the clock, effectively
making clk_enable()/clk_disable() no-ops, false otherwise.
This is of interest mainly to the power management code where actually disabling the clock also requires unpreparing it to have any material effect.
Regardless of the value returned here, the caller must always invoke
clk_enable() or clk_prepare_enable() and counterparts for usage counts
to be right.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
This undoes a previously prepared clock. The caller must balance the number of prepare and unprepare calls.
Must not be called from within atomic context.
-
struct clk *clk_get(struct device *dev, const char *id)¶
lookup and obtain a reference to a clock producer.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Description
Returns a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev and id to determine the clock consumer, and thereby
the clock producer. (IOW, id may be identical strings, but
clk_get may return different clock producers depending on dev.)
Drivers must assume that the clock source is not enabled.
clk_get should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
int clk_bulk_get(struct device *dev, int num_clks, struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
lookup and obtain a number of references to clock producer.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
struct clk_bulk_data *clksthe clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
This helper function allows drivers to get several clk consumers in one operation. If any of the clk cannot be acquired then any clks that were obtained will be freed before returning to the caller.
Returns 0 if all clocks specified in clk_bulk_data table are obtained
successfully, or valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno.
The implementation uses dev and clk_bulk_data.id to determine the
clock consumer, and thereby the clock producer.
The clock returned is stored in each clk_bulk_data.clk field.
Drivers must assume that the clock source is not enabled.
clk_bulk_get should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
int clk_bulk_get_all(struct device *dev, struct clk_bulk_data **clks)¶
lookup and obtain all available references to clock producer.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
struct clk_bulk_data **clkspointer to the clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
This helper function allows drivers to get all clk consumers in one operation. If any of the clk cannot be acquired then any clks that were obtained will be freed before returning to the caller.
Returns a positive value for the number of clocks obtained while the clock references are stored in the clk_bulk_data table in clks field. Returns 0 if there’re none and a negative value if something failed.
Drivers must assume that the clock source is not enabled.
clk_bulk_get should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
int clk_bulk_get_optional(struct device *dev, int num_clks, struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
lookup and obtain a number of references to clock producer
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
struct clk_bulk_data *clksthe clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
Behaves the same as clk_bulk_get() except where there is no clock producer.
In this case, instead of returning -ENOENT, the function returns 0 and
NULL for a clk for which a clock producer could not be determined.
-
int devm_clk_bulk_get(struct device *dev, int num_clks, struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
managed get multiple clk consumers
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
struct clk_bulk_data *clksthe clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
Return 0 on success, an errno on failure.
This helper function allows drivers to get several clk consumers in one operation with management, the clks will automatically be freed when the device is unbound.
-
int devm_clk_bulk_get_optional(struct device *dev, int num_clks, struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
managed get multiple optional consumer clocks
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
struct clk_bulk_data *clkspointer to the clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
Behaves the same as devm_clk_bulk_get() except where there is no clock
producer. In this case, instead of returning -ENOENT, the function returns
NULL for given clk. It is assumed all clocks in clk_bulk_data are optional.
Returns 0 if all clocks specified in clk_bulk_data table are obtained
successfully or for any clk there was no clk provider available, otherwise
returns valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno.
The implementation uses dev and clk_bulk_data.id to determine the
clock consumer, and thereby the clock producer.
The clock returned is stored in each clk_bulk_data.clk field.
Drivers must assume that the clock source is not enabled.
clk_bulk_get should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
int devm_clk_bulk_get_all(struct device *dev, struct clk_bulk_data **clks)¶
managed get multiple clk consumers
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
struct clk_bulk_data **clkspointer to the clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
Returns a positive value for the number of clocks obtained while the clock references are stored in the clk_bulk_data table in clks field. Returns 0 if there’re none and a negative value if something failed.
This helper function allows drivers to get several clk consumers in one operation with management, the clks will automatically be freed when the device is unbound.
-
int devm_clk_bulk_get_all_enable(struct device *dev, struct clk_bulk_data **clks)¶
Get and enable all clocks of the consumer (managed)
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
struct clk_bulk_data **clkspointer to the clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
This helper function allows drivers to get all clocks of the consumer and enables them in one operation with management. The clks will automatically be disabled and freed when the device is unbound.
-
struct clk *devm_clk_get(struct device *dev, const char *id)¶
lookup and obtain a managed reference to a clock producer.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Context
May sleep.
Return
a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev and id to determine the clock consumer, and thereby
the clock producer. (IOW, id may be identical strings, but
clk_get may return different clock producers depending on dev.)
Description
Drivers must assume that the clock source is neither prepared nor enabled.
The clock will automatically be freed when the device is unbound from the bus.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Context
May sleep.
Return
a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev and id to determine the clock consumer, and thereby
the clock producer. (IOW, id may be identical strings, but
clk_get may return different clock producers depending on dev.)
Description
The returned clk (if valid) is prepared. Drivers must however assume that the clock is not enabled.
The clock will automatically be unprepared and freed when the device is unbound from the bus.
-
struct clk *devm_clk_get_enabled(struct device *dev, const char *id)¶
devm_clk_get()+ clk_prepare_enable()
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Context
May sleep.
Return
a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev and id to determine the clock consumer, and thereby
the clock producer. (IOW, id may be identical strings, but
clk_get may return different clock producers depending on dev.)
Description
The returned clk (if valid) is prepared and enabled.
The clock will automatically be disabled, unprepared and freed when the device is unbound from the bus.
-
struct clk *devm_clk_get_optional(struct device *dev, const char *id)¶
lookup and obtain a managed reference to an optional clock producer.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Context
May sleep.
Return
a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev and id to determine the clock consumer, and thereby
the clock producer. If no such clk is found, it returns NULL
which serves as a dummy clk. That’s the only difference compared
to devm_clk_get().
Description
Drivers must assume that the clock source is neither prepared nor enabled.
The clock will automatically be freed when the device is unbound from the bus.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Context
May sleep.
Return
a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev and id to determine the clock consumer, and thereby
the clock producer. If no such clk is found, it returns NULL
which serves as a dummy clk. That’s the only difference compared
to devm_clk_get_prepared().
Description
The returned clk (if valid) is prepared. Drivers must however assume that the clock is not enabled.
The clock will automatically be unprepared and freed when the device is unbound from the bus.
-
struct clk *devm_clk_get_optional_enabled(struct device *dev, const char *id)¶
devm_clk_get_optional()+ clk_prepare_enable()
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Context
May sleep.
Return
a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev and id to determine the clock consumer, and thereby
the clock producer. If no such clk is found, it returns NULL
which serves as a dummy clk. That’s the only difference compared
to devm_clk_get_enabled().
Description
The returned clk (if valid) is prepared and enabled.
The clock will automatically be disabled, unprepared and freed when the device is unbound from the bus.
-
struct clk *devm_get_clk_from_child(struct device *dev, struct device_node *np, const char *con_id)¶
lookup and obtain a managed reference to a clock producer from child node.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
struct device_node *nppointer to clock consumer node
const char *con_idclock consumer ID
Description
This function parses the clocks, and uses them to look up the struct clk from the registered list of clock providers by using np and con_id
The clock will automatically be freed when the device is unbound from the bus.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
If the clock can not be enabled/disabled, this should return success.
May be called from atomic contexts.
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
-
int clk_bulk_enable(int num_clks, const struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
inform the system when the set of clks should be running.
Parameters
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
const struct clk_bulk_data *clksthe clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
May be called from atomic contexts.
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
Inform the system that a clock source is no longer required by a driver and may be shut down.
May be called from atomic contexts.
Implementation detail: if the clock source is shared between
multiple drivers, clk_enable() calls must be balanced by the
same number of clk_disable() calls for the clock source to be
disabled.
-
void clk_bulk_disable(int num_clks, const struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
inform the system when the set of clks is no longer required.
Parameters
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
const struct clk_bulk_data *clksthe clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Description
Inform the system that a set of clks is no longer required by a driver and may be shut down.
May be called from atomic contexts.
Implementation detail: if the set of clks is shared between
multiple drivers, clk_bulk_enable() calls must be balanced by the
same number of clk_bulk_disable() calls for the clock source to be
disabled.
-
unsigned long clk_get_rate(struct clk *clk)¶
obtain the current clock rate (in Hz) for a clock source. This is only valid once the clock source has been enabled.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Note
drivers must ensure that all clk_enable calls made on this clock source are balanced by clk_disable calls prior to calling this function.
Description
clk_put should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
void clk_bulk_put(int num_clks, struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
“free” the clock source
Parameters
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
struct clk_bulk_data *clksthe clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Note
drivers must ensure that all clk_bulk_enable calls made on this clock source are balanced by clk_bulk_disable calls prior to calling this function.
Description
clk_bulk_put should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
void clk_bulk_put_all(int num_clks, struct clk_bulk_data *clks)¶
“free” all the clock source
Parameters
int num_clksthe number of clk_bulk_data
struct clk_bulk_data *clksthe clk_bulk_data table of consumer
Note
drivers must ensure that all clk_bulk_enable calls made on this clock source are balanced by clk_bulk_disable calls prior to calling this function.
Description
clk_bulk_put_all should not be called from within interrupt context.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice used to acquire the clock
struct clk *clkclock source acquired with
devm_clk_get()
Note
drivers must ensure that all clk_enable calls made on this clock source are balanced by clk_disable calls prior to calling this function.
Description
clk_put should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
long clk_round_rate(struct clk *clk, unsigned long rate)¶
adjust a rate to the exact rate a clock can provide
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
unsigned long ratedesired clock rate in Hz
Description
This answers the question “if I were to pass rate to clk_set_rate(),
what clock rate would I end up with?” without changing the hardware
in any way. In other words:
rate = clk_round_rate(clk, r);
and:
clk_set_rate(clk, r); rate = clk_get_rate(clk);
are equivalent except the former does not modify the clock hardware in any way.
Returns rounded clock rate in Hz, or negative errno.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
unsigned long ratedesired clock rate in Hz
Description
Updating the rate starts at the top-most affected clock and then walks the tree down to the bottom-most clock that needs updating.
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
-
int clk_set_rate_exclusive(struct clk *clk, unsigned long rate)¶
set the clock rate and claim exclusivity over clock source
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
unsigned long ratedesired clock rate in Hz
Description
This helper function allows drivers to atomically set the rate of a producer and claim exclusivity over the rate control of the producer.
It is essentially a combination of clk_set_rate() and
clk_rate_exclusite_get(). Caller must balance this call with a call to
clk_rate_exclusive_put()
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
-
bool clk_has_parent(const struct clk *clk, const struct clk *parent)¶
check if a clock is a possible parent for another
Parameters
const struct clk *clkclock source
const struct clk *parentparent clock source
Description
This function can be used in drivers that need to check that a clock can be the parent of another without actually changing the parent.
Returns true if parent is a possible parent for clk, false otherwise.
-
int clk_set_rate_range(struct clk *clk, unsigned long min, unsigned long max)¶
set a rate range for a clock source
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
unsigned long mindesired minimum clock rate in Hz, inclusive
unsigned long maxdesired maximum clock rate in Hz, inclusive
Description
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
-
int clk_set_min_rate(struct clk *clk, unsigned long rate)¶
set a minimum clock rate for a clock source
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
unsigned long ratedesired minimum clock rate in Hz, inclusive
Description
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
-
int clk_set_max_rate(struct clk *clk, unsigned long rate)¶
set a maximum clock rate for a clock source
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
unsigned long ratedesired maximum clock rate in Hz, inclusive
Description
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
struct clk *parentparent clock source
Description
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
Returns struct clk corresponding to parent clock source, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno.
-
struct clk *clk_get_sys(const char *dev_id, const char *con_id)¶
get a clock based upon the device name
Parameters
const char *dev_iddevice name
const char *con_idconnection ID
Description
Returns a struct clk corresponding to the clock producer, or
valid IS_ERR() condition containing errno. The implementation
uses dev_id and con_id to determine the clock consumer, and
thereby the clock producer. In contrast to clk_get() this function
takes the device name instead of the device itself for identification.
Drivers must assume that the clock source is not enabled.
clk_get_sys should not be called from within interrupt context.
-
int clk_save_context(void)¶
save clock context for poweroff
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Saves the context of the clock register for powerstates in which the contents of the registers will be lost. Occurs deep within the suspend code so locking is not necessary.
-
void clk_restore_context(void)¶
restore clock context after poweroff
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
This occurs with all clocks enabled. Occurs deep within the resume code so locking is not necessary.
Parameters
struct clk *clkclock source
Description
Returns success (0) or negative errno.
-
struct clk *clk_get_optional(struct device *dev, const char *id)¶
lookup and obtain a reference to an optional clock producer.
Parameters
struct device *devdevice for clock “consumer”
const char *idclock consumer ID
Description
Behaves the same as clk_get() except where there is no clock producer. In
this case, instead of returning -ENOENT, the function returns NULL.
Synchronization Primitives¶
Read-Copy Update (RCU)¶
-
bool same_state_synchronize_rcu(unsigned long oldstate1, unsigned long oldstate2)¶
Are two old-state values identical?
Parameters
unsigned long oldstate1First old-state value.
unsigned long oldstate2Second old-state value.
Description
The two old-state values must have been obtained from either
get_state_synchronize_rcu(), start_poll_synchronize_rcu(), or
get_completed_synchronize_rcu(). Returns true if the two values are
identical and false otherwise. This allows structures whose lifetimes
are tracked by old-state values to push these values to a list header,
allowing those structures to be slightly smaller.
-
bool rcu_trace_implies_rcu_gp(void)¶
does an RCU Tasks Trace grace period imply an RCU grace period?
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
As an accident of implementation, an RCU Tasks Trace grace period also acts as an RCU grace period. However, this could change at any time. Code relying on this accident must call this function to verify that this accident is still happening.
You have been warned!
-
cond_resched_tasks_rcu_qs¶
cond_resched_tasks_rcu_qs ()
Report potential quiescent states to RCU
Parameters
Description
This macro resembles cond_resched(), except that it is defined to report potential quiescent states to RCU-tasks even if the cond_resched() machinery were to be shut off, as some advocate for PREEMPTION kernels.
-
rcu_softirq_qs_periodic¶
rcu_softirq_qs_periodic (old_ts)
Report RCU and RCU-Tasks quiescent states
Parameters
old_tsjiffies at start of processing.
Description
This helper is for long-running softirq handlers, such as NAPI threads in
networking. The caller should initialize the variable passed in as old_ts
at the beginning of the softirq handler. When invoked frequently, this macro
will invoke rcu_softirq_qs() every 100 milliseconds thereafter, which will
provide both RCU and RCU-Tasks quiescent states. Note that this macro
modifies its old_ts argument.
Because regions of code that have disabled softirq act as RCU read-side critical sections, this macro should be invoked with softirq (and preemption) enabled.
The macro is not needed when CONFIG_PREEMPT_RT is defined. RT kernels would have more chance to invoke schedule() calls and provide necessary quiescent states. As a contrast, calling cond_resched() only won’t achieve the same effect because cond_resched() does not provide RCU-Tasks quiescent states.
-
RCU_LOCKDEP_WARN¶
RCU_LOCKDEP_WARN (c, s)
emit lockdep splat if specified condition is met
Parameters
ccondition to check
sinformative message
Description
This checks debug_lockdep_rcu_enabled() before checking (c) to
prevent early boot splats due to lockdep not yet being initialized,
and rechecks it after checking (c) to prevent false-positive splats
due to races with lockdep being disabled. See commit 3066820034b5dd
(“rcu: Reject RCU_LOCKDEP_WARN() false positives”) for more detail.
-
unrcu_pointer¶
unrcu_pointer (p)
mark a pointer as not being RCU protected
Parameters
ppointer needing to lose its __rcu property
Description
Converts p from an __rcu pointer to a __kernel pointer. This allows an __rcu pointer to be used with xchg() and friends.
-
RCU_INITIALIZER¶
RCU_INITIALIZER (v)
statically initialize an RCU-protected global variable
Parameters
vThe value to statically initialize with.
-
rcu_assign_pointer¶
rcu_assign_pointer (p, v)
assign to RCU-protected pointer
Parameters
ppointer to assign to
vvalue to assign (publish)
Description
Assigns the specified value to the specified RCU-protected pointer, ensuring that any concurrent RCU readers will see any prior initialization.
Inserts memory barriers on architectures that require them (which is most of them), and also prevents the compiler from reordering the code that initializes the structure after the pointer assignment. More importantly, this call documents which pointers will be dereferenced by RCU read-side code.
In some special cases, you may use RCU_INIT_POINTER() instead
of rcu_assign_pointer(). RCU_INIT_POINTER() is a bit faster due
to the fact that it does not constrain either the CPU or the compiler.
That said, using RCU_INIT_POINTER() when you should have used
rcu_assign_pointer() is a very bad thing that results in
impossible-to-diagnose memory corruption. So please be careful.
See the RCU_INIT_POINTER() comment header for details.
Note that rcu_assign_pointer() evaluates each of its arguments only
once, appearances notwithstanding. One of the “extra” evaluations
is in typeof() and the other visible only to sparse (__CHECKER__),
neither of which actually execute the argument. As with most cpp
macros, this execute-arguments-only-once property is important, so
please be careful when making changes to rcu_assign_pointer() and the
other macros that it invokes.
-
rcu_replace_pointer¶
rcu_replace_pointer (rcu_ptr, ptr, c)
replace an RCU pointer, returning its old value
Parameters
rcu_ptrRCU pointer, whose old value is returned
ptrregular pointer
cthe lockdep conditions under which the dereference will take place
Description
Perform a replacement, where rcu_ptr is an RCU-annotated
pointer and c is the lockdep argument that is passed to the
rcu_dereference_protected() call used to read that pointer. The old
value of rcu_ptr is returned, and rcu_ptr is set to ptr.
-
rcu_access_pointer¶
rcu_access_pointer (p)
fetch RCU pointer with no dereferencing
Parameters
pThe pointer to read
Description
Return the value of the specified RCU-protected pointer, but omit the
lockdep checks for being in an RCU read-side critical section. This is
useful when the value of this pointer is accessed, but the pointer is
not dereferenced, for example, when testing an RCU-protected pointer
against NULL. Although rcu_access_pointer() may also be used in cases
where update-side locks prevent the value of the pointer from changing,
you should instead use rcu_dereference_protected() for this use case.
Within an RCU read-side critical section, there is little reason to
use rcu_access_pointer().
It is usually best to test the rcu_access_pointer() return value
directly in order to avoid accidental dereferences being introduced
by later inattentive changes. In other words, assigning the
rcu_access_pointer() return value to a local variable results in an
accident waiting to happen.
It is also permissible to use rcu_access_pointer() when read-side
access to the pointer was removed at least one grace period ago, as is
the case in the context of the RCU callback that is freeing up the data,
or after a synchronize_rcu() returns. This can be useful when tearing
down multi-linked structures after a grace period has elapsed. However,
rcu_dereference_protected() is normally preferred for this use case.
-
rcu_dereference_check¶
rcu_dereference_check (p, c)
rcu_dereference with debug checking
Parameters
pThe pointer to read, prior to dereferencing
cThe conditions under which the dereference will take place
Description
Do an rcu_dereference(), but check that the conditions under which the
dereference will take place are correct. Typically the conditions
indicate the various locking conditions that should be held at that
point. The check should return true if the conditions are satisfied.
An implicit check for being in an RCU read-side critical section
(rcu_read_lock()) is included.
For example:
bar = rcu_dereference_check(foo->bar, lockdep_is_held(
foo->lock));
could be used to indicate to lockdep that foo->bar may only be dereferenced
if either rcu_read_lock() is held, or that the lock required to replace
the bar struct at foo->bar is held.
Note that the list of conditions may also include indications of when a lock need not be held, for example during initialisation or destruction of the target struct:
- bar = rcu_dereference_check(foo->bar, lockdep_is_held(
foo->lock) ||atomic_read(
foo->usage) == 0);
Inserts memory barriers on architectures that require them (currently only the Alpha), prevents the compiler from refetching (and from merging fetches), and, more importantly, documents exactly which pointers are protected by RCU and checks that the pointer is annotated as __rcu.
-
rcu_dereference_bh_check¶
rcu_dereference_bh_check (p, c)
rcu_dereference_bh with debug checking
Parameters
pThe pointer to read, prior to dereferencing
cThe conditions under which the dereference will take place
Description
This is the RCU-bh counterpart to rcu_dereference_check(). However,
please note that starting in v5.0 kernels, vanilla RCU grace periods
wait for local_bh_disable() regions of code in addition to regions of
code demarked by rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock(). This means
that synchronize_rcu(), call_rcu, and friends all take not only
rcu_read_lock() but also rcu_read_lock_bh() into account.
-
rcu_dereference_sched_check¶
rcu_dereference_sched_check (p, c)
rcu_dereference_sched with debug checking
Parameters
pThe pointer to read, prior to dereferencing
cThe conditions under which the dereference will take place
Description
This is the RCU-sched counterpart to rcu_dereference_check().
However, please note that starting in v5.0 kernels, vanilla RCU grace
periods wait for preempt_disable() regions of code in addition to
regions of code demarked by rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock().
This means that synchronize_rcu(), call_rcu, and friends all take not
only rcu_read_lock() but also rcu_read_lock_sched() into account.
-
rcu_dereference_protected¶
rcu_dereference_protected (p, c)
fetch RCU pointer when updates prevented
Parameters
pThe pointer to read, prior to dereferencing
cThe conditions under which the dereference will take place
Description
Return the value of the specified RCU-protected pointer, but omit the READ_ONCE(). This is useful in cases where update-side locks prevent the value of the pointer from changing. Please note that this primitive does not prevent the compiler from repeating this reference or combining it with other references, so it should not be used without protection of appropriate locks.
This function is only for update-side use. Using this function
when protected only by rcu_read_lock() will result in infrequent
but very ugly failures.
-
rcu_dereference¶
rcu_dereference (p)
fetch RCU-protected pointer for dereferencing
Parameters
pThe pointer to read, prior to dereferencing
Description
This is a simple wrapper around rcu_dereference_check().
-
rcu_dereference_bh¶
rcu_dereference_bh (p)
fetch an RCU-bh-protected pointer for dereferencing
Parameters
pThe pointer to read, prior to dereferencing
Description
Makes rcu_dereference_check() do the dirty work.
-
rcu_dereference_sched¶
rcu_dereference_sched (p)
fetch RCU-sched-protected pointer for dereferencing
Parameters
pThe pointer to read, prior to dereferencing
Description
Makes rcu_dereference_check() do the dirty work.
-
rcu_pointer_handoff¶
rcu_pointer_handoff (p)
Hand off a pointer from RCU to other mechanism
Parameters
pThe pointer to hand off
Description
This is simply an identity function, but it documents where a pointer is handed off from RCU to some other synchronization mechanism, for example, reference counting or locking. In C11, it would map to kill_dependency(). It could be used as follows:
rcu_read_lock();
p = rcu_dereference(gp);
long_lived = is_long_lived(p);
if (long_lived) {
if (!atomic_inc_not_zero(p->refcnt))
long_lived = false;
else
p = rcu_pointer_handoff(p);
}
rcu_read_unlock();
-
void rcu_read_lock(void)¶
mark the beginning of an RCU read-side critical section
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
When synchronize_rcu() is invoked on one CPU while other CPUs
are within RCU read-side critical sections, then the
synchronize_rcu() is guaranteed to block until after all the other
CPUs exit their critical sections. Similarly, if call_rcu() is invoked
on one CPU while other CPUs are within RCU read-side critical
sections, invocation of the corresponding RCU callback is deferred
until after the all the other CPUs exit their critical sections.
In v5.0 and later kernels, synchronize_rcu() and call_rcu() also
wait for regions of code with preemption disabled, including regions of
code with interrupts or softirqs disabled. In pre-v5.0 kernels, which
define synchronize_sched(), only code enclosed within rcu_read_lock()
and rcu_read_unlock() are guaranteed to be waited for.
Note, however, that RCU callbacks are permitted to run concurrently
with new RCU read-side critical sections. One way that this can happen
is via the following sequence of events: (1) CPU 0 enters an RCU
read-side critical section, (2) CPU 1 invokes call_rcu() to register
an RCU callback, (3) CPU 0 exits the RCU read-side critical section,
(4) CPU 2 enters a RCU read-side critical section, (5) the RCU
callback is invoked. This is legal, because the RCU read-side critical
section that was running concurrently with the call_rcu() (and which
therefore might be referencing something that the corresponding RCU
callback would free up) has completed before the corresponding
RCU callback is invoked.
RCU read-side critical sections may be nested. Any deferred actions will be deferred until the outermost RCU read-side critical section completes.
You can avoid reading and understanding the next paragraph by
following this rule: don’t put anything in an rcu_read_lock() RCU
read-side critical section that would block in a !PREEMPTION kernel.
But if you want the full story, read on!
In non-preemptible RCU implementations (pure TREE_RCU and TINY_RCU), it is illegal to block while in an RCU read-side critical section. In preemptible RCU implementations (PREEMPT_RCU) in CONFIG_PREEMPTION kernel builds, RCU read-side critical sections may be preempted, but explicit blocking is illegal. Finally, in preemptible RCU implementations in real-time (with -rt patchset) kernel builds, RCU read-side critical sections may be preempted and they may also block, but only when acquiring spinlocks that are subject to priority inheritance.
-
void rcu_read_unlock(void)¶
marks the end of an RCU read-side critical section.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
In almost all situations, rcu_read_unlock() is immune from deadlock.
In recent kernels that have consolidated synchronize_sched() and
synchronize_rcu_bh() into synchronize_rcu(), this deadlock immunity
also extends to the scheduler’s runqueue and priority-inheritance
spinlocks, courtesy of the quiescent-state deferral that is carried
out when rcu_read_unlock() is invoked with interrupts disabled.
See rcu_read_lock() for more information.
-
void rcu_read_lock_bh(void)¶
mark the beginning of an RCU-bh critical section
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
This is equivalent to rcu_read_lock(), but also disables softirqs.
Note that anything else that disables softirqs can also serve as an RCU
read-side critical section. However, please note that this equivalence
applies only to v5.0 and later. Before v5.0, rcu_read_lock() and
rcu_read_lock_bh() were unrelated.
Note that rcu_read_lock_bh() and the matching rcu_read_unlock_bh()
must occur in the same context, for example, it is illegal to invoke
rcu_read_unlock_bh() from one task if the matching rcu_read_lock_bh()
was invoked from some other task.
-
void rcu_read_unlock_bh(void)¶
marks the end of a softirq-only RCU critical section
-
void rcu_read_lock_sched(void)¶
mark the beginning of a RCU-sched critical section
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
This is equivalent to rcu_read_lock(), but also disables preemption.
Read-side critical sections can also be introduced by anything else that
disables preemption, including local_irq_disable() and friends. However,
please note that the equivalence to rcu_read_lock() applies only to
v5.0 and later. Before v5.0, rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_lock_sched()
were unrelated.
Note that rcu_read_lock_sched() and the matching rcu_read_unlock_sched()
must occur in the same context, for example, it is illegal to invoke
rcu_read_unlock_sched() from process context if the matching
rcu_read_lock_sched() was invoked from an NMI handler.
-
void rcu_read_unlock_sched(void)¶
marks the end of a RCU-classic critical section
-
RCU_INIT_POINTER¶
RCU_INIT_POINTER (p, v)
initialize an RCU protected pointer
Parameters
pThe pointer to be initialized.
vThe value to initialized the pointer to.
Description
Initialize an RCU-protected pointer in special cases where readers do not need ordering constraints on the CPU or the compiler. These special cases are:
This use of
RCU_INIT_POINTER()is NULLing out the pointer orThe caller has taken whatever steps are required to prevent RCU readers from concurrently accessing this pointer or
The referenced data structure has already been exposed to readers either at compile time or via
rcu_assign_pointer()andYou have not made any reader-visible changes to this structure since then or
It is OK for readers accessing this structure from its new location to see the old state of the structure. (For example, the changes were to statistical counters or to other state where exact synchronization is not required.)
Failure to follow these rules governing use of RCU_INIT_POINTER() will
result in impossible-to-diagnose memory corruption. As in the structures
will look OK in crash dumps, but any concurrent RCU readers might
see pre-initialized values of the referenced data structure. So
please be very careful how you use RCU_INIT_POINTER()!!!
If you are creating an RCU-protected linked structure that is accessed
by a single external-to-structure RCU-protected pointer, then you may
use RCU_INIT_POINTER() to initialize the internal RCU-protected
pointers, but you must use rcu_assign_pointer() to initialize the
external-to-structure pointer after you have completely initialized
the reader-accessible portions of the linked structure.
Note that unlike rcu_assign_pointer(), RCU_INIT_POINTER() provides no
ordering guarantees for either the CPU or the compiler.
-
RCU_POINTER_INITIALIZER¶
RCU_POINTER_INITIALIZER (p, v)
statically initialize an RCU protected pointer
Parameters
pThe pointer to be initialized.
vThe value to initialized the pointer to.
Description
GCC-style initialization for an RCU-protected pointer in a structure field.
-
kfree_rcu¶
kfree_rcu (ptr, rhf)
kfree an object after a grace period.
Parameters
ptrpointer to kfree for double-argument invocations.
rhfthe name of the struct rcu_head within the type of ptr.
Description
Many rcu callbacks functions just call kfree() on the base structure.
These functions are trivial, but their size adds up, and furthermore
when they are used in a kernel module, that module must invoke the
high-latency rcu_barrier() function at module-unload time.
The kfree_rcu() function handles this issue. Rather than encoding a
function address in the embedded rcu_head structure, kfree_rcu() instead
encodes the offset of the rcu_head structure within the base structure.
Because the functions are not allowed in the low-order 4096 bytes of
kernel virtual memory, offsets up to 4095 bytes can be accommodated.
If the offset is larger than 4095 bytes, a compile-time error will
be generated in kvfree_rcu_arg_2(). If this error is triggered, you can
either fall back to use of call_rcu() or rearrange the structure to
position the rcu_head structure into the first 4096 bytes.
The object to be freed can be allocated either by kmalloc() or
kmem_cache_alloc().
Note that the allowable offset might decrease in the future.
The BUILD_BUG_ON check must not involve any function calls, hence the checks are done in macros here.
-
kfree_rcu_mightsleep¶
kfree_rcu_mightsleep (ptr)
kfree an object after a grace period.
Parameters
ptrpointer to kfree for single-argument invocations.
Description
When it comes to head-less variant, only one argument is passed and that is just a pointer which has to be freed after a grace period. Therefore the semantic is
kfree_rcu_mightsleep(ptr);
where ptr is the pointer to be freed by kvfree().
Please note, head-less way of freeing is permitted to
use from a context that has to follow might_sleep()
annotation. Otherwise, please switch and embed the
rcu_head structure within the type of ptr.
-
void rcu_head_init(struct rcu_head *rhp)¶
Initialize rcu_head for
rcu_head_after_call_rcu()
Parameters
struct rcu_head *rhpThe rcu_head structure to initialize.
Description
If you intend to invoke rcu_head_after_call_rcu() to test whether a
given rcu_head structure has already been passed to call_rcu(), then
you must also invoke this rcu_head_init() function on it just after
allocating that structure. Calls to this function must not race with
calls to call_rcu(), rcu_head_after_call_rcu(), or callback invocation.
-
bool rcu_head_after_call_rcu(struct rcu_head *rhp, rcu_callback_t f)¶
Has this rcu_head been passed to
call_rcu()?
Parameters
struct rcu_head *rhpThe rcu_head structure to test.
rcu_callback_t fThe function passed to
call_rcu()along with rhp.
Description
Returns true if the rhp has been passed to call_rcu() with func,
and false otherwise. Emits a warning in any other case, including
the case where rhp has already been invoked after a grace period.
Calls to this function must not race with callback invocation. One way
to avoid such races is to enclose the call to rcu_head_after_call_rcu()
in an RCU read-side critical section that includes a read-side fetch
of the pointer to the structure containing rhp.
-
void rcu_softirq_qs(void)¶
Provide a set of RCU quiescent states in softirq processing
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Mark a quiescent state for RCU, Tasks RCU, and Tasks Trace RCU. This is a special-purpose function to be used in the softirq infrastructure and perhaps the occasional long-running softirq handler.
Note that from RCU’s viewpoint, a call to rcu_softirq_qs() is
equivalent to momentarily completely enabling preemption. For
example, given this code:
local_bh_disable();
do_something();
rcu_softirq_qs(); // A
do_something_else();
local_bh_enable(); // B
A call to synchronize_rcu() that began concurrently with the
call to do_something() would be guaranteed to wait only until
execution reached statement A. Without that rcu_softirq_qs(),
that same synchronize_rcu() would instead be guaranteed to wait
until execution reached statement B.
-
int rcu_is_cpu_rrupt_from_idle(void)¶
see if ‘interrupted’ from idle
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
If the current CPU is idle and running at a first-level (not nested) interrupt, or directly, from idle, return true.
The caller must have at least disabled IRQs.
-
void rcu_irq_exit_check_preempt(void)¶
Validate that scheduling is possible
Parameters
voidno arguments
-
void __rcu_irq_enter_check_tick(void)¶
Enable scheduler tick on CPU if RCU needs it.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
The scheduler tick is not normally enabled when CPUs enter the kernel from nohz_full userspace execution. After all, nohz_full userspace execution is an RCU quiescent state and the time executing in the kernel is quite short. Except of course when it isn’t. And it is not hard to cause a large system to spend tens of seconds or even minutes looping in the kernel, which can cause a number of problems, include RCU CPU stall warnings.
Therefore, if a nohz_full CPU fails to report a quiescent state in a timely manner, the RCU grace-period kthread sets that CPU’s ->rcu_urgent_qs flag with the expectation that the next interrupt or exception will invoke this function, which will turn on the scheduler tick, which will enable RCU to detect that CPU’s quiescent states, for example, due to cond_resched() calls in CONFIG_PREEMPT=n kernels. The tick will be disabled once a quiescent state is reported for this CPU.
Of course, in carefully tuned systems, there might never be an interrupt or exception. In that case, the RCU grace-period kthread will eventually cause one to happen. However, in less carefully controlled environments, this function allows RCU to get what it needs without creating otherwise useless interruptions.
-
notrace bool rcu_is_watching(void)¶
RCU read-side critical sections permitted on current CPU?
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Return true if RCU is watching the running CPU and false otherwise. An true return means that this CPU can safely enter RCU read-side critical sections.
Although calls to rcu_is_watching() from most parts of the kernel
will return true, there are important exceptions. For example, if the
current CPU is deep within its idle loop, in kernel entry/exit code,
or offline, rcu_is_watching() will return false.
Make notrace because it can be called by the internal functions of ftrace, and making this notrace removes unnecessary recursion calls.
-
void call_rcu_hurry(struct rcu_head *head, rcu_callback_t func)¶
Queue RCU callback for invocation after grace period, and flush all lazy callbacks (including the new one) to the main ->cblist while doing so.
Parameters
struct rcu_head *headstructure to be used for queueing the RCU updates.
rcu_callback_t funcactual callback function to be invoked after the grace period
Description
The callback function will be invoked some time after a full grace period elapses, in other words after all pre-existing RCU read-side critical sections have completed.
Use this API instead of call_rcu() if you don’t want the callback to be
invoked after very long periods of time, which can happen on systems without
memory pressure and on systems which are lightly loaded or mostly idle.
This function will cause callbacks to be invoked sooner than later at the
expense of extra power. Other than that, this function is identical to, and
reuses call_rcu()’s logic. Refer to call_rcu() for more details about memory
ordering and other functionality.
-
void call_rcu(struct rcu_head *head, rcu_callback_t func)¶
Queue an RCU callback for invocation after a grace period. By default the callbacks are ‘lazy’ and are kept hidden from the main ->cblist to prevent starting of grace periods too soon. If you desire grace periods to start very soon, use
call_rcu_hurry().
Parameters
struct rcu_head *headstructure to be used for queueing the RCU updates.
rcu_callback_t funcactual callback function to be invoked after the grace period
Description
The callback function will be invoked some time after a full grace
period elapses, in other words after all pre-existing RCU read-side
critical sections have completed. However, the callback function
might well execute concurrently with RCU read-side critical sections
that started after call_rcu() was invoked.
RCU read-side critical sections are delimited by rcu_read_lock()
and rcu_read_unlock(), and may be nested. In addition, but only in
v5.0 and later, regions of code across which interrupts, preemption,
or softirqs have been disabled also serve as RCU read-side critical
sections. This includes hardware interrupt handlers, softirq handlers,
and NMI handlers.
Note that all CPUs must agree that the grace period extended beyond
all pre-existing RCU read-side critical section. On systems with more
than one CPU, this means that when “func()” is invoked, each CPU is
guaranteed to have executed a full memory barrier since the end of its
last RCU read-side critical section whose beginning preceded the call
to call_rcu(). It also means that each CPU executing an RCU read-side
critical section that continues beyond the start of “func()” must have
executed a memory barrier after the call_rcu() but before the beginning
of that RCU read-side critical section. Note that these guarantees
include CPUs that are offline, idle, or executing in user mode, as
well as CPUs that are executing in the kernel.
Furthermore, if CPU A invoked call_rcu() and CPU B invoked the
resulting RCU callback function “func()”, then both CPU A and CPU B are
guaranteed to execute a full memory barrier during the time interval
between the call to call_rcu() and the invocation of “func()” -- even
if CPU A and CPU B are the same CPU (but again only if the system has
more than one CPU).
Implementation of these memory-ordering guarantees is described here: A Tour Through TREE_RCU’s Grace-Period Memory Ordering.
-
struct kvfree_rcu_bulk_data¶
single block to store kvfree_rcu() pointers
Definition:
struct kvfree_rcu_bulk_data {
struct list_head list;
struct rcu_gp_oldstate gp_snap;
unsigned long nr_records;
void *records[];
};
Members
listList node. All blocks are linked between each other
gp_snapSnapshot of RCU state for objects placed to this bulk
nr_recordsNumber of active pointers in the array
recordsArray of the kvfree_rcu() pointers
-
struct kfree_rcu_cpu_work¶
single batch of
kfree_rcu()requests
Definition:
struct kfree_rcu_cpu_work {
struct rcu_work rcu_work;
struct rcu_head *head_free;
struct rcu_gp_oldstate head_free_gp_snap;
struct list_head bulk_head_free[FREE_N_CHANNELS];
struct kfree_rcu_cpu *krcp;
};
Members
rcu_workLet
queue_rcu_work()invoke workqueue handler after grace periodhead_freeList of
kfree_rcu()objects waiting for a grace periodhead_free_gp_snapGrace-period snapshot to check for attempted premature frees.
bulk_head_freeBulk-List of kvfree_rcu() objects waiting for a grace period
krcpPointer to kfree_rcu_cpu structure
-
struct kfree_rcu_cpu¶
batch up
kfree_rcu()requests for RCU grace period
Definition:
struct kfree_rcu_cpu {
struct rcu_head *head;
unsigned long head_gp_snap;
atomic_t head_count;
struct list_head bulk_head[FREE_N_CHANNELS];
atomic_t bulk_count[FREE_N_CHANNELS];
struct kfree_rcu_cpu_work krw_arr[KFREE_N_BATCHES];
raw_spinlock_t lock;
struct delayed_work monitor_work;
bool initialized;
struct delayed_work page_cache_work;
atomic_t backoff_page_cache_fill;
atomic_t work_in_progress;
struct hrtimer hrtimer;
struct llist_head bkvcache;
int nr_bkv_objs;
};
Members
headList of
kfree_rcu()objects not yet waiting for a grace periodhead_gp_snapSnapshot of RCU state for objects placed to “head”
head_countNumber of objects in rcu_head singular list
bulk_headBulk-List of kvfree_rcu() objects not yet waiting for a grace period
bulk_countNumber of objects in bulk-list
krw_arrArray of batches of
kfree_rcu()objects waiting for a grace periodlockSynchronize access to this structure
monitor_workPromote head to head_free after KFREE_DRAIN_JIFFIES
initializedThe rcu_work fields have been initialized
page_cache_workA work to refill the cache when it is empty
backoff_page_cache_fillDelay cache refills
work_in_progressIndicates that page_cache_work is running
hrtimerA hrtimer for scheduling a page_cache_work
bkvcache
A simple cache list that contains objects for reuse purpose. In order to save some per-cpu space the list is singular. Even though it is lockless an access has to be protected by the per-cpu lock.
nr_bkv_objsnumber of allocated objects at bkvcache.
Description
This is a per-CPU structure. The reason that it is not included in the rcu_data structure is to permit this code to be extracted from the RCU files. Such extraction could allow further optimization of the interactions with the slab allocators.
-
void synchronize_rcu(void)¶
wait until a grace period has elapsed.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Control will return to the caller some time after a full grace
period has elapsed, in other words after all currently executing RCU
read-side critical sections have completed. Note, however, that
upon return from synchronize_rcu(), the caller might well be executing
concurrently with new RCU read-side critical sections that began while
synchronize_rcu() was waiting.
RCU read-side critical sections are delimited by rcu_read_lock()
and rcu_read_unlock(), and may be nested. In addition, but only in
v5.0 and later, regions of code across which interrupts, preemption,
or softirqs have been disabled also serve as RCU read-side critical
sections. This includes hardware interrupt handlers, softirq handlers,
and NMI handlers.
Note that this guarantee implies further memory-ordering guarantees.
On systems with more than one CPU, when synchronize_rcu() returns,
each CPU is guaranteed to have executed a full memory barrier since
the end of its last RCU read-side critical section whose beginning
preceded the call to synchronize_rcu(). In addition, each CPU having
an RCU read-side critical section that extends beyond the return from
synchronize_rcu() is guaranteed to have executed a full memory barrier
after the beginning of synchronize_rcu() and before the beginning of
that RCU read-side critical section. Note that these guarantees include
CPUs that are offline, idle, or executing in user mode, as well as CPUs
that are executing in the kernel.
Furthermore, if CPU A invoked synchronize_rcu(), which returned
to its caller on CPU B, then both CPU A and CPU B are guaranteed
to have executed a full memory barrier during the execution of
synchronize_rcu() -- even if CPU A and CPU B are the same CPU (but
again only if the system has more than one CPU).
Implementation of these memory-ordering guarantees is described here: A Tour Through TREE_RCU’s Grace-Period Memory Ordering.
-
void get_completed_synchronize_rcu_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp)¶
Return a full pre-completed polled state cookie
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgospPlace to put state cookie
Description
Stores into rgosp a value that will always be treated by functions
like poll_state_synchronize_rcu_full() as a cookie whose grace period
has already completed.
-
unsigned long get_state_synchronize_rcu(void)¶
Snapshot current RCU state
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Returns a cookie that is used by a later call to cond_synchronize_rcu()
or poll_state_synchronize_rcu() to determine whether or not a full
grace period has elapsed in the meantime.
-
void get_state_synchronize_rcu_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp)¶
Snapshot RCU state, both normal and expedited
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosplocation to place combined normal/expedited grace-period state
Description
Places the normal and expedited grace-period states in rgosp. This
state value can be passed to a later call to cond_synchronize_rcu_full()
or poll_state_synchronize_rcu_full() to determine whether or not a
grace period (whether normal or expedited) has elapsed in the meantime.
The rcu_gp_oldstate structure takes up twice the memory of an unsigned
long, but is guaranteed to see all grace periods. In contrast, the
combined state occupies less memory, but can sometimes fail to take
grace periods into account.
This does not guarantee that the needed grace period will actually start.
-
unsigned long start_poll_synchronize_rcu(void)¶
Snapshot and start RCU grace period
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Returns a cookie that is used by a later call to cond_synchronize_rcu()
or poll_state_synchronize_rcu() to determine whether or not a full
grace period has elapsed in the meantime. If the needed grace period
is not already slated to start, notifies RCU core of the need for that
grace period.
Interrupts must be enabled for the case where it is necessary to awaken the grace-period kthread.
-
void start_poll_synchronize_rcu_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp)¶
Take a full snapshot and start RCU grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgospvalue from
get_state_synchronize_rcu_full()orstart_poll_synchronize_rcu_full()
Description
Places the normal and expedited grace-period states in *rgos. This
state value can be passed to a later call to cond_synchronize_rcu_full()
or poll_state_synchronize_rcu_full() to determine whether or not a
grace period (whether normal or expedited) has elapsed in the meantime.
If the needed grace period is not already slated to start, notifies
RCU core of the need for that grace period.
Interrupts must be enabled for the case where it is necessary to awaken the grace-period kthread.
-
bool poll_state_synchronize_rcu(unsigned long oldstate)¶
Has the specified RCU grace period completed?
Parameters
unsigned long oldstatevalue from
get_state_synchronize_rcu()orstart_poll_synchronize_rcu()
Description
If a full RCU grace period has elapsed since the earlier call from
which oldstate was obtained, return true, otherwise return false.
If false is returned, it is the caller’s responsibility to invoke this
function later on until it does return true. Alternatively, the caller
can explicitly wait for a grace period, for example, by passing oldstate
to either cond_synchronize_rcu() or cond_synchronize_rcu_expedited()
on the one hand or by directly invoking either synchronize_rcu() or
synchronize_rcu_expedited() on the other.
Yes, this function does not take counter wrap into account.
But counter wrap is harmless. If the counter wraps, we have waited for
more than a billion grace periods (and way more on a 64-bit system!).
Those needing to keep old state values for very long time periods
(many hours even on 32-bit systems) should check them occasionally and
either refresh them or set a flag indicating that the grace period has
completed. Alternatively, they can use get_completed_synchronize_rcu()
to get a guaranteed-completed grace-period state.
In addition, because oldstate compresses the grace-period state for
both normal and expedited grace periods into a single unsigned long,
it can miss a grace period when synchronize_rcu() runs concurrently
with synchronize_rcu_expedited(). If this is unacceptable, please
instead use the _full() variant of these polling APIs.
This function provides the same memory-ordering guarantees that
would be provided by a synchronize_rcu() that was invoked at the call
to the function that provided oldstate, and that returned at the end
of this function.
-
bool poll_state_synchronize_rcu_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp)¶
Has the specified RCU grace period completed?
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgospvalue from
get_state_synchronize_rcu_full()orstart_poll_synchronize_rcu_full()
Description
If a full RCU grace period has elapsed since the earlier call from
which rgosp was obtained, return **true*, otherwise return false.
If false is returned, it is the caller’s responsibility to invoke this
function later on until it does return true. Alternatively, the caller
can explicitly wait for a grace period, for example, by passing rgosp
to cond_synchronize_rcu() or by directly invoking synchronize_rcu().
Yes, this function does not take counter wrap into account.
But counter wrap is harmless. If the counter wraps, we have waited
for more than a billion grace periods (and way more on a 64-bit
system!). Those needing to keep rcu_gp_oldstate values for very
long time periods (many hours even on 32-bit systems) should check
them occasionally and either refresh them or set a flag indicating
that the grace period has completed. Alternatively, they can use
get_completed_synchronize_rcu_full() to get a guaranteed-completed
grace-period state.
This function provides the same memory-ordering guarantees that would
be provided by a synchronize_rcu() that was invoked at the call to
the function that provided rgosp, and that returned at the end of this
function. And this guarantee requires that the root rcu_node structure’s
->gp_seq field be checked instead of that of the rcu_state structure.
The problem is that the just-ending grace-period’s callbacks can be
invoked between the time that the root rcu_node structure’s ->gp_seq
field is updated and the time that the rcu_state structure’s ->gp_seq
field is updated. Therefore, if a single synchronize_rcu() is to
cause a subsequent poll_state_synchronize_rcu_full() to return true,
then the root rcu_node structure is the one that needs to be polled.
-
void cond_synchronize_rcu(unsigned long oldstate)¶
Conditionally wait for an RCU grace period
Parameters
unsigned long oldstatevalue from
get_state_synchronize_rcu(),start_poll_synchronize_rcu(), orstart_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited()
Description
If a full RCU grace period has elapsed since the earlier call to
get_state_synchronize_rcu() or start_poll_synchronize_rcu(), just return.
Otherwise, invoke synchronize_rcu() to wait for a full grace period.
Yes, this function does not take counter wrap into account. But counter wrap is harmless. If the counter wraps, we have waited for more than 2 billion grace periods (and way more on a 64-bit system!), so waiting for a couple of additional grace periods should be just fine.
This function provides the same memory-ordering guarantees that
would be provided by a synchronize_rcu() that was invoked at the call
to the function that provided oldstate and that returned at the end
of this function.
-
void cond_synchronize_rcu_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp)¶
Conditionally wait for an RCU grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgospvalue from
get_state_synchronize_rcu_full(),start_poll_synchronize_rcu_full(), orstart_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited_full()
Description
If a full RCU grace period has elapsed since the call to
get_state_synchronize_rcu_full(), start_poll_synchronize_rcu_full(),
or start_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited_full() from which rgosp was
obtained, just return. Otherwise, invoke synchronize_rcu() to wait
for a full grace period.
Yes, this function does not take counter wrap into account. But counter wrap is harmless. If the counter wraps, we have waited for more than 2 billion grace periods (and way more on a 64-bit system!), so waiting for a couple of additional grace periods should be just fine.
This function provides the same memory-ordering guarantees that
would be provided by a synchronize_rcu() that was invoked at the call
to the function that provided rgosp and that returned at the end of
this function.
-
void rcu_barrier(void)¶
Wait until all in-flight
call_rcu()callbacks complete.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Note that this primitive does not necessarily wait for an RCU grace period
to complete. For example, if there are no RCU callbacks queued anywhere
in the system, then rcu_barrier() is within its rights to return
immediately, without waiting for anything, much less an RCU grace period.
-
void rcu_barrier_throttled(void)¶
Do
rcu_barrier(), but limit to one per second
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
This can be thought of as guard rails around rcu_barrier() that
permits unrestricted userspace use, at least assuming the hardware’s
try_cmpxchg() is robust. There will be at most one call per second to
rcu_barrier() system-wide from use of this function, which means that
callers might needlessly wait a second or three.
This is intended for use by test suites to avoid OOM by flushing RCU callbacks from the previous test before starting the next. See the rcutree.do_rcu_barrier module parameter for more information.
Why not simply make rcu_barrier() more scalable? That might be
the eventual endpoint, but let’s keep it simple for the time being.
Note that the module parameter infrastructure serializes calls to a
given .set() function, but should concurrent .set() invocation ever be
possible, we are ready!
-
void synchronize_rcu_expedited(void)¶
Brute-force RCU grace period
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Wait for an RCU grace period, but expedite it. The basic idea is to
IPI all non-idle non-nohz online CPUs. The IPI handler checks whether
the CPU is in an RCU critical section, and if so, it sets a flag that
causes the outermost rcu_read_unlock() to report the quiescent state
for RCU-preempt or asks the scheduler for help for RCU-sched. On the
other hand, if the CPU is not in an RCU read-side critical section,
the IPI handler reports the quiescent state immediately.
Although this is a great improvement over previous expedited
implementations, it is still unfriendly to real-time workloads, so is
thus not recommended for any sort of common-case code. In fact, if
you are using synchronize_rcu_expedited() in a loop, please restructure
your code to batch your updates, and then use a single synchronize_rcu()
instead.
This has the same semantics as (but is more brutal than) synchronize_rcu().
-
unsigned long start_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited(void)¶
Snapshot current RCU state and start expedited grace period
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Returns a cookie to pass to a call to cond_synchronize_rcu(),
cond_synchronize_rcu_expedited(), or poll_state_synchronize_rcu(),
allowing them to determine whether or not any sort of grace period has
elapsed in the meantime. If the needed expedited grace period is not
already slated to start, initiates that grace period.
-
void start_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp)¶
Take a full snapshot and start expedited grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgospPlace to put snapshot of grace-period state
Description
Places the normal and expedited grace-period states in rgosp. This
state value can be passed to a later call to cond_synchronize_rcu_full()
or poll_state_synchronize_rcu_full() to determine whether or not a
grace period (whether normal or expedited) has elapsed in the meantime.
If the needed expedited grace period is not already slated to start,
initiates that grace period.
-
void cond_synchronize_rcu_expedited(unsigned long oldstate)¶
Conditionally wait for an expedited RCU grace period
Parameters
unsigned long oldstatevalue from
get_state_synchronize_rcu(),start_poll_synchronize_rcu(), orstart_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited()
Description
If any type of full RCU grace period has elapsed since the earlier
call to get_state_synchronize_rcu(), start_poll_synchronize_rcu(),
or start_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited(), just return. Otherwise,
invoke synchronize_rcu_expedited() to wait for a full grace period.
Yes, this function does not take counter wrap into account. But counter wrap is harmless. If the counter wraps, we have waited for more than 2 billion grace periods (and way more on a 64-bit system!), so waiting for a couple of additional grace periods should be just fine.
This function provides the same memory-ordering guarantees that
would be provided by a synchronize_rcu() that was invoked at the call
to the function that provided oldstate and that returned at the end
of this function.
-
void cond_synchronize_rcu_expedited_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp)¶
Conditionally wait for an expedited RCU grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgospvalue from
get_state_synchronize_rcu_full(),start_poll_synchronize_rcu_full(), orstart_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited_full()
Description
If a full RCU grace period has elapsed since the call to
get_state_synchronize_rcu_full(), start_poll_synchronize_rcu_full(),
or start_poll_synchronize_rcu_expedited_full() from which rgosp was
obtained, just return. Otherwise, invoke synchronize_rcu_expedited()
to wait for a full grace period.
Yes, this function does not take counter wrap into account. But counter wrap is harmless. If the counter wraps, we have waited for more than 2 billion grace periods (and way more on a 64-bit system!), so waiting for a couple of additional grace periods should be just fine.
This function provides the same memory-ordering guarantees that
would be provided by a synchronize_rcu() that was invoked at the call
to the function that provided rgosp and that returned at the end of
this function.
-
bool rcu_read_lock_held_common(bool *ret)¶
might we be in RCU-sched read-side critical section?
Parameters
bool *retBest guess answer if lockdep cannot be relied on
Description
Returns true if lockdep must be ignored, in which case *ret contains
the best guess described below. Otherwise returns false, in which
case *ret tells the caller nothing and the caller should instead
consult lockdep.
If CONFIG_DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC is selected, set *ret to nonzero iff in an
RCU-sched read-side critical section. In absence of
CONFIG_DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC, this assumes we are in an RCU-sched read-side
critical section unless it can prove otherwise. Note that disabling
of preemption (including disabling irqs) counts as an RCU-sched
read-side critical section. This is useful for debug checks in functions
that required that they be called within an RCU-sched read-side
critical section.
Check debug_lockdep_rcu_enabled() to prevent false positives during boot and while lockdep is disabled.
Note that if the CPU is in the idle loop from an RCU point of view (ie:
that we are in the section between ct_idle_enter() and ct_idle_exit())
then rcu_read_lock_held() sets *ret to false even if the CPU did an
rcu_read_lock(). The reason for this is that RCU ignores CPUs that are
in such a section, considering these as in extended quiescent state,
so such a CPU is effectively never in an RCU read-side critical section
regardless of what RCU primitives it invokes. This state of affairs is
required --- we need to keep an RCU-free window in idle where the CPU may
possibly enter into low power mode. This way we can notice an extended
quiescent state to other CPUs that started a grace period. Otherwise
we would delay any grace period as long as we run in the idle task.
Similarly, we avoid claiming an RCU read lock held if the current CPU is offline.
-
void rcu_async_hurry(void)¶
Make future async RCU callbacks not lazy.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
After a call to this function, future calls to call_rcu()
will be processed in a timely fashion.
-
void rcu_async_relax(void)¶
Make future async RCU callbacks lazy.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
After a call to this function, future calls to call_rcu()
will be processed in a lazy fashion.
-
void rcu_expedite_gp(void)¶
Expedite future RCU grace periods
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
After a call to this function, future calls to synchronize_rcu() and
friends act as the corresponding synchronize_rcu_expedited() function
had instead been called.
-
void rcu_unexpedite_gp(void)¶
Cancel prior
rcu_expedite_gp()invocation
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Undo a prior call to rcu_expedite_gp(). If all prior calls to
rcu_expedite_gp() are undone by a subsequent call to rcu_unexpedite_gp(),
and if the rcu_expedited sysfs/boot parameter is not set, then all
subsequent calls to synchronize_rcu() and friends will return to
their normal non-expedited behavior.
-
int rcu_read_lock_held(void)¶
might we be in RCU read-side critical section?
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
If CONFIG_DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC is selected, returns nonzero iff in an RCU read-side critical section. In absence of CONFIG_DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC, this assumes we are in an RCU read-side critical section unless it can prove otherwise. This is useful for debug checks in functions that require that they be called within an RCU read-side critical section.
Checks debug_lockdep_rcu_enabled() to prevent false positives during boot and while lockdep is disabled.
Note that rcu_read_lock() and the matching rcu_read_unlock() must
occur in the same context, for example, it is illegal to invoke
rcu_read_unlock() in process context if the matching rcu_read_lock()
was invoked from within an irq handler.
Note that rcu_read_lock() is disallowed if the CPU is either idle or
offline from an RCU perspective, so check for those as well.
-
int rcu_read_lock_bh_held(void)¶
might we be in RCU-bh read-side critical section?
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Check for bottom half being disabled, which covers both the
CONFIG_PROVE_RCU and not cases. Note that if someone uses
rcu_read_lock_bh(), but then later enables BH, lockdep (if enabled)
will show the situation. This is useful for debug checks in functions
that require that they be called within an RCU read-side critical
section.
Check debug_lockdep_rcu_enabled() to prevent false positives during boot.
Note that rcu_read_lock_bh() is disallowed if the CPU is either idle or
offline from an RCU perspective, so check for those as well.
-
void wakeme_after_rcu(struct rcu_head *head)¶
Callback function to awaken a task after grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_head *headPointer to rcu_head member within rcu_synchronize structure
Description
Awaken the corresponding task now that a grace period has elapsed.
-
void init_rcu_head_on_stack(struct rcu_head *head)¶
initialize on-stack rcu_head for debugobjects
Parameters
struct rcu_head *headpointer to rcu_head structure to be initialized
Description
This function informs debugobjects of a new rcu_head structure that has been allocated as an auto variable on the stack. This function is not required for rcu_head structures that are statically defined or that are dynamically allocated on the heap. This function has no effect for !CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD kernel builds.
-
void destroy_rcu_head_on_stack(struct rcu_head *head)¶
destroy on-stack rcu_head for debugobjects
Parameters
struct rcu_head *headpointer to rcu_head structure to be initialized
Description
This function informs debugobjects that an on-stack rcu_head structure
is about to go out of scope. As with init_rcu_head_on_stack(), this
function is not required for rcu_head structures that are statically
defined or that are dynamically allocated on the heap. Also as with
init_rcu_head_on_stack(), this function has no effect for
!CONFIG_DEBUG_OBJECTS_RCU_HEAD kernel builds.
-
unsigned long get_completed_synchronize_rcu(void)¶
Return a pre-completed polled state cookie
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Returns a value that will always be treated by functions like
poll_state_synchronize_rcu() as a cookie whose grace period has already
completed.
-
int srcu_read_lock_held(const struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
might we be in SRCU read-side critical section?
Parameters
const struct srcu_struct *sspThe srcu_struct structure to check
Description
If CONFIG_DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC is selected, returns nonzero iff in an SRCU read-side critical section. In absence of CONFIG_DEBUG_LOCK_ALLOC, this assumes we are in an SRCU read-side critical section unless it can prove otherwise.
Checks debug_lockdep_rcu_enabled() to prevent false positives during boot and while lockdep is disabled.
Note that SRCU is based on its own statemachine and it doesn’t relies on normal RCU, it can be called from the CPU which is in the idle loop from an RCU point of view or offline.
-
srcu_dereference_check¶
srcu_dereference_check (p, ssp, c)
fetch SRCU-protected pointer for later dereferencing
Parameters
pthe pointer to fetch and protect for later dereferencing
ssppointer to the srcu_struct, which is used to check that we really are in an SRCU read-side critical section.
ccondition to check for update-side use
Description
If PROVE_RCU is enabled, invoking this outside of an RCU read-side critical section will result in an RCU-lockdep splat, unless c evaluates to 1. The c argument will normally be a logical expression containing lockdep_is_held() calls.
-
srcu_dereference¶
srcu_dereference (p, ssp)
fetch SRCU-protected pointer for later dereferencing
Parameters
pthe pointer to fetch and protect for later dereferencing
ssppointer to the srcu_struct, which is used to check that we really are in an SRCU read-side critical section.
Description
Makes rcu_dereference_check() do the dirty work. If PROVE_RCU
is enabled, invoking this outside of an RCU read-side critical
section will result in an RCU-lockdep splat.
-
srcu_dereference_notrace¶
srcu_dereference_notrace (p, ssp)
no tracing and no lockdep calls from here
Parameters
pthe pointer to fetch and protect for later dereferencing
ssppointer to the srcu_struct, which is used to check that we really are in an SRCU read-side critical section.
-
int srcu_read_lock(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
register a new reader for an SRCU-protected structure.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct in which to register the new reader.
Description
Enter an SRCU read-side critical section. Note that SRCU read-side
critical sections may be nested. However, it is illegal to
call anything that waits on an SRCU grace period for the same
srcu_struct, whether directly or indirectly. Please note that
one way to indirectly wait on an SRCU grace period is to acquire
a mutex that is held elsewhere while calling synchronize_srcu() or
synchronize_srcu_expedited().
Note that srcu_read_lock() and the matching srcu_read_unlock() must
occur in the same context, for example, it is illegal to invoke
srcu_read_unlock() in an irq handler if the matching srcu_read_lock()
was invoked in process context.
-
int srcu_read_lock_nmisafe(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
register a new reader for an SRCU-protected structure.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct in which to register the new reader.
Description
Enter an SRCU read-side critical section, but in an NMI-safe manner.
See srcu_read_lock() for more information.
-
int srcu_down_read(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
register a new reader for an SRCU-protected structure.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct in which to register the new reader.
Description
Enter a semaphore-like SRCU read-side critical section. Note that
SRCU read-side critical sections may be nested. However, it is
illegal to call anything that waits on an SRCU grace period for the
same srcu_struct, whether directly or indirectly. Please note that
one way to indirectly wait on an SRCU grace period is to acquire
a mutex that is held elsewhere while calling synchronize_srcu() or
synchronize_srcu_expedited(). But if you want lockdep to help you
keep this stuff straight, you should instead use srcu_read_lock().
The semaphore-like nature of srcu_down_read() means that the matching
srcu_up_read() can be invoked from some other context, for example,
from some other task or from an irq handler. However, neither
srcu_down_read() nor srcu_up_read() may be invoked from an NMI handler.
Calls to srcu_down_read() may be nested, similar to the manner in
which calls to down_read() may be nested.
-
void srcu_read_unlock(struct srcu_struct *ssp, int idx)¶
unregister a old reader from an SRCU-protected structure.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct in which to unregister the old reader.
int idxreturn value from corresponding
srcu_read_lock().
Description
Exit an SRCU read-side critical section.
-
void srcu_read_unlock_nmisafe(struct srcu_struct *ssp, int idx)¶
unregister a old reader from an SRCU-protected structure.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct in which to unregister the old reader.
int idxreturn value from corresponding
srcu_read_lock().
Description
Exit an SRCU read-side critical section, but in an NMI-safe manner.
-
void srcu_up_read(struct srcu_struct *ssp, int idx)¶
unregister a old reader from an SRCU-protected structure.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct in which to unregister the old reader.
int idxreturn value from corresponding
srcu_read_lock().
Description
Exit an SRCU read-side critical section, but not necessarily from
the same context as the maching srcu_down_read().
-
void smp_mb__after_srcu_read_unlock(void)¶
ensure full ordering after srcu_read_unlock
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Converts the preceding srcu_read_unlock into a two-way memory barrier.
Call this after srcu_read_unlock, to guarantee that all memory operations that occur after smp_mb__after_srcu_read_unlock will appear to happen after the preceding srcu_read_unlock.
-
int init_srcu_struct(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
initialize a sleep-RCU structure
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspstructure to initialize.
Description
Must invoke this on a given srcu_struct before passing that srcu_struct to any other function. Each srcu_struct represents a separate domain of SRCU protection.
-
bool srcu_readers_active(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
returns true if there are readers. and false otherwise
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspwhich srcu_struct to count active readers (holding srcu_read_lock).
Description
Note that this is not an atomic primitive, and can therefore suffer severe errors when invoked on an active srcu_struct. That said, it can be useful as an error check at cleanup time.
-
void cleanup_srcu_struct(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
deconstruct a sleep-RCU structure
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspstructure to clean up.
Description
Must invoke this after you are finished using a given srcu_struct that
was initialized via init_srcu_struct(), else you leak memory.
-
void call_srcu(struct srcu_struct *ssp, struct rcu_head *rhp, rcu_callback_t func)¶
Queue a callback for invocation after an SRCU grace period
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct in queue the callback
struct rcu_head *rhpstructure to be used for queueing the SRCU callback.
rcu_callback_t funcfunction to be invoked after the SRCU grace period
Description
The callback function will be invoked some time after a full SRCU
grace period elapses, in other words after all pre-existing SRCU
read-side critical sections have completed. However, the callback
function might well execute concurrently with other SRCU read-side
critical sections that started after call_srcu() was invoked. SRCU
read-side critical sections are delimited by srcu_read_lock() and
srcu_read_unlock(), and may be nested.
The callback will be invoked from process context, but must nevertheless be fast and must not block.
-
void synchronize_srcu_expedited(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
Brute-force SRCU grace period
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct with which to synchronize.
Description
Wait for an SRCU grace period to elapse, but be more aggressive about spinning rather than blocking when waiting.
Note that synchronize_srcu_expedited() has the same deadlock and
memory-ordering properties as does synchronize_srcu().
-
void synchronize_srcu(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
wait for prior SRCU read-side critical-section completion
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct with which to synchronize.
Description
Wait for the count to drain to zero of both indexes. To avoid the
possible starvation of synchronize_srcu(), it waits for the count of
the index=((->srcu_idx & 1) ^ 1) to drain to zero at first,
and then flip the srcu_idx and wait for the count of the other index.
Can block; must be called from process context.
Note that it is illegal to call synchronize_srcu() from the corresponding
SRCU read-side critical section; doing so will result in deadlock.
However, it is perfectly legal to call synchronize_srcu() on one
srcu_struct from some other srcu_struct’s read-side critical section,
as long as the resulting graph of srcu_structs is acyclic.
There are memory-ordering constraints implied by synchronize_srcu().
On systems with more than one CPU, when synchronize_srcu() returns,
each CPU is guaranteed to have executed a full memory barrier since
the end of its last corresponding SRCU read-side critical section
whose beginning preceded the call to synchronize_srcu(). In addition,
each CPU having an SRCU read-side critical section that extends beyond
the return from synchronize_srcu() is guaranteed to have executed a
full memory barrier after the beginning of synchronize_srcu() and before
the beginning of that SRCU read-side critical section. Note that these
guarantees include CPUs that are offline, idle, or executing in user mode,
as well as CPUs that are executing in the kernel.
Furthermore, if CPU A invoked synchronize_srcu(), which returned
to its caller on CPU B, then both CPU A and CPU B are guaranteed
to have executed a full memory barrier during the execution of
synchronize_srcu(). This guarantee applies even if CPU A and CPU B
are the same CPU, but again only if the system has more than one CPU.
Of course, these memory-ordering guarantees apply only when
synchronize_srcu(), srcu_read_lock(), and srcu_read_unlock() are
passed the same srcu_struct structure.
Implementation of these memory-ordering guarantees is similar to
that of synchronize_rcu().
If SRCU is likely idle, expedite the first request. This semantic was provided by Classic SRCU, and is relied upon by its users, so TREE SRCU must also provide it. Note that detecting idleness is heuristic and subject to both false positives and negatives.
-
unsigned long get_state_synchronize_srcu(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
Provide an end-of-grace-period cookie
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct to provide cookie for.
Description
This function returns a cookie that can be passed to
poll_state_synchronize_srcu(), which will return true if a full grace
period has elapsed in the meantime. It is the caller’s responsibility
to make sure that grace period happens, for example, by invoking
call_srcu() after return from get_state_synchronize_srcu().
-
unsigned long start_poll_synchronize_srcu(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
Provide cookie and start grace period
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct to provide cookie for.
Description
This function returns a cookie that can be passed to
poll_state_synchronize_srcu(), which will return true if a full grace
period has elapsed in the meantime. Unlike get_state_synchronize_srcu(),
this function also ensures that any needed SRCU grace period will be
started. This convenience does come at a cost in terms of CPU overhead.
-
bool poll_state_synchronize_srcu(struct srcu_struct *ssp, unsigned long cookie)¶
Has cookie’s grace period ended?
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct to provide cookie for.
unsigned long cookieReturn value from
get_state_synchronize_srcu()orstart_poll_synchronize_srcu().
Description
This function takes the cookie that was returned from either
get_state_synchronize_srcu() or start_poll_synchronize_srcu(), and
returns true if an SRCU grace period elapsed since the time that the
cookie was created.
Because cookies are finite in size, wrapping/overflow is possible. This is more pronounced on 32-bit systems where cookies are 32 bits, where in theory wrapping could happen in about 14 hours assuming 25-microsecond expedited SRCU grace periods. However, a more likely overflow lower bound is on the order of 24 days in the case of one-millisecond SRCU grace periods. Of course, wrapping in a 64-bit system requires geologic timespans, as in more than seven million years even for expedited SRCU grace periods.
Wrapping/overflow is much more of an issue for CONFIG_SMP=n systems that also have CONFIG_PREEMPTION=n, which selects Tiny SRCU. This uses a 16-bit cookie, which rcutorture routinely wraps in a matter of a few minutes. If this proves to be a problem, this counter will be expanded to the same size as for Tree SRCU.
-
void srcu_barrier(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
Wait until all in-flight
call_srcu()callbacks complete.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct on which to wait for in-flight callbacks.
-
unsigned long srcu_batches_completed(struct srcu_struct *ssp)¶
return batches completed.
Parameters
struct srcu_struct *sspsrcu_struct on which to report batch completion.
Description
Report the number of batches, correlated with, but not necessarily precisely the same as, the number of grace periods that have elapsed.
-
void hlist_bl_del_rcu(struct hlist_bl_node *n)¶
deletes entry from hash list without re-initialization
Parameters
struct hlist_bl_node *nthe element to delete from the hash list.
Note
hlist_bl_unhashed() on entry does not return true after this, the entry is in an undefined state. It is useful for RCU based lockfree traversal.
Description
In particular, it means that we can not poison the forward pointers that may still be used for walking the hash list.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_bl_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_bl_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_bl_for_each_entry().
-
void hlist_bl_add_head_rcu(struct hlist_bl_node *n, struct hlist_bl_head *h)¶
Parameters
struct hlist_bl_node *nthe element to add to the hash list.
struct hlist_bl_head *hthe list to add to.
Description
Adds the specified element to the specified hlist_bl, while permitting racing traversals.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_bl_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_bl_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_bl_for_each_entry_rcu(), used to prevent memory-consistency
problems on Alpha CPUs. Regardless of the type of CPU, the
list-traversal primitive must be guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
hlist_bl_for_each_entry_rcu¶
hlist_bl_for_each_entry_rcu (tpos, pos, head, member)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
tposthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
posthe
struct hlist_bl_nodeto use as a loop cursor.headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the hlist_bl_node within the struct.
-
list_tail_rcu¶
list_tail_rcu (head)
returns the prev pointer of the head of the list
Parameters
headthe head of the list
Note
This should only be used with the list header, and even then
only if list_del() and similar primitives are not also used on the
list header.
-
void list_add_rcu(struct list_head *new, struct list_head *head)¶
add a new entry to rcu-protected list
Parameters
struct list_head *newnew entry to be added
struct list_head *headlist head to add it after
Description
Insert a new entry after the specified head. This is good for implementing stacks.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as list_add_rcu()
or list_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
list_for_each_entry_rcu().
-
void list_add_tail_rcu(struct list_head *new, struct list_head *head)¶
add a new entry to rcu-protected list
Parameters
struct list_head *newnew entry to be added
struct list_head *headlist head to add it before
Description
Insert a new entry before the specified head. This is useful for implementing queues.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as list_add_tail_rcu()
or list_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
list_for_each_entry_rcu().
-
void list_del_rcu(struct list_head *entry)¶
deletes entry from list without re-initialization
Parameters
struct list_head *entrythe element to delete from the list.
Note
list_empty() on entry does not return true after this,
the entry is in an undefined state. It is useful for RCU based
lockfree traversal.
Description
In particular, it means that we can not poison the forward pointers that may still be used for walking the list.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as list_del_rcu()
or list_add_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
list_for_each_entry_rcu().
Note that the caller is not permitted to immediately free
the newly deleted entry. Instead, either synchronize_rcu()
or call_rcu() must be used to defer freeing until an RCU
grace period has elapsed.
-
void hlist_del_init_rcu(struct hlist_node *n)¶
deletes entry from hash list with re-initialization
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nthe element to delete from the hash list.
Note
list_unhashed() on the node return true after this. It is useful for RCU based read lockfree traversal if the writer side must know if the list entry is still hashed or already unhashed.
Description
In particular, it means that we can not poison the forward pointers that may still be used for walking the hash list and we can only zero the pprev pointer so list_unhashed() will return true after this.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary (such as
holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing with another
list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_add_head_rcu() or
hlist_del_rcu(), running on this same list. However, it is
perfectly legal to run concurrently with the _rcu list-traversal
primitives, such as hlist_for_each_entry_rcu().
-
void list_replace_rcu(struct list_head *old, struct list_head *new)¶
replace old entry by new one
Parameters
struct list_head *oldthe element to be replaced
struct list_head *newthe new element to insert
Description
The old entry will be replaced with the new entry atomically.
Note
old should not be empty.
-
void __list_splice_init_rcu(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *prev, struct list_head *next, void (*sync)(void))¶
join an RCU-protected list into an existing list.
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe RCU-protected list to splice
struct list_head *prevpoints to the last element of the existing list
struct list_head *nextpoints to the first element of the existing list
void (*sync)(void)synchronize_rcu, synchronize_rcu_expedited, ...
Description
The list pointed to by prev and next can be RCU-read traversed concurrently with this function.
Note that this function blocks.
Important note: the caller must take whatever action is necessary to prevent
any other updates to the existing list. In principle, it is possible to
modify the list as soon as sync() begins execution. If this sort of thing
becomes necessary, an alternative version based on call_rcu() could be
created. But only if -really- needed -- there is no shortage of RCU API
members.
-
void list_splice_init_rcu(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head, void (*sync)(void))¶
splice an RCU-protected list into an existing list, designed for stacks.
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe RCU-protected list to splice
struct list_head *headthe place in the existing list to splice the first list into
void (*sync)(void)synchronize_rcu, synchronize_rcu_expedited, ...
-
void list_splice_tail_init_rcu(struct list_head *list, struct list_head *head, void (*sync)(void))¶
splice an RCU-protected list into an existing list, designed for queues.
Parameters
struct list_head *listthe RCU-protected list to splice
struct list_head *headthe place in the existing list to splice the first list into
void (*sync)(void)synchronize_rcu, synchronize_rcu_expedited, ...
-
list_entry_rcu¶
list_entry_rcu (ptr, type, member)
get the struct for this entry
Parameters
ptrthe
struct list_headpointer.typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
This primitive may safely run concurrently with the _rcu list-mutation
primitives such as list_add_rcu() as long as it’s guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
list_first_or_null_rcu¶
list_first_or_null_rcu (ptr, type, member)
get the first element from a list
Parameters
ptrthe list head to take the element from.
typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Note that if the list is empty, it returns NULL.
This primitive may safely run concurrently with the _rcu list-mutation
primitives such as list_add_rcu() as long as it’s guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
list_next_or_null_rcu¶
list_next_or_null_rcu (head, ptr, type, member)
get the next element from a list
Parameters
headthe head for the list.
ptrthe list head to take the next element from.
typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Note that if the ptr is at the end of the list, NULL is returned.
This primitive may safely run concurrently with the _rcu list-mutation
primitives such as list_add_rcu() as long as it’s guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
list_for_each_entry_rcu¶
list_for_each_entry_rcu (pos, head, member, cond...)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
cond...optional lockdep expression if called from non-RCU protection.
Description
This list-traversal primitive may safely run concurrently with
the _rcu list-mutation primitives such as list_add_rcu()
as long as the traversal is guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
list_for_each_entry_srcu¶
list_for_each_entry_srcu (pos, head, member, cond)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
condlockdep expression for the lock required to traverse the list.
Description
This list-traversal primitive may safely run concurrently with
the _rcu list-mutation primitives such as list_add_rcu()
as long as the traversal is guarded by srcu_read_lock().
The lockdep expression srcu_read_lock_held() can be passed as the
cond argument from read side.
-
list_entry_lockless¶
list_entry_lockless (ptr, type, member)
get the struct for this entry
Parameters
ptrthe
struct list_headpointer.typethe type of the struct this is embedded in.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
This primitive may safely run concurrently with the _rcu
list-mutation primitives such as list_add_rcu(), but requires some
implicit RCU read-side guarding. One example is running within a special
exception-time environment where preemption is disabled and where lockdep
cannot be invoked. Another example is when items are added to the list,
but never deleted.
-
list_for_each_entry_lockless¶
list_for_each_entry_lockless (pos, head, member)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_struct within the struct.
Description
This primitive may safely run concurrently with the _rcu
list-mutation primitives such as list_add_rcu(), but requires some
implicit RCU read-side guarding. One example is running within a special
exception-time environment where preemption is disabled and where lockdep
cannot be invoked. Another example is when items are added to the list,
but never deleted.
-
list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu¶
list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu (pos, head, member)
continue iteration over list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_head within the struct.
Description
Continue to iterate over list of given type, continuing after the current position which must have been in the list when the RCU read lock was taken. This would typically require either that you obtained the node from a previous walk of the list in the same RCU read-side critical section, or that you held some sort of non-RCU reference (such as a reference count) to keep the node alive and in the list.
This iterator is similar to list_for_each_entry_from_rcu() except
this starts after the given position and that one starts at the given
position.
-
list_for_each_entry_from_rcu¶
list_for_each_entry_from_rcu (pos, head, member)
iterate over a list from current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the list_node within the struct.
Description
Iterate over the tail of a list starting from a given position, which must have been in the list when the RCU read lock was taken. This would typically require either that you obtained the node from a previous walk of the list in the same RCU read-side critical section, or that you held some sort of non-RCU reference (such as a reference count) to keep the node alive and in the list.
This iterator is similar to list_for_each_entry_continue_rcu() except
this starts from the given position and that one starts from the position
after the given position.
-
void hlist_del_rcu(struct hlist_node *n)¶
deletes entry from hash list without re-initialization
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nthe element to delete from the hash list.
Note
list_unhashed() on entry does not return true after this, the entry is in an undefined state. It is useful for RCU based lockfree traversal.
Description
In particular, it means that we can not poison the forward pointers that may still be used for walking the hash list.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_for_each_entry().
-
void hlist_replace_rcu(struct hlist_node *old, struct hlist_node *new)¶
replace old entry by new one
Parameters
struct hlist_node *oldthe element to be replaced
struct hlist_node *newthe new element to insert
Description
The old entry will be replaced with the new entry atomically.
-
void hlists_swap_heads_rcu(struct hlist_head *left, struct hlist_head *right)¶
swap the lists the hlist heads point to
Parameters
struct hlist_head *leftThe hlist head on the left
struct hlist_head *rightThe hlist head on the right
Description
- The lists start out as [left ][node1 ... ] and
[right ][node2 ... ]
- The lists end up as [left ][node2 ... ]
[right ][node1 ... ]
-
void hlist_add_head_rcu(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_head *h)¶
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nthe element to add to the hash list.
struct hlist_head *hthe list to add to.
Description
Adds the specified element to the specified hlist, while permitting racing traversals.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), used to prevent memory-consistency
problems on Alpha CPUs. Regardless of the type of CPU, the
list-traversal primitive must be guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
void hlist_add_tail_rcu(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_head *h)¶
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nthe element to add to the hash list.
struct hlist_head *hthe list to add to.
Description
Adds the specified element to the specified hlist, while permitting racing traversals.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), used to prevent memory-consistency
problems on Alpha CPUs. Regardless of the type of CPU, the
list-traversal primitive must be guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
void hlist_add_before_rcu(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_node *next)¶
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nthe new element to add to the hash list.
struct hlist_node *nextthe existing element to add the new element before.
Description
Adds the specified element to the specified hlist before the specified node while permitting racing traversals.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), used to prevent memory-consistency
problems on Alpha CPUs.
-
void hlist_add_behind_rcu(struct hlist_node *n, struct hlist_node *prev)¶
Parameters
struct hlist_node *nthe new element to add to the hash list.
struct hlist_node *prevthe existing element to add the new element after.
Description
Adds the specified element to the specified hlist after the specified node while permitting racing traversals.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu(), used to prevent memory-consistency
problems on Alpha CPUs.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu¶
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu (pos, head, member, cond...)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
cond...optional lockdep expression if called from non-RCU protection.
Description
This list-traversal primitive may safely run concurrently with
the _rcu list-mutation primitives such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
as long as the traversal is guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
hlist_for_each_entry_srcu¶
hlist_for_each_entry_srcu (pos, head, member, cond)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
condlockdep expression for the lock required to traverse the list.
Description
This list-traversal primitive may safely run concurrently with
the _rcu list-mutation primitives such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
as long as the traversal is guarded by srcu_read_lock().
The lockdep expression srcu_read_lock_held() can be passed as the
cond argument from read side.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu_notrace¶
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu_notrace (pos, head, member)
iterate over rcu list of given type (for tracing)
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
Description
This list-traversal primitive may safely run concurrently with
the _rcu list-mutation primitives such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
as long as the traversal is guarded by rcu_read_lock().
This is the same as hlist_for_each_entry_rcu() except that it does
not do any RCU debugging or tracing.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu_bh¶
hlist_for_each_entry_rcu_bh (pos, head, member)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
headthe head for your list.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
Description
This list-traversal primitive may safely run concurrently with
the _rcu list-mutation primitives such as hlist_add_head_rcu()
as long as the traversal is guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu¶
hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu (pos, member)
iterate over a hlist continuing after current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu_bh¶
hlist_for_each_entry_continue_rcu_bh (pos, member)
iterate over a hlist continuing after current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
-
hlist_for_each_entry_from_rcu¶
hlist_for_each_entry_from_rcu (pos, member)
iterate over a hlist continuing from current point
Parameters
posthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
memberthe name of the hlist_node within the struct.
-
void hlist_nulls_del_init_rcu(struct hlist_nulls_node *n)¶
deletes entry from hash list with re-initialization
Parameters
struct hlist_nulls_node *nthe element to delete from the hash list.
Note
hlist_nulls_unhashed() on the node return true after this. It is useful for RCU based read lockfree traversal if the writer side must know if the list entry is still hashed or already unhashed.
Description
In particular, it means that we can not poison the forward pointers that may still be used for walking the hash list and we can only zero the pprev pointer so list_unhashed() will return true after this.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary (such as
holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing with another
list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu() or
hlist_nulls_del_rcu(), running on this same list. However, it is
perfectly legal to run concurrently with the _rcu list-traversal
primitives, such as hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu().
-
hlist_nulls_first_rcu¶
hlist_nulls_first_rcu (head)
returns the first element of the hash list.
Parameters
headthe head of the list.
-
hlist_nulls_next_rcu¶
hlist_nulls_next_rcu (node)
returns the element of the list after node.
Parameters
nodeelement of the list.
-
void hlist_nulls_del_rcu(struct hlist_nulls_node *n)¶
deletes entry from hash list without re-initialization
Parameters
struct hlist_nulls_node *nthe element to delete from the hash list.
Note
hlist_nulls_unhashed() on entry does not return true after this, the entry is in an undefined state. It is useful for RCU based lockfree traversal.
Description
In particular, it means that we can not poison the forward pointers that may still be used for walking the hash list.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_nulls_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry().
-
void hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu(struct hlist_nulls_node *n, struct hlist_nulls_head *h)¶
Parameters
struct hlist_nulls_node *nthe element to add to the hash list.
struct hlist_nulls_head *hthe list to add to.
Description
Adds the specified element to the specified hlist_nulls, while permitting racing traversals.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_nulls_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu(), used to prevent memory-consistency
problems on Alpha CPUs. Regardless of the type of CPU, the
list-traversal primitive must be guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
void hlist_nulls_add_tail_rcu(struct hlist_nulls_node *n, struct hlist_nulls_head *h)¶
Parameters
struct hlist_nulls_node *nthe element to add to the hash list.
struct hlist_nulls_head *hthe list to add to.
Description
Adds the specified element to the specified hlist_nulls, while permitting racing traversals.
The caller must take whatever precautions are necessary
(such as holding appropriate locks) to avoid racing
with another list-mutation primitive, such as hlist_nulls_add_head_rcu()
or hlist_nulls_del_rcu(), running on this same list.
However, it is perfectly legal to run concurrently with
the _rcu list-traversal primitives, such as
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu(), used to prevent memory-consistency
problems on Alpha CPUs. Regardless of the type of CPU, the
list-traversal primitive must be guarded by rcu_read_lock().
-
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu¶
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_rcu (tpos, pos, head, member)
iterate over rcu list of given type
Parameters
tposthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
posthe
struct hlist_nulls_nodeto use as a loop cursor.headthe head of the list.
memberthe name of the hlist_nulls_node within the struct.
Description
The barrier() is needed to make sure compiler doesn’t cache first element [1], as this loop can be restarted [2] [1] Documentation/memory-barriers.txt around line 1533 [2] Using RCU hlist_nulls to protect list and objects around line 146
-
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_safe¶
hlist_nulls_for_each_entry_safe (tpos, pos, head, member)
iterate over list of given type safe against removal of list entry
Parameters
tposthe type * to use as a loop cursor.
posthe
struct hlist_nulls_nodeto use as a loop cursor.headthe head of the list.
memberthe name of the hlist_nulls_node within the struct.
-
bool rcu_sync_is_idle(struct rcu_sync *rsp)¶
Are readers permitted to use their fastpaths?
Parameters
struct rcu_sync *rspPointer to rcu_sync structure to use for synchronization
Description
Returns true if readers are permitted to use their fastpaths. Must be invoked within some flavor of RCU read-side critical section.
-
void rcu_sync_init(struct rcu_sync *rsp)¶
Initialize an rcu_sync structure
Parameters
struct rcu_sync *rspPointer to rcu_sync structure to be initialized
-
void rcu_sync_func(struct rcu_head *rhp)¶
Callback function managing reader access to fastpath
Parameters
struct rcu_head *rhpPointer to rcu_head in rcu_sync structure to use for synchronization
Description
This function is passed to call_rcu() function by rcu_sync_enter() and
rcu_sync_exit(), so that it is invoked after a grace period following the
that invocation of enter/exit.
If it is called by rcu_sync_enter() it signals that all the readers were
switched onto slow path.
If it is called by rcu_sync_exit() it takes action based on events that
have taken place in the meantime, so that closely spaced rcu_sync_enter()
and rcu_sync_exit() pairs need not wait for a grace period.
If another rcu_sync_enter() is invoked before the grace period
ended, reset state to allow the next rcu_sync_exit() to let the
readers back onto their fastpaths (after a grace period). If both
another rcu_sync_enter() and its matching rcu_sync_exit() are invoked
before the grace period ended, re-invoke call_rcu() on behalf of that
rcu_sync_exit(). Otherwise, set all state back to idle so that readers
can again use their fastpaths.
-
void rcu_sync_enter(struct rcu_sync *rsp)¶
Force readers onto slowpath
Parameters
struct rcu_sync *rspPointer to rcu_sync structure to use for synchronization
Description
This function is used by updaters who need readers to make use of
a slowpath during the update. After this function returns, all
subsequent calls to rcu_sync_is_idle() will return false, which
tells readers to stay off their fastpaths. A later call to
rcu_sync_exit() re-enables reader fastpaths.
When called in isolation, rcu_sync_enter() must wait for a grace
period, however, closely spaced calls to rcu_sync_enter() can
optimize away the grace-period wait via a state machine implemented
by rcu_sync_enter(), rcu_sync_exit(), and rcu_sync_func().
-
void rcu_sync_exit(struct rcu_sync *rsp)¶
Allow readers back onto fast path after grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_sync *rspPointer to rcu_sync structure to use for synchronization
Description
This function is used by updaters who have completed, and can therefore
now allow readers to make use of their fastpaths after a grace period
has elapsed. After this grace period has completed, all subsequent
calls to rcu_sync_is_idle() will return true, which tells readers that
they can once again use their fastpaths.
-
void rcu_sync_dtor(struct rcu_sync *rsp)¶
Clean up an rcu_sync structure
Parameters
struct rcu_sync *rspPointer to rcu_sync structure to be cleaned up
-
struct rcu_tasks_percpu¶
Per-CPU component of definition for a Tasks-RCU-like mechanism.
Definition:
struct rcu_tasks_percpu {
struct rcu_segcblist cblist;
raw_spinlock_t __private lock;
unsigned long rtp_jiffies;
unsigned long rtp_n_lock_retries;
struct timer_list lazy_timer;
unsigned int urgent_gp;
struct work_struct rtp_work;
struct irq_work rtp_irq_work;
struct rcu_head barrier_q_head;
struct list_head rtp_blkd_tasks;
struct list_head rtp_exit_list;
int cpu;
struct rcu_tasks *rtpp;
};
Members
cblistCallback list.
lockLock protecting per-CPU callback list.
rtp_jiffiesJiffies counter value for statistics.
rtp_n_lock_retriesRough lock-contention statistic.
lazy_timerTimer to unlazify callbacks.
urgent_gpNumber of additional non-lazy grace periods.
rtp_workWork queue for invoking callbacks.
rtp_irq_workIRQ work queue for deferred wakeups.
barrier_q_headRCU callback for barrier operation.
rtp_blkd_tasksList of tasks blocked as readers.
rtp_exit_listList of tasks in the latter portion of do_exit().
cpuCPU number corresponding to this entry.
rtppPointer to the rcu_tasks structure.
-
struct rcu_tasks¶
Definition for a Tasks-RCU-like mechanism.
Definition:
struct rcu_tasks {
struct rcuwait cbs_wait;
raw_spinlock_t cbs_gbl_lock;
struct mutex tasks_gp_mutex;
int gp_state;
int gp_sleep;
int init_fract;
unsigned long gp_jiffies;
unsigned long gp_start;
unsigned long tasks_gp_seq;
unsigned long n_ipis;
unsigned long n_ipis_fails;
struct task_struct *kthread_ptr;
unsigned long lazy_jiffies;
rcu_tasks_gp_func_t gp_func;
pregp_func_t pregp_func;
pertask_func_t pertask_func;
postscan_func_t postscan_func;
holdouts_func_t holdouts_func;
postgp_func_t postgp_func;
call_rcu_func_t call_func;
unsigned int wait_state;
struct rcu_tasks_percpu __percpu *rtpcpu;
int percpu_enqueue_shift;
int percpu_enqueue_lim;
int percpu_dequeue_lim;
unsigned long percpu_dequeue_gpseq;
struct mutex barrier_q_mutex;
atomic_t barrier_q_count;
struct completion barrier_q_completion;
unsigned long barrier_q_seq;
char *name;
char *kname;
};
Members
cbs_waitRCU wait allowing a new callback to get kthread’s attention.
cbs_gbl_lockLock protecting callback list.
tasks_gp_mutexMutex protecting grace period, needed during mid-boot dead zone.
gp_stateGrace period’s most recent state transition (debugging).
gp_sleepPer-grace-period sleep to prevent CPU-bound looping.
init_fractInitial backoff sleep interval.
gp_jiffiesTime of last gp_state transition.
gp_startMost recent grace-period start in jiffies.
tasks_gp_seqNumber of grace periods completed since boot.
n_ipisNumber of IPIs sent to encourage grace periods to end.
n_ipis_failsNumber of IPI-send failures.
kthread_ptrThis flavor’s grace-period/callback-invocation kthread.
lazy_jiffiesNumber of jiffies to allow callbacks to be lazy.
gp_funcThis flavor’s grace-period-wait function.
pregp_funcThis flavor’s pre-grace-period function (optional).
pertask_funcThis flavor’s per-task scan function (optional).
postscan_funcThis flavor’s post-task scan function (optional).
holdouts_funcThis flavor’s holdout-list scan function (optional).
postgp_funcThis flavor’s post-grace-period function (optional).
call_funcThis flavor’s
call_rcu()-equivalent function.wait_stateTask state for synchronous grace-period waits (default TASK_UNINTERRUPTIBLE).
rtpcpuThis flavor’s rcu_tasks_percpu structure.
percpu_enqueue_shiftShift down CPU ID this much when enqueuing callbacks.
percpu_enqueue_limNumber of per-CPU callback queues in use for enqueuing.
percpu_dequeue_limNumber of per-CPU callback queues in use for dequeuing.
percpu_dequeue_gpseqRCU grace-period number to propagate enqueue limit to dequeuers.
barrier_q_mutexSerialize barrier operations.
barrier_q_countNumber of queues being waited on.
barrier_q_completionBarrier wait/wakeup mechanism.
barrier_q_seqSequence number for barrier operations.
nameThis flavor’s textual name.
knameThis flavor’s kthread name.
-
void call_rcu_tasks(struct rcu_head *rhp, rcu_callback_t func)¶
Queue an RCU for invocation task-based grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_head *rhpstructure to be used for queueing the RCU updates.
rcu_callback_t funcactual callback function to be invoked after the grace period
Description
The callback function will be invoked some time after a full grace
period elapses, in other words after all currently executing RCU
read-side critical sections have completed. call_rcu_tasks() assumes
that the read-side critical sections end at a voluntary context
switch (not a preemption!), cond_resched_tasks_rcu_qs(), entry into idle,
or transition to usermode execution. As such, there are no read-side
primitives analogous to rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() because
this primitive is intended to determine that all tasks have passed
through a safe state, not so much for data-structure synchronization.
See the description of call_rcu() for more detailed information on
memory ordering guarantees.
-
void synchronize_rcu_tasks(void)¶
wait until an rcu-tasks grace period has elapsed.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Control will return to the caller some time after a full rcu-tasks
grace period has elapsed, in other words after all currently
executing rcu-tasks read-side critical sections have elapsed. These
read-side critical sections are delimited by calls to schedule(),
cond_resched_tasks_rcu_qs(), idle execution, userspace execution, calls
to synchronize_rcu_tasks(), and (in theory, anyway) cond_resched().
This is a very specialized primitive, intended only for a few uses in
tracing and other situations requiring manipulation of function
preambles and profiling hooks. The synchronize_rcu_tasks() function
is not (yet) intended for heavy use from multiple CPUs.
See the description of synchronize_rcu() for more detailed information
on memory ordering guarantees.
-
void rcu_barrier_tasks(void)¶
Wait for in-flight
call_rcu_tasks()callbacks.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Although the current implementation is guaranteed to wait, it is not obligated to, for example, if there are no pending callbacks.
-
void call_rcu_tasks_rude(struct rcu_head *rhp, rcu_callback_t func)¶
Queue a callback rude task-based grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_head *rhpstructure to be used for queueing the RCU updates.
rcu_callback_t funcactual callback function to be invoked after the grace period
Description
The callback function will be invoked some time after a full grace
period elapses, in other words after all currently executing RCU
read-side critical sections have completed. call_rcu_tasks_rude()
assumes that the read-side critical sections end at context switch,
cond_resched_tasks_rcu_qs(), or transition to usermode execution (as
usermode execution is schedulable). As such, there are no read-side
primitives analogous to rcu_read_lock() and rcu_read_unlock() because
this primitive is intended to determine that all tasks have passed
through a safe state, not so much for data-structure synchronization.
See the description of call_rcu() for more detailed information on
memory ordering guarantees.
-
void synchronize_rcu_tasks_rude(void)¶
wait for a rude rcu-tasks grace period
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Control will return to the caller some time after a rude rcu-tasks
grace period has elapsed, in other words after all currently
executing rcu-tasks read-side critical sections have elapsed. These
read-side critical sections are delimited by calls to schedule(),
cond_resched_tasks_rcu_qs(), userspace execution (which is a schedulable
context), and (in theory, anyway) cond_resched().
This is a very specialized primitive, intended only for a few uses in
tracing and other situations requiring manipulation of function preambles
and profiling hooks. The synchronize_rcu_tasks_rude() function is not
(yet) intended for heavy use from multiple CPUs.
See the description of synchronize_rcu() for more detailed information
on memory ordering guarantees.
-
void rcu_barrier_tasks_rude(void)¶
Wait for in-flight
call_rcu_tasks_rude()callbacks.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Although the current implementation is guaranteed to wait, it is not obligated to, for example, if there are no pending callbacks.
-
void call_rcu_tasks_trace(struct rcu_head *rhp, rcu_callback_t func)¶
Queue a callback trace task-based grace period
Parameters
struct rcu_head *rhpstructure to be used for queueing the RCU updates.
rcu_callback_t funcactual callback function to be invoked after the grace period
Description
The callback function will be invoked some time after a trace rcu-tasks
grace period elapses, in other words after all currently executing
trace rcu-tasks read-side critical sections have completed. These
read-side critical sections are delimited by calls to rcu_read_lock_trace()
and rcu_read_unlock_trace().
See the description of call_rcu() for more detailed information on
memory ordering guarantees.
-
void synchronize_rcu_tasks_trace(void)¶
wait for a trace rcu-tasks grace period
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Control will return to the caller some time after a trace rcu-tasks
grace period has elapsed, in other words after all currently executing
trace rcu-tasks read-side critical sections have elapsed. These read-side
critical sections are delimited by calls to rcu_read_lock_trace()
and rcu_read_unlock_trace().
This is a very specialized primitive, intended only for a few uses in
tracing and other situations requiring manipulation of function preambles
and profiling hooks. The synchronize_rcu_tasks_trace() function is not
(yet) intended for heavy use from multiple CPUs.
See the description of synchronize_rcu() for more detailed information
on memory ordering guarantees.
-
void rcu_barrier_tasks_trace(void)¶
Wait for in-flight
call_rcu_tasks_trace()callbacks.
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Although the current implementation is guaranteed to wait, it is not obligated to, for example, if there are no pending callbacks.
-
bool rcu_gp_might_be_stalled(void)¶
Is it likely that the grace period is stalled?
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Returns true if the current grace period is sufficiently old that
it is reasonable to assume that it might be stalled. This can be
useful when deciding whether to allocate memory to enable RCU-mediated
freeing on the one hand or just invoking synchronize_rcu() on the other.
The latter is preferable when the grace period is stalled.
Note that sampling of the .gp_start and .gp_seq fields must be done carefully to avoid false positives at the beginnings and ends of grace periods.
-
void rcu_cpu_stall_reset(void)¶
restart stall-warning timeout for current grace period
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
To perform the reset request from the caller, disable stall detection until 3 fqs loops have passed. This is required to ensure a fresh jiffies is loaded. It should be safe to do from the fqs loop as enough timer interrupts and context switches should have passed.
The caller must disable hard irqs.
-
int rcu_stall_chain_notifier_register(struct notifier_block *n)¶
Add an RCU CPU stall notifier
Parameters
struct notifier_block *nEntry to add.
Description
Adds an RCU CPU stall notifier to an atomic notifier chain. The action passed to a notifier will be RCU_STALL_NOTIFY_NORM or friends. The data will be the duration of the stalled grace period, in jiffies, coerced to a void* pointer.
Returns 0 on success, -EEXIST on error.
-
int rcu_stall_chain_notifier_unregister(struct notifier_block *n)¶
Remove an RCU CPU stall notifier
Parameters
struct notifier_block *nEntry to add.
Description
Removes an RCU CPU stall notifier from an atomic notifier chain.
Returns zero on success, -ENOENT on failure.
-
void rcu_read_lock_trace(void)¶
mark beginning of RCU-trace read-side critical section
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
When synchronize_rcu_tasks_trace() is invoked by one task, then that
task is guaranteed to block until all other tasks exit their read-side
critical sections. Similarly, if call_rcu_trace() is invoked on one
task while other tasks are within RCU read-side critical sections,
invocation of the corresponding RCU callback is deferred until after
the all the other tasks exit their critical sections.
For more details, please see the documentation for rcu_read_lock().
-
void rcu_read_unlock_trace(void)¶
mark end of RCU-trace read-side critical section
Parameters
voidno arguments
Description
Pairs with a preceding call to rcu_read_lock_trace(), and nesting is
allowed. Invoking a rcu_read_unlock_trace() when there is no matching
rcu_read_lock_trace() is verboten, and will result in lockdep complaints.
For more details, please see the documentation for rcu_read_unlock().
-
synchronize_rcu_mult¶
synchronize_rcu_mult (...)
Wait concurrently for multiple grace periods
Parameters
...List of
call_rcu()functions for different grace periods to wait on
Description
This macro waits concurrently for multiple types of RCU grace periods.
For example, synchronize_rcu_mult(call_rcu, call_rcu_tasks) would wait
on concurrent RCU and RCU-tasks grace periods. Waiting on a given SRCU
domain requires you to write a wrapper function for that SRCU domain’s
call_srcu() function, with this wrapper supplying the pointer to the
corresponding srcu_struct.
Note that call_rcu_hurry() should be used instead of call_rcu()
because in kernels built with CONFIG_RCU_LAZY=y the delay between the
invocation of call_rcu() and that of the corresponding RCU callback
can be multiple seconds.
The first argument tells Tiny RCU’s _wait_rcu_gp() not to
bother waiting for RCU. The reason for this is because anywhere
synchronize_rcu_mult() can be called is automatically already a full
grace period.
-
void rcuref_init(rcuref_t *ref, unsigned int cnt)¶
Initialize a rcuref reference count with the given reference count
Parameters
rcuref_t *refPointer to the reference count
unsigned int cntThe initial reference count typically ‘1’
-
unsigned int rcuref_read(rcuref_t *ref)¶
Read the number of held reference counts of a rcuref
Parameters
rcuref_t *refPointer to the reference count
Return
The number of held references (0 ... N)
-
bool rcuref_get(rcuref_t *ref)¶
Acquire one reference on a rcuref reference count
Parameters
rcuref_t *refPointer to the reference count
Description
Similar to atomic_inc_not_zero() but saturates at RCUREF_MAXREF.
Provides no memory ordering, it is assumed the caller has guaranteed the object memory to be stable (RCU, etc.). It does provide a control dependency and thereby orders future stores. See documentation in lib/rcuref.c
Return
False if the attempt to acquire a reference failed. This happens when the last reference has been put already
True if a reference was successfully acquired
-
bool rcuref_put_rcusafe(rcuref_t *ref)¶
Release one reference for a rcuref reference count RCU safe
Parameters
rcuref_t *refPointer to the reference count
Description
Provides release memory ordering, such that prior loads and stores are done before, and provides an acquire ordering on success such that free() must come after.
Can be invoked from contexts, which guarantee that no grace period can
happen which would free the object concurrently if the decrement drops
the last reference and the slowpath races against a concurrent get() and
put() pair. rcu_read_lock()’ed and atomic contexts qualify.
Return
True if this was the last reference with no future references possible. This signals the caller that it can safely release the object which is protected by the reference counter.
False if there are still active references or the put() raced with a concurrent get()/put() pair. Caller is not allowed to release the protected object.
-
bool rcuref_put(rcuref_t *ref)¶
Release one reference for a rcuref reference count
Parameters
rcuref_t *refPointer to the reference count
Description
Can be invoked from any context.
Provides release memory ordering, such that prior loads and stores are done before, and provides an acquire ordering on success such that free() must come after.
Return
True if this was the last reference with no future references possible. This signals the caller that it can safely schedule the object, which is protected by the reference counter, for deconstruction.
False if there are still active references or the put() raced with a concurrent get()/put() pair. Caller is not allowed to deconstruct the protected object.
-
bool same_state_synchronize_rcu_full(struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp1, struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp2)¶
Are two old-state values identical?
Parameters
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp1First old-state value.
struct rcu_gp_oldstate *rgosp2Second old-state value.
Description
The two old-state values must have been obtained from either
get_state_synchronize_rcu_full(), start_poll_synchronize_rcu_full(),
or get_completed_synchronize_rcu_full(). Returns true if the two
values are identical and false otherwise. This allows structures
whose lifetimes are tracked by old-state values to push these values
to a list header, allowing those structures to be slightly smaller.
Note that equality is judged on a bitwise basis, so that an rcu_gp_oldstate structure with an already-completed state in one field will compare not-equal to a structure with an already-completed state in the other field. After all, the rcu_gp_oldstate structure is opaque so how did such a situation come to pass in the first place?